Flamenco - Technical Manual - Tunstall GmbH

All the reassurance you need 

Nursecall: by Tunstall 

Technical 

Manual

The manual was prepared with due care, and all details were checked for their 

correctness. However, we cannot assume any responsibility form possible 

discrepancies or incomplete information. 

All rights to this documentation are reserved, in particular copyright and distribution 

rights. No part of this documentation may be reproduced in any form or processed, 

copied or distributed using electronic systems without the prior written consent by 

Tunstall GmbH. 

We reserve the right for implementing technical changes. 

Tunstall GmbH

Table of Contents 

1. Safety ................................... 3 

1.1 About this chapter ................................ 3 

1.2 Organisational measures .......................... 3 

1.3 Symbols used in this manual ...................... 4 

1.4 Intended use .................................... 4 

1.5 General safety rules .............................. 5 

1.6 Technical standards .............................. 6 

2. Necessary previous knowledge ............ 7 

2.1 System overview ................................. 7 

2.2 System structure ................................. 8 

2.3 Speech communication ........................... 9 

2.4 Wards and groups ................................ 10 

2.5 Cables / Wiring .................................. 11 

2.6 System limits .................................... 11 

2.7 Configuration / SystemOrganizer ................... 12 

3. Room types ............................. 13 

3.1 Patient / resident room ............................ 14 

3.2 Function room ................................... 25 

3.3 Ward bathroom .................................. 26 

3.4 Nurse station .................................... 28 

3.5 Corridor ........................................ 32 

4. Installation examples ..................... 33 

5. Installation work sequence ................ 39 

6. Defining the mounting positions ........... 41 

7. Installing the back boxes ................. 47 

8. Laying the cables ........................ 49 

8.1 Cable legend .................................... 49 

8.2 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) ................ 50 

8.3 Electric power supply cables (Ip) ................... 51 

8.4 Current demand ................................. 52 

8.5 Group bus OSYnet ............................... 54 

8.6 Room bus RAN .................................. 57 

9. Activating the power supply ............... 59 

9.1 Installing the power supply unit ..................... 59 

9.2 Check the current supply .......................... 

59 

Flamenco - Technical Manual, 10/11 (Rev. 5.0), 00 8812 60 

1

2 

10. Configure the OSY-ControlCenter ......... 61 

11. Voltage surge protection .................. 63 

11.1 SPD modules .................................... 64 

12. Functional checks ........................ 67 

12.1 Checking the room installation ..................... 68 

12.2 Checking the ward functions ....................... 72 

12.3 Checking the consoles ............................ 74 

12.4 Checking functions between wards ................. 74 

13. Spare parts .............................. 75 

14. Product leaflets .......................... 81 

14.1 Display equipment ............................... 85 

14.2 Switches ........................................ 95 

14.3 Room terminals .................................. 103 

14.4 Connection sockets .............................. 119 

14.5 Consoles ....................................... 129 

14.6 Interfaces in the room ............................ 135 

14.7 Interfaces in the group ............................ 147 

14.8 Accessories ..................................... 157 

14.9 System devices .................................. 161 

14.10 Power supply .................................... 169 

14.11 Installation ...................................... 

191 

Flamenco - Technical Manual, 10/11 (Rev. 5.0), 00 8812 60


1. Safety 

You are strongly advised to carefully study this chapter before starting to work 

at the nurse call system. 

1.1 About this chapter 

The Flamenco products have been designed and produced according to the 

latest state-of-the-art. Nevertheless, potentially dangerous situations may oc‐ 

cur during installation, modification or de-installation of the system or of its com‐ 

ponents if the executing persons on-site act in a non-professional manner, or 

if pertinent safety instructions are ignored. Non-compliance with general and 

special safety instructions may jeopardise the life and well-being of installation 

personnel or third persons, and such misbehaviour may lead to damage to sys‐ 

tem components and other equipment. 

Information in this chapter is of general nature. Special and more detailed 

safety instructions are presented in the various chapters when safety-hazard‐ 

ous work details or processes are described 

1.2 Organisational measures 

Electrical systems shall be installed, modified, serviced and maintained by au‐ 

thorised specialists of the trade only. Among others, these are personnel from 

the local electric power companies and electricians who are listed on their 

roster. The registered electrician shall contact the power company to formally 

request the commissioning of any new electric installation. As such, electric in‐ 

stallation personnel shall be responsible for the safety and correct function of 

the relevant electric systems. 

Commercial users of electric installations shall arrange for regular servicing 

and maintenance of the respective electric equipment. Users and operators 

shall observe the legal aspects as final responsibility rests with themselves. 

Any work at the electric system and installation must be executed by trained 

and authorised specialists of the trade. 

The technical manual addresses the specialists of the electric trade. 

Before starting any installation work, carefully study this manual - with particular 

attention to the chapter on “Safety”. Later on, i.e. while working at the system, 

it will be too late! 

Keep this manual and any further documents which you may need readily avail‐ 

able during the installation work and whenever effecting any service or main‐ 

tenance work at the system. 

3

1. Safety 

4 

Comply with all generally applicable laws as well as special rules and directives 

for accident prevention and environmental protection. 

All parts and any equipment used for the installation shall comply with the 

technical demands and criteria set forth by Tunstall GmbH. This is always ensu‐ 

red when using original parts. 

1.3 Symbols used in this manual 

When studying this manual, you will come across a number of symbols which 

direct your attention to specific issues: 

WARNING ! This symbol refers to actions which may incur personal injuries 

(Danger to life or well-being). 

WARNING ! This symbols refers to actions which could endanger persons 

through electrical voltage or electrical current. 

Components sensitive to electrostatics ! This symbol indicates components 

which are sensitive to electrostatics. Avoid any contact with these components 

as this may induce damage to such component. 

CAUTION ! This symbol refers to actions which may incur damage to the sys‐ 

tem or components due to electrical voltage or electrical current. 

NOTE ! Here you will find supplementary and otherwise useful information. 

In the text passages you will come across symbols which always have 

the same meaning: 

A square before the text means: 

“This is part of a listing.“. 

An filled-in circle in front of a text means: 

“This is what you have to do.” 

An open circle in front of a text means: 

“This is the result of an action.” 

1.4 Intended use 

All Flamenco products are designed for use in the nurse call system, and here 

again, only in the manner as described in this technical manual. Any other ap‐ 

plication of use shall be considered as not authorised, and Tunstall GmbH will 

not accept any liability for damage resulting from any non-compliance with this 

rule. 


1.5 General safety rules 


1. Safety 

Closely observe all safety instructions from this manual, pertinent national 

rules and directives for accident prevention as well as the owner's / user's 

internal rules and procedures for safety at work and while handling or oper‐ 

ating the system. 

Avoid any safety-hazardous work methods. 

Before starting to work, personnel shall make themselves familiar with the 

working environment which includes a survey of obstacles in the working 

and operating area. 

Use only original fuses with the correct rating for the specific application. 

Only install and wire up the equipment in a de-energized state. 

If work details must be executed at installed components they must be free 

from residual voltage. Before working at such parts, use applicable instru‐ 

ments to check the electric status. 

If work must be executed at electrically live components, a second person 

should act as a safety attendant who in case of an emergency can turn the 

main switch off. 

In case of any fault or malfunction, shut off the electrical power. Do not con‐ 

tinue to work until the fault has been corrected. 

Protect all system components from direct wetness. 

The various components of the Flamenco system are fitted with elements 

sensitive to electrostatics. Any discharge of electrostatic energy may dam‐ 

age such parts. Therefore, avoid any direct contact with these electrostatic‐ 

ally sensitive components. 

For further information regarding the installation and functional check refer 

to German standard DIN VDE 0834. 

5

1. Safety 

1.6 Technical standards 

6 

Close observe the following standards which are applicable to nurse call sys‐ 

tems: 

DIN VDE 0834-1 0834-1:2000-04: Call systems in hospitals, nursing homes 

and similar institutions - Part 1: Requirements for equipment, erection and 

operation 

DIN VDE 0834-2; VDE 0834-2:2000-04: Call systems in hospitals, nursing 

homes and similar institutions - Part 2: - Environmental conditions and elec‐ 

tromagnetic compatibility 

ISO 11197: Medical supply units 

EN 60601-1: Medical electrical equipment - Part 1: General requirements 

for basic safety and essential performance 

EN 60601-1-1: Medical electrical equipment - Part 1: General safety re‐ 

quirements for medical electrical systems 

EN 50081-1: Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC), basic specification for 

emitted interference 

EN 50082-1: Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC), basic specification for 

immunity to interference 

DIN VDE 0100: Rules for the installation of high-voltage systems with nom‐ 

inal voltage up to 1000 V 

DIN VDE 0100-710: Erection of low-voltage installations - Requirements for 

special installations or locations Part 710: Medical locations 

EN 60950-1: Information technology equipment “Safety“ Part 1: General re‐ 

quirements 

Also observe additional national rules for installations. 


2. Necessary previous knowledge 

2.1 System overview 

Ward 4 Ward 5 

Ward 2 

Ward 1 

Fig. 1: System overview 


Ward 3 

OSY‐ControlCenter 

PS/DECT 

Telephony 

(DECT, VoIP, GSM) 

HIS 

... 

Control Centre 

7


2.2 System structure 

8 

PS 

DECT 

HIS 

... 

The nurse call system uses a bus system which comprises a group bus OSYnet 

and a room bus RAN. The group bus OSYnet links the individual rooms and po‐ 

tential interfaces in the ward. The room bus RAN links the equipment and 

devices in the rooms themselves. 

The respective room terminal controls the room bus RAN and forms the 

connection between room bus RAN and group bus OSYnet: ComTerminal Fla‐ 

menco, RoomTerminal Flamenco, ControlTerminal Flamenco, ControlTerminal 

with doorplate Flamenco. 

System control is realised in the OSY-ControlCenter which controls the data 

flow as well as all speech communication. 

If the OSY-ControlCenter should fail or break down, decentralised OSYnet- 

SafetyControllers can takeover the control of the basic nurse call functions. 

These controllers are fitted to ward's OSYnet group bus. 

Decentralised power supply units provide the electric power for the system. 

Number of units and their location depend on the specific demand for electric 

power. Power for the OSY-ControlCenter is also provided via an external power 

supply unit. 

Group 4 

Group 3 

OSYnet 

RAN RAN 

Room 1 Room 2 

OSYnet 

RAN RAN 

OSY-ControlCenter Room 1 Room 2 

Fig. 2: System structure 

Group 2 

Group 1 


2.3 Speech communication 



Speech communication and data transmission are physically and logically se‐ 

parated. Two speech paths are standard for each group. When designed in 

segments, each group will feature more than two speech paths, however, this 

arrangement requires special planning and installation. 

The system's speech line links the system-inherent speech units: 

ComTerminal, Patient handset, ComStation BUS , ComStation PC , ComStation CT , 

ManagementCenter PC , ManagementCenter PC Push buttons as well as the an‐ 

nouncement loudspeakers as separate units or integrated in the corridor dis‐ 

plays. 

2.3.1 Non-system speech paths 

Aside from the speech communication within the nurse call system it‐ 

self,speech communication may also be realised using other devices: 

ComStation TEL , patient telephone, cordless phone (DECT or GSM mobile) etc. 

The interfaces to the PBX are provided in the OSY-ControlCenter. 

These devices can be used as virtually fully equivalent with the system's 

speech communication devices. Their use may be exclusively or mixed with the 

other units. However, planning and realisation of such solutions require detailed 

know-how of the technology involved, the operational implementation and sub‐ 

sequent functional and organisational procedures. 

For the installation refer to and observe the specific manufacturer's documents. 

DECT 

PBX 

OSY-ControlCenter 

Cordless phone 

Patient telephone 

9


2.4 Wards and groups 

10 

Ward 5 

Ward 3 

Ward 6 

Ward 4 

Ward 1 Ward 2 

Organisation of the 

hospital 

Group 3 

Group 2 

Group 1 

Flamenco technology 

Wards are the organisational entities in hospitals. Therefore, a ward is an entity 

also for the nurse call operation in Flamenco nurse call systems. However, the 

physical structure of Flamenco call systems is almost independent of this or‐ 

ganisation. 

In the development of the Flamenco technology, the organisational structure 

of the wards was decoupled from the technical structure. Rather than the ward, 

the 'physical' group is an entity - technically speaking, that is. Each group is 

linked to a group bus OSYnet and is controlled from a control unit (acting as a 

building block of the central OSY-ControlCenter). One group may comprise 

several wards. And what is more, wards may be 'distributed' onto several 

groups. 

This group-oriented arrangement allows for a substantial reduction of the ne‐ 

cessary control units. The number of these control units and groups, respect‐ 

ively, is not determined by the number of wards but rather by the building struc‐ 

ture and by the desired fail-safe rating. 

This independence from the physical structure is a considerable advantage as 

there is no need to always keep in mind the eventual organisational structure 

when planning for wiring and equipment for the installation. The system can be 

amended at any later date to meet new organisational structure, and this can 

be realised without dealing with the physical structure. 

Ward = Organisational entity 

Group = Physical entity 


2.5 Cables / Wiring 



Data cables, e.g. CAT7 (22 AWG) or commercially available communication 

cables IY(ST)Y... can be used for group bus OSYnet. 

Power supply for all components is realised with a separate net (ring system), 

also with commercially available cables, e.g. NYM 2x2.5 mm 2 . On average, one 

power supply unit is required for every 25 rooms. 

The room bus RAN is also realised with commercially available communication 

cables IY(ST)Y... 

Maximum cable length for the group bus OSYnet is 700 m. In exceptional cir‐ 

cumstances, it may be extended for another 700 m. In this case, an OSYnet- 

Gateway (order no. 77 4001 00) is required. 

2.6 System limits 

A physical group may comprise up to 110 bus users, as there are: 

ComTerminal Flamenco 

RoomTerminal Flamenco 

ControlTerminal Flamenco 

ControlTerminal with doorplate Flamenco 

ComStationCT Flamenco 

Corridor display Alpha 16 

Corridor display Alpha 16, double-sided 

ComStationPC OSYlink-Door entry speaker 

OSYlink-Group lamp 

OSYlink-Universal 

OSYlink-Announcement 

OSYnet-SafetyController 

11


2.7 Configuration / SystemOrganizer 

12 

A special software, the SystemOrganizer (order no. 77 0750 00) is used to cent‐ 

rally configure the complete nurse call system. 

The SystemOrganizer is applied for the whole system administration, from inital 

order processing via general definition and planning for the nurse call system 

to later customer service work on location or via partner. The comprehensive 

software also permits remote access to the system with the possibility for con‐ 

figuration, servicing and fault analysis. 

Users are allocated to several user groups, and specific access rights can be 

defined for each group. 

Fig. 3: SystemOrganizer software 



3. Room types 

The following pages present various types of rooms showing examples of the 

system and equipment installed. 

13

3. Room types 

3.1 Patient / resident room 

3.1.1 Patient / resident room with speech 

OSYnet + Ip OSYnet + Ip 

14 

77 0510 00 

Ie 

Entertainment 

In 

In 

77 0170 00 

Is 

Entertainment system by customer 

70 0113 00 

74 0747 00 

In 

74 0747 00 

70 0111 01 

In 

70 0115 01 

70 0424 00 

Entertainment 

Ie 

Entertainment 

Ie 

70 0434 00 


Is

For each room 

For each bed 

In WC room 


3. Room types 

ComTerminal Flamenco 77 0510 00 

Room lamp for display of all types of calls and presence states: 

e.g. Room lamp, 3 sections 

optional with additional individual indication for WC call / 

WC emergency call: e.g. Room lamp, 4 sections 

Connection socket combi or 

Connection socket combi, bedhead unit 

77 0170 00 

77 0170 10 

70 0424 00 

70 0434 00 

Patient handset 74 0747 00 

Where additional indication for WC call / WC emergency call is 

desired, e.g. as directional indicator in front of the WC: 

Room lamp code blue/cardiac alarm, WC 

77 0170 01 

Cancel button for WC call / WC emergency call 

e.g. Cancel switch/WC wp 70 0113 00 

There is a selection of call devices for use at or near wash 

basin, WC, shower, bath tub: 

Call switch/WC wp 

Pull cord call switch/WC wp 

Pneumatic call switch/WC 

In the seating area (optional) 

70 0111 01 

70 0115 01 

70 0106 01 

Call button, e.g. Call switch wp 70 0111 00 

Necessary accessories: Refer to table on page 47. 

Cable legend: Refer to page 49. 

15

3. Room types 

3.1.2 Patient / Resident room 

without speech, with ControlTerminal 


16 

In 

In 

70 0119 00 

In 

77 0550 00 

In 

70 0113 00 

70 0710 00 

70 0710 00 

In 

70 0111 01 

In 

70 0171 03 

70 0171 50 

70 0115 01 


In

For each room 

For each bed 

In WC room 


Options: 



3. Room types 

77 0550 00 

77 0551 00 

ControlTerminal installation kit 77 0960 00 

ControlTerminal ConfigSet 

(only one required for the nurse call system) 

77 0920 00 

Staff presence combination with call tone, bedhead unit 70 0119 00 

Connection socket with call tone, bedhead unit or 

Connection socket with call tone, bedhead unit 

Options: 

Pear push switch incl. call and light switch, 2 m cable 


Pear push switch incl. 2 call switches, 2 m cable 


70 0171 03 

70 0171 50 

70 0710 00 

70 0710 01 

70 0711 00 

70 0711 01 









70 0111 01 

70 0115 01 

70 0106 01 




17

3. Room types 

3.1.3 Patient / resident room 

without speech, with RoomTerminal 

18 


77 0520 00 

In 

In 

In 

77 0170 00 

70 0113 00 

70 0710 00 

70 0710 00 

In 

70 0111 01 

In 

70 0171 03 

70 0171 50 

70 0115 01 


In

For each room 

For each bed 

In WC room 


3. Room types 

RoomTerminal Flamenco 77 0520 00 


e.g. Room lamp, 3 sections 

optional with additional individual indication for WC call / 

WC emergency call: e.g. Room lamp, 4 sections 

Connection socket with call tone, bedhead unit or 

Connection socket with call tone, bedhead unit 

Options: 





Where additional indication for WC call / WC emergency call is 

desired, e.g. as directional indicator in front of the WC: 

Room lamp code blue/cardiac alarm, WC 

77 0170 00 

77 0170 10 

70 0171 03 

70 0171 50 

70 0710 00 

70 0710 01 

70 0711 00 

70 0711 01 

77 0170 01 









70 0111 01 

70 0115 01 

70 0106 01 




19

3. Room types 

3.1.4 Patient room: Light switching 


20 

Useable relays 

Entertainment 

Ie 

Room light 

Reading light 

Latching relay (electronic): 

ELTAKO, ES60-TX60-24VDC 

ELTAKO, ES75-100-12..24 VDC 

SCHIELE entrelec TX60-24V 

BIAIG electronics TX60-24V 

Latching relay (mechanical): 

ELTAKO, 1S9-24 VDC 

ELTAKO, S91-100-24 VDC 


70 0424 00 

Entertainment 

Ie 

Is 

RAN 

Pulse duration 150 ms 

24 V d.c. voltage 

Switching relay (mechanical): 

ELTAKO, R12-100-24 VDC (for top-hat rail) 

ELTAKO, R91-100-24 VDC (surface mounting / back box) 

FINDER, 49.61-7024.4050 

Connection socket combi (70 0424 00): Room light and reading light 

Connection socket combi, bedhead unit (70 0734 00): Room light and reading 

light 

Connection socket with call tone, bedhead unit (70 0171 03): Room light or rea‐ 

ding light 

Connection socket with call tone, bedhead unit Kanal (70 0171 50): Room light 

or reading light 


3.1.5 Patient room: TV connection 

3.1.5.1 Standard TV set (open TV tone) 


Entertainment 

Ie 

70 0424 00 

70 0860 00 

Entertainment 

RAN 


In 

Ie 

Ia 

Data 


74 0747 00 

00 0280 40 

70 0360 10 

70 0360 20 

3. Room types 

Infrared 

Connection socket combi (70 0424 00) und Connection socket combi, bed‐ 

head unit (70 0434 00) allow TV control in combination with patient handset 

(74 0747 00) and the RAN interface TV (70 0860 00) and IR TV control module 

universal (70 0360 10). 

IR TV control module universal (70 0360 10) allows the control of standard TV 

sets using infrared signals. Additionally needed: Kit for IR TV control module 

(70 0360 20), Addressing plug for IR TV control module (70 0360 30) and onetime 

TV control module programming service (70 0360 50). 

Note: No tone transmission to patient handset. 

21

3. Room types 

3.1.5.2 Patient room: TV connection 

Standard TV set with tone transmission to Patient handset 


22 

Entertain− 

ment 

Ie 

Entertainment 

70 0424 50 

70 0860 00 

RAN 

In 

Ie 

Ia 

Data 


Ton 

74 0747 00 

Ia2 

00 0280 40 

70 0360 11 

70 0360 21 

Scart 

Connection socket combi, TVL (70 0424 50) and connection socket combi, TVL 

bedhead unit (70 0434 50) allow TV control in combination with patient handset 

(74 0747 00), RAN interface TV (70 0860 00) and IR TV control module univer‐ 

sal Audio (70 0360 11). 

Warning! These connections sockets are used only for this application. 

IR TV control module universal Audio allows the control and tone transmission 

from standard TV sets using infrared signals. Additionally needed: Kit for IR TV 

control module Audio (70 0360 21), Addressing plug for IR TV control module 

(70 0360 30) and one-time TV control module programming service (70 0360 

50). 


IR

3.1.5.3 Patient room: TV connection 

Hospital LCD TV, Professional 


Entertainment 

Entertain− 

ment 

Ie 

70 0424 00 

70 0860 00 


In 

Ie 

RAN 

Tone 

Ia 

Data 


74 0747 00 

Ie 

00 0280 40 

74 7002 26 (26”) 

74 7002 32 (32”) 

70 0360 01 

3. Room types 

Connection socket combi (70 0424 00) and connection socket combi bedhead 

unit (70 0434 00) allow TV control in combination with patient handset (74 0747 

00) and RAN interface TV (70 0860 00). LCD TV sets are available in different 

sizes. Per TV set one TV control module for hospital TV (70 0360 01) is re‐ 

quired. 

For the programming per project one TV programming module (74 7002 99) and 

the remote control PR 106 (74 7000 01) is required. 

The TV sets are prepared for standard VESA wall mounts. Three different 

wall mounts can be ordered from Tunstall (74 7002 80, 74 7002 81, 74 7002 82). 

23

3. Room types 

3.1.6 Patient room: Separate shower and WC 


Ie 

24 

77 0510 00 

Entertainment 

In 

Is 

7 

In 

70 0112 00 

In 

77 0170 01 

In In 

6 

77 0170 01 

77 0170 00 

0 

0 

74 0747 00 

74 0747 00 


70 0113 00 

70 0113 00 

7 

In 

6 

0 = Channel number 0 

In 

70 0111 01 

70 0115 01 

7 

6 6 

70 0115 01 

Entertainment 

Ie 

70 0424 00 

Entertainment 

70 0434 00 

Separate call cancelling for each cubicle; collective room lamp (77 0170 00) in 

corridor and separate room lamps (77 0170 01) in room (channel encoding) 

with additional display for each cubicle. Maximum of 7 channels for each 

ComTerminal. 

Channel numbers 1 - 5 can be used as bed numbers 1 - 5. 

Ie 


Is

3.2 Function room 

For each room 



77 0510 00 

In 

77 0170 00 

3. Room types 



e.g. Room lamp, 3 sections 77 0170 00 



25

3. Room types 

3.3 Ward bathroom 

3.3.1 Ward bathroom with speech, with ComTerminal 

26 

70 0115 00 

70 0111 00 

In 

Pro Raum 


In 

77 0510 00 

In 

In 

77 0170 00 

70 0106 00 

In 

70 0111 00 




For each bath / WC 

Pull cord call switch wp, suitable for shower, WC 

Call switch wp, suitable for washbasin 

Pneumatic call switch, suitable for bath tubs 



70 0115 00 

70 0111 00 

70 0106 00 



3. Room types 

3.3.2 Ward bathrom without speech, with ControlTerminal 

70 0115 00 

70 0111 00 

In 

For each room 


In 

In 

70 0119 00 

Options: 



In 

77 0550 00 

70 0106 00 

In 

70 0111 00 

77 0550 00 

77 0551 00 

ControlTerminal installation kit 77 0960 00 

ControlTerminal ConfigSet 

(only one required for the nurse call system) 

77 0920 00 

Staff presence combination with call tone, bedhead unit 70 0119 00 

For each bath / WC 

Pull cord call switch wp, suitable for shower, WC 

Call switch wp, suitable for washbasin 

Pneumatic call switch, suitable for bath tubs 



70 0115 00 

70 0111 00 

70 0106 00 

27

3. Room types 

3.4 Nurse station 

3.4.1 Ward console ComStation BUS 

28 

For each room 


77 0605 10 

In 

74 0452 30 

77 018210 

ComStation BUS 77 0605 10 

Connection socket ComStation 74 0452 30 

Room lamp Universal, 2 sections 77 0182 10 




3.4.2 Nurse station: 

Ward console ComStation CT Flamenco 

77 0606 00 

For each room 



In 

74 0452 30 

77 0170 00 

3. Room types 

ComStation CT Flamenco 77 0606 00 

Connection socket ComStation 74 0452 30 

Room lamp for display of all types of calls and presence 

states: e.g. Room lamp, 3 sections 77 0170 00 



29

3. Room types 

3.4.3 Nurse station: Ward console ComStation PC 

30 

77 0602 00 

+ 77 0790 00 

+ 77 0790 01 

or 77 0790 02 

For each room 


In 

77 0182 10 

74 0452 60A 

ComStation PC 77 0602 00 

Connection socket ComStation PC 74 0452 60A 

Room lamp Universal, 2 sections 77 0182 10 

PrimusGlobal + System setup and configuration 77 0790 00 

PrimusGlobal+ Project data up to 36 rooms 

Standard graphics 

or planview graphics 

77 0790 01 

77 0790 02 


3.4.4 Nurse station: Ward console ComStation TEL 

network on-site 

Ethernet 10/100 MBit 

AC 

DC 

For each room 



77 0603 00 

In 

77 0510 00 

77 0170 00 

3. Room types 

ComStation TEL 77 0603 00 

For each room (if compliance with DIN VDE 0834 is required) 






31

3. Room types 

3.5 Corridor 

32 

Flurdisplay: 


77 01X0 00 

Group lamps, direction lamps: 


77 0802 00 

77 0111 02 

Door entry speaker: 

77 0112 02 


77 0801 00 

77 0350 00 

Loudspeaker with announcement interface: 


77 0804 00 

05 0024 00 

Devices or technical equipment from other makes: 


77 0803 00 

The corridor display Alpha 16, single-sided 

(77 0150 00) or Alpha 16, double-sided 

(77 0160 00) is directly connected to the group bus 

OSYnet. 

4 direction lamps (77 1102 00) or group lamps 

(77 1X02 00) for 4 wards can be connected to each 

OSYlink‐group lamp (77 0802 00). 

To each OSYlink-door entry speaker (77 0801 00) 

one door entry speaker (77 0350 00) can be 

connected. 

To each OSYlink-announcement (77 0804 00) a 

maximum of 5 loudspeakers with announcement 

interface (05 0024 00) can be connected 

Connection of devices or technical equipment from 

other makes via OSYlink-Universal (77 0803 00). 

For details refer to product leaflet of OSYlink-Uni‐ 

versal. 



4. Installation examples 

33


230 V AC 

Flamenco Installation example 1 

34 

77 0510 00 77 0510 00 77 0510 00 

77 0510 00 

77 3400 00 

or 

77 3401 00 

24 V 

77 2100 00 

Ip 

77 0801 00 

OSYnet 

77 0802 00 

77 0111 02 

77 0112 02 

77 0350 00 

74 0452 30 

77 0550 00 

+ 77 0960 00 

OSYnet 

77 0510 00 

77 0510 00 

77 0510 00 

120 

00 0040 76 

ComStation CT 

230 V AC 

77 0510 00 77 0510 00 77 0510 00 

77 0510 00 

77 3400 00 

or 

77 3401 00 

24 V 

230 V AC 

230 V AC für Netzwerk-Switch 

ManagementCenter 

77 2100 00 

77 3400 00 

or 

77 3401 00 

Ip 

230 V AC 

77 0803 00 

77 0802 00 

OSYnet 

77 0112 02 

24 V 

77 0550 00 

+ 77 0960 00 

120 

00 0040 76 

Group 1 

Group 2 

Group 3 

Order no.: Product name: 

00 0040 76 120 Ohm resistor (bus termination) 

74 0452 30 Connection socket ComStation 

77 0111 02 Direction lamp 

77 0112 02 Group lamp, 2 sections 

77 0350 00 Door entry speaker 

77 0510 00 ComTerminal Flamenco 

77 0550 00 ControlTerminal Flamenco 

77 0606 00 ComStationCT Flamenco 

77 0960 00 ControlTerminal installation kit 

77 0801 00 OSYlink-Door entry speaker 

77 0802 00 OSYlink-Group lamp 

77 0803 00 OSYlink-Universal 

77 2100 00 OSYnet-SafetyController 

77 3400 00 Power supply unit UPS 

77 3401 00 Power supply unit 


74 0452 30 

OSYnet 


77 0510 00 

77 0510 00 

77 0510 00 

ComStation CT

230 V AC 

77 0510 00 77 0510 00 

77 0510 00 

77 0510 00 

77 3400 00 

or 

77 3401 00 


24 V 

Ip 


OSYnet 

77 0150 00 or 77 0160 00 

77 0510 00 77 0510 00 

77 0510 00 77 0510 00 77 0510 00 

74 0452 60A 

77 0510 00 

ComStationPC 77 0510 00 77 0510 00 

230 V 

77 0510 00 

120 

00 0040 76 

Ip 

77 0150 00 or 77 0160 00 

OSYnet 

230 V AC 

77 0510 00 

77 0510 00 77 0510 00 77 0510 00 

77 4000 00 

77 3400 00 

or 

77 3401 00 

77 2100 00 

74 0452 60A 

24 V 

77 3400 00 

or 

77 3401 00 

24 V 

ComStationPC 77 0510 00 77 0510 00 

230 V 

77 0510 00 

230 V AC 

Ip 

230 V AC for 

network switch 

OSYnet 

230 V AC 

77 0150 00 or 77 0160 00 


24 V 

77 3400 00 

or 

77 3401 00 

74 0452 60A 

120 

00 0040 76 


ComStationPC 77 0510 00 77 0510 00 77 0510 00 77 0510 00 

230 V 




77 0150 00 Corridor display Alpha 16 

77 0160 00 Corridor display Alpha 16, double-sided 




77 4000 00 OSYnet-Y-RepeaterOpto 

OSYnet 

Group 1 

Group 2 

Group 3 

35



36 

230 V AC 

77 0510 00 77 0510 00 77 0510 00 77 0510 00 

77 0510 00 

77 0510 00 77 0510 00 77 0510 00 

77 0510 00 

77 3400 00 

or 

77 3401 00 

24 V 

77 2100 00 

Ip 

OSYnet 

OSYnet 

77 4001 00 

77 0804 00 

77 0150 00 or 77 0160 00 

OSYnet 

05 0024 00 

74 0452 30 

74 0452 30 

120 

00 0040 76 

77 0510 00 

77 0510 00 

77 0510 00 77 0510 00 

77 0510 00 77 0510 00 77 0510 00 77 0510 00 

77 0605 00 

77 0605 00 

230 V AC for network switch 



05 0024 00 Loudspeaker with announcement interface 





77 0605 00 ComStationBUS 77 0804 00 OSYlink-Announcement 




77 4001 00 OSYnet-Gateway 

230 V AC 

77 3400 00 

or 

77 3401 00 

24 V 



Group 1 

Group 2 

Group 3 

Cable legend: 

OSYnet = Group bus OSYnet = e.g. IY(ST)Y 4x2x0,8 

Ip = Power cable = NYM 2x2,5 mm2 OSYnet

Flamenco without speech Installation example 

Station 1 Station 2 

230 V AC 

230 V AC 

Further rooms 

77 0520 00 77 0520 00 77 0520 00 

77 3400 00 

or 

77 3401 00 

Further rooms 

77 0520 00 77 0520 00 

77 0520 00 

24 V 

24 V 

77 3400 00 

or 

77 3401 00 


77 2100 00 

Ip 

Ip 

OSYnet 

OSYnet 

77 4001 00 

77 0802 00 

77 0150 00 or 77 0160 00 

OSYnet 

77 0111 02 

77 0112 02 

74 0452 30 

77 0550 00 

+ 77 0960 00 

74 0452 30 

120 

00 0040 76 

77 0520 00 

Further rooms 

Further rooms 

77 0606 00 

77 0520 00 77 0520 00 77 0520 00 

77 0606 00 




77 0111 02 Direction lamp 

77 0112 02 Group lamp, 2 sections 



77 0520 00 RoomTerminal Flamenco 


77 0606 00 ComStationCT Flamenco 

77 0802 00 OSYlink-Group lamp 

77 0960 00 ControlTerminal installation kit 




77 4001 00 OSYnet-Gateway 

230 V AC for network switch 

230 V AC 

77 3400 00 

or 

77 3401 00 


24 V 


Cable legend: 

OSYnet = Group bus OSYnet 

- without speech transmission e.g. IY(ST)Y 2x2x0,8 

- with preparation for speech transmission e.g. IY(ST)Y 4x2x0,8 

Group 1 

Group 2 

Group 3 

OSYnet 

Ip = Power cable = NYM 2x2,5 mm 2 

37


38 


5. Installation work sequence 

Work step Description 

1. Defining the mounting positions Page 41 and the following. 

2. Installation of back boxes Page 47 and the following. 

3. Laying the cables Page 49 and the following. 

4. Mounting and connecting of devices Refer to chapter “Product 

leaflets“, page 81 and the 

following. 

5. Switching on and checking of power supply Page 59 and the following. 

6. Configuring the room terminals (ComTerminal 

Flamenco, RoomTerminal Flamenco, ControlTer‐ 

minal Flamenco, ControlTerminal with doorplate 

Flamenco) 

7. Configuring OSY-ControlCenter 

(SystemOrganizer) 


ComTerminal Flamenco, 

RoomTerminal Flamenco: 

Refer to chapter “Product 


following. 

ControlTerminal Flamenco, 

ControlTerminal with door‐ 

plate Flamenco: Refer to 

online help included with 

the ControlTerminal Config‐ 

Set (order no. 77 0920 00). 

Page 61 and the following. 

8. Connecting the OSY-ControlCenter Refer to chapter “Product 


following. 

9. Commissioning the OSY-ControlCenter Refer to chapter “Product 


following. 

10. Commissioning the ward console 

(ComStation BUS , ComStation PC , ComStation CT 

Flamenco) 

11. Connecting and commissioning the Management‐ 

Center 

Refer to the documents 

delivered with the ward con‐ 

sole. 

Refer to chapter “Product 


following. 

12. Functional check of the system Page 67 and the following. 

39

5. Installation work sequence 

40 


6. Defining the mounting positions 

6.1 General requirements 

All devices for the nurse call 

system 


- Considering the different users, the process of raising a call 

must be simple and unambiguous, and a mix-up with other sys‐ 

tem elements must be virtually impossible. 

- Damage or destruction from external effects which may occur 

during normal use (e.g. when moving beds) must be virtually 

impossible. 

- Must not be installed in rooms with harmfull influences to tele‐ 

communications equipment. 

Devices with displays - Unobstructed view must be ensured (ComTerminal, ComSta‐ 

tionCT ). 

- Not subject to direct sun radiation. 

Call switches, Call devices - Easy access and reach must be ensured. 

Presence buttons - Near the door. 

Optical signalling devices - Visual recognition must not be obscured by other stray light. 

Signal lamps, Corridor displays - Called or paged persons shall be directed via the shortest 

distance to the call location. 

Room lamps - Shall be easily allocated to the respective rooms. 

In WCs and wet rooms - Comply with specifications acc. to DIN VDE 0100! 

Power supply units, 

OSYlink modules, 

OSYnet-SafetyController, 

OSYnet‐Y‐RepeaterOpto, 

OSYnet‐Gateway 

Distributor cabinets for both 

nurse call system and mains 

power supply 

6.1.1 Mounting heights 

- Use in dry rooms only; if possible within distribution cabinets 

(not inside of patient or resident rooms). 

- Easy access at any time (access door at least 60 cm wide). 

- Heat transfer must not be blocked off. 

- When installed in switch cabinets, forced-air cooling may be 

required. 

- Considering the effective voltage drop, the power supply unit 

should be located close to the biggest users. 

- Fire hazard! Danger of fire in case of short-circuit. Therefore, 

ensure sufficient ventilation in distribution cabinets. 

- After removing the outer cover, the high-voltage part must still 

be protected. 

- Connection terminals for the nurse call system and those for 

the high-voltage installations must be clearly separated and 

designated as such, e.g. by way of design, shape, colour. In‐ 

scriptions alone are not sufficient to preclude misuse. 

Prescribed mounting height acc. to DIN VDE 0834-1:2000: 

Mounting height above floor level: 

Device with control elements (with and without indicating lamps) 700 - 1500 mm 

Device with control elements with text display 1500 - 1700 mm 

Device in installation units 1600 - 1800 mm 

Signal lamps and large letter display 1500 - 2200 mm 

Distribution boxes 700 - 2200 mm 

41


6.1.2 Raumterminals 

42 

120 mm 

120 mm 

170 mm 

1600 mm 


Order no.: 77 0510 00 

RoomTerminal Flamenco 

Order no.: 77 0520 00 

Location in the room: 

The ComTerminal Flamenco has to be installed in an acousti‐ 

cally convenient location, so that from all locations in the 

room a good speech connection over the ComTerminal 

Flamenco is possible. 

The RoomTerminal Flamenco should also be installed in an 

acoustically convenient location, so that a later upgrading to a 

Terminal with speech would be possible. 

Note: If the ComTerminal Flamenco or the RoomTerminal 

Flamenco is not installed in the entrance area, a separate 

staff presence switch (70 0112 00) has to be installed near 

the door. 

2 gang back box required. 

Note: 

At 2-gang back boxes at least 120 mm space (from the 

centre) must be provided for the ComTerminal Flamenco or 

RoomTerminal Flamenco. 


55 mm 

55 mm 

150 mm 

150 mm 



Order no.: 77 0550 00 

2-gang back box required. 



Order no.: 77 0551 00 


Note: The back box is installed behind the lamp and not be‐ 

hind the doorplate. 

43


6.1.3 Room lamps 

55 mm 

110 mm 

55 mm 

44 

150 mm 

150 mm 

Room lamp 

Order no.: 77 0170 00, 77 0170 01, 77 0170 10, 77 0182 10 

1-gang back box required for each room lamp. 

Room lamp with doorplate 

Order no.: 77 0171 00, 77 0171 10 

1-gang back box required for each room lamp with doorplate. 

Note: The back box is installed behind the lamp and not be‐ 

hind the doorplate. 


6.1.4 Switches 

ÀÀ 

ÀÀÀÀÀ 

ÀÀÀ 

Back box 

Switch 

150 mm 

91 mm 

1300 mm 


Switches near the door 

1-gang back box required for each switch. 

91 mm raster spacing is mandatory! 


300 mm Pull cord call switch in bathroom/WC 

(ceiling mounted) 

300 mm 

300 mm 

2250 mm 

2250 mm 

5 mm 

Order no.: 70 0115 00, 70 0115 01 


The pull cord grab may be not higher than 200 mm above the 

floor, so that people lying on the floor can reach the pull cord. 

Pull cord call switch in bathroom/WC 

(wall mounted) 

Order no.: 70 0115 00, 70 0115 01 


Pull cord switches in shower stalls have to be installed at 

least 200 mm above the highest possible position of the 

showerhead. The pull cord grab may be not higher than 

200 mm above the floor, so that people lying on the floor can 

reach the pull cord. 

Pneumatic call switch 

Order no.: 70 0106 00, 70 0106 01 


Back box solid wall, 1-gang: 17 0100 00 

Back box partition wall, 1-gang: 17 5100 00 

Note: The switch will be offset, i.e. the switch centre will be 

approx. 5 mm below the back box centre. In other words, in‐ 

stall the back box 5 mm above the desired switch position. 

45


6.1.5 Connection sockets 

46 

Bed 1 Bed 2 

100 mm 

Medical supply unit 

Bed 1 Bed 2 

Connection sockets 

Bed 1 Bed 2 

100 mm 


Bed 1 Bed 2 


Connection socket combi 

(wall mounting) 

Order no.: 70 0424 00, 70 0424 50 


100 mm minimum spacing above floor level. 

Connection socket combi, bedhead unit 

(mounting in medical supply unit) 

Order no.: 70 0434 00, 70 0434 50 

Common practice is that the connection sockets are installed 

by the supplier of the medical supply units. 

Connection socket with call switch 

Order no.: 70 0171 03 


100 mm minimum spacing above floor level. 

Connection socket with call switch, bedhead 

unit (mounting in medical supply unit) 

Order no.: 70 0171 50 

Common practice is that the connection sockets are installed 

by the supplier of the medical supply units. 


7. Installing the back boxes 

Refer to the table of accessories to find the correct back boxes and connectors 

for each product. 


Order no. 

Back boxes 

Solid wall Partition wall Connector 

1-gang 

17 0100 00 

2-gang 

17 0410 00 

1-gang 

17 5100 00 

2-gang 

17 5400 00 

Pneumatic call switch 70 0106 00 Centre offset Centre offset 

Pneumatic call 

switch/WC 

70 0106 01 Centre offset Centre offset 

Call switch 70 0111 00 

Call switch/WC 70 0111 01 

Staff presence wp 70 0112 00 

Cancel switch/WC wp 70 0113 00 

Code blue / Cardiac 

alarm switch wp 

70 0114 00 

Pull cord call switch wp 70 0115 00 

Pull cord call switch/WC 

wp 

Call switch/WC with 

cancel switch wp 

Call switch with privacy 

switch wp 

Staff presence combi‐ 

nation with call tone wp 

Connection socket with 

call switch 

Connection socket with 

call switch, bedhead 

unit 

Cancel switch/WC mit 

call tone wp 

Connection socket 

combi, bedhead unit 

Connection socket combi, 

bedhead unit, TVL 

70 0115 01 

70 0117 00 

70 0118 00 

70 0119 00 

70 0171 03 70 0807 01 

70 0171 50 Installation in medical supply unit 00 0211 37 

70 0183 00 

70 0434 00 Installation in medical supply unit 

70 0434 50 Installation in medical supply unit 

70 0807 00 

47

7. Installing the back boxes 

48 

Order no. 

Back box 

Solid wall Partition wall Connector 

1-gang 

17 0100 00 

2-gang 

17 0410 00 

1-gang 

17 0510 00 

2-gang 

17 0540 00 

Connection socket combi 70 0424 00 


combi, TVL 


ComStation 

70 0424 50 

74 0452 30 


ComStation PC 74 0452 60A 

Direction lamp 77 0111 02 

Group lamp, 2 sections 77 0112 02 



Room lamp, 3 sections 77 0170 00 

Room lamp code blue/ 

cardiac alarm, WC 

77 0170 01 

Room lamp, 4 sections 77 0170 10 

Room lamp, 3 sections, 

with doorplate 

Room lamp, 4 sections, 

with doorplate 

Room lamp Universal, 2 

sections 

77 0171 00 

77 017110 

77 0182 10 70 0807 07 

ComTerminal Flamenco 77 0510 00 

RoomTerminal Fla‐ 

menco 

ControlTerminal Fla‐ 

menco 

ControlTerminal with 

doorplate Flamenco 

OSYnet-Y-Repeater‐ 

Opto 

Sound detector, wall 

mounted 

77 0520 00 

77 0550 00 77 0960 00 

77 0551 00 77 0960 00 

77 4000 00 77 0950 00 

Z 0 0 8200 00 

70 0807 00 



8. Laying the cables 

When laying the cables, closely observe the current VDE rules. 

8.1 Cable legend 

To simplify the handling of installation plans, Tunstall GmbH has introduced an 

expanded cable legend. The cables are organised according to their applica‐ 

tion areas. Relevant types of cables are allocated to specific application areas. 

These shall be considered as minimum requirements. 

Marking Designation Type of cable 

Ia General cables IY(ST)Y 2x2x0.8 

Ia2 General cables IY(ST)Y 2x2x0.6 




OSYnet Group bus OSYnet Recommended cables: 

CAT7 (22 AWG) with diameter Ø = 0.64 mm 

IY(ST)Y 4x2x0,8 with diameter Ø = 0.8 mm 

Ie Entertainment cables 

Optional cables: 




IY(ST)Y 4x2x0,6 with diameter Ø = 0.6 mm 

2x IYY per channel 

or similar cables (1 double wire required for each 

programme) 

In Room bus RAN IY(ST)Y 2x2x0.8 

Ip Power cable NYM 2x2,5 mm2 Is Speech cable plus 

room bus RAN 

2x IY(ST)Y 2x2x0.8 

8.1.1 Colour coding 

German 

abbreviation 

English 

abbreviation Colour 

bl BU blue 

br BN brown 

ge YE yellow 

gn GN green 

gr GY grey 

or OG orange 

rt RD red 

sw BK black 

vi VT violet 

ws WH white 

49


8.2 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) 

50 

All electronic components of the nurse call system emission and sensibility val‐ 

ues which are well within the prescribed parameters for electromagnetic com‐ 

patibility (EMC). Nevertheless, interference with the nurse call system may oc‐ 

cur in specific situations and due to insufficient interference suppression of 

fluorescent lamps - particularly in hospital installation units (medical supply 

units). 

Customers should make provisions which prevent such interference from ex‐ 

ternal sources. In many cases, this type of external interference can be avoided 

by installing suppressor elements (varistor circuits). These varistor circuits are 

commercially available from the manufacturers. Tunstall offers a proven over‐ 

voltage filter 230 V(70 0890 97). 

The EMC properties of the various electro medical supply units may differ to a 

great extent. Even two supply units of the same type may act and react with 

considerable difference if they are wired in different ways. 

Normally, call systems are widely distributed over the building, and their EMC 

behaviour is affected by the specific design and layout of the network. 

This situation should also be considered when effecting changes or amend‐ 

ments to existing medical supply units. 

8.2.1 Cables for high-voltage installations and cables for 

other systems with dangerous voltage 

Power cables for the nurse call system must not be laid along with the cables 

of high-voltage installations or with cables of other systems of high-risk voltage 

in common cables, conduits or cable trays. 

Cables for the nurse call system and high-voltage cables must be placed at a 

minimum spacing of 30 cm.. For shorter distances of less than 10 m the spacing 

may be reduced to 10 cm. 

230 V / 400 V AC 

Spacing > 30 cm 

Cable for high-voltage system 

Cable for the nurse call system 

For laying nurse call system cables in medical supply units the regulations of 

ISO 11197:2004 have to be observed. 


8.3 Electric power supply cables (Ip) 



Electric power for the system is provided with +24 V DC, which is generated by 

regulated, short-circuit proof power supply units. 

The power supply cable Ip is installed as a ring circuit. Cable lengths should be 

kept as short as possible to preclude larger voltage drops. 

Maximum voltage differential from the power supply unit to the farthest room 

being supplied via the ring circuit should not exceed 4 V. 

Where larger voltage drops are observed, another cable should be laid from the 

supply unit, or a cross linking within the +24 V ring circuit should be realised. 

If neither solution will solve the problem, a second power supply unit should be 

installed. Coupling of power supply units in parallel is not allowed. 

The power supply ring circuit should be made using cables of 2.5mm 2 cross 

section. Depending on the type of circuit, single core leads (NYA 2.5 mm 2 for 

+24V and 0V) or a common cable (NYM 2x2.5 mm 2 ) may be used. 

Fig. 4: NYM 2x2,5 mm 2 

NOTE ! When laying the cables, always select the shortest route to keep the 

resultant voltage drop as low as possible. 

Use of logic colour codes for the cables and/or specific laying techniques for 

the extra-low voltage cables shall eliminate the chance for mix-up with highvoltage 

cables. If you select to use cable material which is also used for high 

voltage circuits you should mark and designate these cables clearly and per‐ 

manently. 

Comply with current rules and directives! 

51


8.4 Current demand 

52 

The table below was prepared to calculate the required current in the Flamenco 

system. The values are average figures and may differ for individual applica‐ 

tions. Total current consumption will vary according to the number of functions 

used at any one time. 

Additional current consumption 

05 0024 00 Loudspeaker with announc. interf. 80 mA 

11 5350 00 Telephone interface relay 10 mA 

70 xxxx xx Switches 10 mA 

70 0171 03 Connection socket with call switch 15 mA 

70 0171 50 Connection socket with call switch, 

bedhead unit 

21 mA While light button is pressed: max. 179 mA 

70 0360 10 IR TV control module universal 15 mA During data transmission: 

for a short time 35 mA 

70 0360 11 IR TV control module universal audio 15 mA During data transmission: 

for a short time 35 mA 

70 04x4 x0 Connection socket combi / combi, 

bedhead unit 

30 mA 

70 0790 00 Sound detector 16 mA 

70 08xx 00 RAN interfaces 20 mA 

70 0831 00 1‐channel radio receiver 35 mA 

74 0747 00 Patient handset 20 mA 

77 011x 02 Direction lamp / Group lamp 0 mA Each lighted section: 75 mA 

77 0150 00 Corridor display Alpha 16 Average current consumption: 300 mA 

77 0160 00 Corridor display Alpha 16, double-sided Average current consumption: 600 mA 

77 017x xx Room lamp or 

Room lamp with doorplate 

20 mA Each lighted section: 30 mA 

77 0182 10 Room lamp Universal, 2 sections 0 mA Each lighted section: 30 mA 

77 0350 00 Door entry speaker 30 mA During operation: 45 mA 

77 0510 00 ComTerminal Flamenco 115 mA Display backlight switched on + all LED: 40 mA 

77 0520 00 RoomTerminal Flamenco 52 mA Display backlight switched on + all LED: 40 mA 

77 055x 00 ControlTerminal Flamenco or 


42 mA Each lighted section: 30 mA 

77 0605 00 ComStationBUS 92 mA Display ON: 118 mA 

77 0606 00 ComStationCT Flamenco 115 mA Display backlight switched on + all LED: 40 mA 

77 0801 00 OSYlink‐Door entry speaker 53 mA 

77 0802 00 OSYlink‐Group lamp 26 mA 

77 0803 00 OSYlink‐Universal 35 mA 

77 0804 00 OSYlink‐Announcement 32 mA 

77 2100 00 OSYnet‐SafetyController 30 mA 

77 4000 00 OSYnet‐Y‐RepeaterOpto 60 mA 

77 4001 00 OSYnet‐Gateway 50 mA 

One power supply unit is required for each OSY-ControlCenter (Order no. 

77 2x0x 00). 


8.4.1 Standard basis for calculation 



To calculate the required current, first add all standby current figures or the av‐ 

erage current consumption, respectively. 

In a simplified manner, the additional current demand can be calculated as fol‐ 

lows: You may assume that on the average 5 calls, 5 presence states and one 

speech connection are active at any one time. 

Current demand for each call = 100 mA 

Current demand for each presence state = 100 mA 

Current demand for each speech connection = 50 mA 

The power supply unit should not be loaded by more than 80% of its capacity. 

Maximum capacity for the power supply units is 12.5 A. The 80% permissible 

load, therefore, amounts to 10 A. 

8.4.2 Sample calculation for 25 two-bed rooms with WC 

Number Device 

Standby current: 

for each device for 25 rooms 

25 ComTerminal Flamenco 115 mA 2875 mA 

25 Room lamp, 3 sections 20 mA 500 mA 

25 Room lamp, code blue/cardiac 

alarm, WC 

20 mA 500 mA 

50 Connection socket, bedhead unit 30 mA 1500 mA 

50 Patient handset 20 mA 1000 mA 

50 Switch 10 mA 500 mA 

1 ComStation BUS 92 mA 92 mA 

1 OSYlink‐Group lamp 26 mA 26 mA 

1 Group lamp, 3 sections 0 mA 0 mA 

Number Function 

Sum (standby current consumption): 6993 mA 

Additional current: 

per function per ward 

5 active call 100 mA 500 mA 

5 active presence state 100 mA 500 mA 

1 active speech connection 50 mA 50 mA 

Sum (additional current consumption): 1050 mA 

Total 

(standby current consumption + additional current consumption): 

80% load on a power supply unit = 10 A (100% load = 12.5 A). 

8043 mA 

Result: 1 power supply unit is required for the above 25 two-bed rooms with WC. 

53


8.5 Group bus OSYnet 

54 

Lay all cables to the control unit OSY-ControlCenter. Use the locally available 

facilities (distributors, cable conduits). 

WARNING ! For the group bus OSYnet no stub lines may be installed. All devi‐ 

ces must be directly connected to the bus. 

Cables for the nurse call system which run outside of the building must be fitted 

with an overvoltage protection acc. to DIN VDE 0845 at the position where they 

leave the building. This overvoltage protection will not be required if a galvanic 

disconnect point prevents the effect of harmful voltages. 

8.5.1 Useable cable types 

The following types of cables are recommended for the group bus OSYnet:: 


IY(ST)Y 4x2x0.8 with diameter Ø = 0.8 mm 

The following types of cables may be used optionally: 




IY(ST)Y 4x2x0.6 with diameter Ø = 0.6 mm 

NOTE ! As alternative solutions, halogen-free variants as well as under ground 

cables can be used. Contact Tunstall GmbH when planning to use any other 

type of cable. 

Theses cables are twisted in pairs with the following design: 


8.5.2 Prescribed cable assignment 

CAT-7 

IY(ST)Y 4x2x0,8 

IY(ST)Y 4x2x0,6 

CAT-5 

CAT-6 

8.5.3 CCS 32 cable 

CCS 32 


yellow 

white 

green 

white 

blue 

red 

brown 

white 

yellow 

white 

green 

white 

blue 

red 

brown 

white 

yellow 

white 

green 

white 

blue 

red 

brown 

white 


NF 2a 

NF 2b 

DG 

DG 

DH 

DL 

NF 1a 

NF 1b 

NF 2a 

NF 2b 

DG 

DG 

DH 

DL 

NF 1a 

NF 1b 

NF 2a 

NF 2b 

DG 

DG 

DH 

DL 

NF 1a 

NF 1b 

The system cable CC32 from Tunstall has been used in many earlier recondi‐ 

tioning projects. The cable may be used, however, only one speech path will 

be available. 

*) The black conductor is not used. 

black*) 

shielding DG 

white DH 

blue DL 

brown NF 1a 

grey NF 1b 

55


8.5.4 Maximum permissible cable lengths for OSYnet 

56 


a + b = max. 700 m 

c + d + e = max. 700 m 

c 

max. 700 m 

max. 700 m 

a 

OSYnet‐Y‐RepeaterOpto 


Group 1, Ward 1 




e 

max. 700 m 




= Bus termination 

at last bus user 

Where several wards are connected to one group bus, it may be necessary to 

split the group bus into two independent sections. The splitting is done using 

the OSYnet-Y-RepeaterOpto (Order No. 77 4000 00). One repeater can be 

used for each group. 

Where the max. cable length of 700 m will not suffice, the group bus can 

expanded for another 700 m using the OSYnet-Gateway (order no. 

77 4001 00). One Gateway can be used for each group. 

8.5.4.1 Bus termination 

The last device (e.g. a ComTerminal) at a bus cable must be fitted with a 

120 Ohm resistor (order no. 00 0040 76) between the connecting points DH and 

DL. 

d 


b

8.6 Room bus RAN 



The RAN (room area network) links all components in a room. For data transfer, 

3 conductors of IY(ST)Y 2x2x0.8 (Cable = In) are required 

+24V 

RAN 

0V 

R(ed) = +24 V 

Y(ellow) = RAN 

B(lack) = 0V 

Max. permissible cable length for RAN is 50 m. 

Max. permissible number of RAN users is 30. 

Devices for speech communication require an additional speech line (cable Is). 

All devices with RAN interface can be connected at random (star, bus or mesh 

network). Later expansion of the RAN can be realised from any device and inde‐ 

pendent of the device's particular function. Only additional devices with speech 

communication require an extra speech line. 

For a better overview, split the various RAN connections into function groups. 

This type of arrangement is more service-friendly (Fig. 5 on page 58). 

The type of installation has no influence on the RAN functions. 

The voltage drop at each cable connection caused by a current of max. 60 mA 

must not exceed 0.3 V in relation to the voltage at the ComTerminal. Under nor‐ 

mal condition, this value is achieved when a RAN user is connected to a cable 

of type In, which is longer than 50 m. 

8.6.1 Shielded cables for the room bus RAN (Is) 

CAUTION ! Insulate the protective screen or the blank shield wire up to the 

connecting point. Otherwise, a short circuit situation or crosstalk may occur. 

To ensure the protective screen function, all room bus cables for music or 

speech transmissions (shielded cables) may be stripped for a max. length of 

30 mm only. 

max. 30 mm 

57


58 

Fig. 5: RAN: Example for installation 

Not service-friendly 

confusing = 

poor installation 

Service friendly 

clear arranged = 

good installation 


9. Activating the power supply 

Prerequisite: Except the power supply unit, all cables are installed and all 

devices are connected in compliance with the enclosed product leaflets. 

Note: All product leaflets are presented in chapter “Product leaflets” starting on 

page 81. 

9.1 Installing the power supply unit 

Before connecting the power supply unit you must check the cables to the 

power supply unit for possible short circuits and earth interconnections. 

Install the power supply unit acc. to the installation instructions coming with the 

unit. This information is also shown in the chapter “Product leaflets” starting on 

page 81. 

9.2 Check the current supply 

The operating voltage for the whole system is +24 V DC. Electric current for the 

system components is supplied through power supply units. 

Execute the checks and tests as shown below: 

9.2.1 Check output voltage of the power supply unit 

Use a voltmeter to confirm the output voltage of +24 V. 

9.2.2 Check continuity of + 24 V ring circuit 

Disconnect one end of the ring circuit at the power supply unit. Switch the power 

supply unit on and measure the voltage at the open wires. If no voltage is meas‐ 

ured, the ring circuit is not closed or one of the conductors (+24 V or 0 V) is inter‐ 

rupted. 

Power supply 

unit 

1. room terminal 

1. room terminal 


Ip 

Ip 

59

9. Activating the power supply 

9.2.3 Supply voltage to the room terminals 

60 

Activate 5 calls and 5 presence states for the ward which is to be checked. Use 

the worst location, i.e. the most distant location from the power supply unit. 

Test the voltage and determine the room terminal (ComTerminal Flamenco, 

RoomTerminal Flamenco, ControlTerminal Flamenco or ControlTerminal with 

doorplate Flamenco) with the lowest voltage. This point is considered as the 

electric centre of the ring circuit. Here, the voltage differential to the first room 

terminal as seen from the power supply unit must not be greater than 4 V. 

If you should read a lower value (i.e. a drop of more than 4 V) the voltage drop 

must be reduced by laying an additional cable from the power supply unit to the 

electric centre - or double the 0 V lead - if it is available. 

Power supply 

unit 

Ip 

Ip 

Electric 

centre 

9.2.4 Check voltage for group bus OSYnet 

If group bus OSYnet is correctly connected : 

voltage between DH and DG and 

voltage between DL and DG = approx. +2.5 V. 

9.2.5 Check voltage for RAN 

RAN voltage is o.k. when voltage between B (0V) and Y (RAN) is between 

+8.8 V and +9 V DC. 

If the voltage is outside of these parameters, these may be the reasons 

If voltage between B (0V) and Y (RAN) = 0 V 

a) Short circuit between B and Y 

b) Wire Y (RAN) is not connected to the connection socket. 

If voltage between B and Y = +12 V 

a) Wire B (0V) is not connected at one of the RAN users. 

b) One RAN user is defective. 


10. Configure the OSY-ControlCenter 

Before starting the operation of the nurse call system, the OSY-ControlCenter 

must be configured with the specific data of the relevant project. This configura‐ 

tion is realised exclusively using the software 'SystemOrganizer'. Standard 

procedure is that the OSY-ControlCenter is configured at Tunstall before it is 

delivered. However, the configuration may also take place on-location in the 

hospital or via remote service mode. 

All project-specific data must be on hand when starting with the configuration 

process. 

Fig. 6: SystemOrganizer software 

10.1 Parameters to be configured 

Country-specific settings 

Designation for rooms, wards, buildings, etc. 

Setting of call types and system messages 

Parameters for call handling, e.g. call types, call categories, cancelling, pri‐ 

vacy setting 

Organisational allocation of rooms (locations) to wards, work shifts, etc. 

Managing of mobile devices DECT / PS. 

... 


61

10. Configure the OSY-ControlCenter 

10.1.1 Software requirements 

62 

Microsoft Windows 7, Windows XP or Windows 2000 

10/100 MBit LAN access 

The use of the SystemOrganizer is described in the online help for the software. 


11. Voltage surge protection 

The German standard DIN VDE 0834-1:2000-04 regulates that all cables of the 

nurse call system which are to emerge from the building shall be provided with 

voltage surge protection according to DIN VDE 0845 (VDE 0845) at the emer‐ 

ging point. 

For the voltage surge protection you have especially to follow: 

VDE 0845-4-2: 2002-07; DIN EN 61663-2: Lightning protection -Telecommu‐ 

nication lines - Part 2 Lines using metallic conductors (IEC 61663-2:2001). 

In the following the structure of the voltage surge protection is presented for 

cables of the Flamenco call system, which are laid between two buildings. 

NOTE ! For the described fine protection of the Flamenco call system it is 

provided that all measures for the coarse protection have been completed ac‐ 

cording to the valid regulations. Otherwise the fine protection cannot work. 

The voltage surge protection has to be installed in the main building connection 

point. This should be installed directly where the cables enter the building. 

The voltage surge protection has to be installed in both buildings affected. 

WARNING ! By installing the described surge protection the maximum cable 

length for the OSYnet is reduced by 50 meters. 

NOTE ! To make sure a permanent protection of the Flamenco nurse call sys‐ 

tem, the voltage surge protection devices have to be installed acc. to the manu‐ 

facturer 's specifications. 

On the next pages the required voltage surge protection devices (SPD) are 

presented. Note: The shown SPD modules are just examples. SPD modules 

of other makes can be used as well. 

After the presentation of the SPD modules the construction of the surge protec‐ 

tion is shown in a diagram. 


63


11.1 SPD modules 

64 

Functions Order no. 

SPD module base part 

BXT BAS 

Base part, for use as feed-through terminal for 

supporting SPD modules for speech and data 

lines. Modules pluggable without interruption, for 

4 single wires or 2 double wires. Width 12 mm 

(2/3 TE). 

‐ Mounting on 35 mm top hat rail acc. to 60715 

‐ Connection cross section finely stranded: 

0.08 - 2.5 mm2 

‐ Earthing via 35 mm top hat rail acc. to 

EN 60715 

SPD module for speech and data wires 

BXT ML4 BD HF 5 

Combined Lightning Current and Surge Arrester‐ 

Module SPD class TYPE 1 / P1 tested acc. to 

EN 61643-21 and energy-coordinated acc. to 

IEC 61643-22 for protection of 2 pairs of IT 

sytems. For use with high data transmission 

rates due to its low self impedance. 

‐ For plugging into base part type BXT BAS. 

‐ SPD monitoring system: LifeCheck 

‐ Max. continuous operating DC voltage: 6.0 V 

‐ Nominal current for 45 °C: 1.0 A 

‐ D1 Total lightning impulse current (10/350): 

10 kA 

‐ Series impedance per wire: 1.0 Ohm 

‐ Shock test : EN 60068-2-27 (Ea test) 

‐ Examination of vibration performance 

(sinuoidal): EN 60068-2-6 (Fc test) 

‐ Test for vibration performance (coincidental): 

EN 60068-2-64 (Fh test) 

77 4900 00 

77 4900 01 

unit: mm 

unit: mm 


Functions 

SPD module for network cables 

DPA M CLE RJ45B 48 

Surge arrester class E, fully shielded, tested acc. 

to EN 61643-21 for universal use acc. to 

EN 50173 up to 48 V DC for the protection of 4 

pairs of data network interfaces via RJ45 socket, 

for single application or application in 19 inch 

cabinets, space-saving, width 19 mm. 

‐ Max. continuous operating DC voltage: 48 V 

‐ Nominal current: 1 A 

‐ C2 Total nominal discharge current (8/20) line- 

PG: 10 kA 

‐ For mounting on 35 mm top hat rail acc. to 

EN 60715 


Order no. 

77 4900 02 


unit: mm 

65


Building 2 

Building 1 

66 

ComStation TEL 

ComTerminals 

Group 1 

OSYlink‐ 

modules 

NF1b' 

NF1a' 

NF1b 

NF1a 

Corridor displays 

Protected 

Base part 

Order no. 

77490000 

NF1b'' 

NF1a'' 

NF1b 

NF1a 

Voltage surge protection 

1 2 speech wires 2' 1' 

SPD module 

for speech and data wires 

Order no. 77490001 

3 4 *) 

4' 3' 

Protected 


1 2 speech wires 2' 1' 

SPD module 


Order no. 77490001 

3 4 *) 

4' 3' 

NF2a' 

NF2b' 

NF2a 

NF2b 

Base part 

Order no. 

77490000 

DG' 

DH' 

DG 

DH 

NF2a'' 

NF2b'' 

NF2a 

NF2b 

Protected 

DG'' 

DH'' 

DG 

DH 

Base part 

Order no. 

77490000 

2' 1' 


data wires 

1 2 

DL' 


1 2 

data wires 2' 1' 

SPD module 


Order no. 77490001 

3 4 *) 

4' 3' 

NC 

DL 

Protected 

SPD module 


Order no. 77490001 

3 4 *) 

4' 3' 

NC 

Base part 

Order no. 

77490000 

DL'' 

DL 


network cables 

SPD module 

for network cables 

Order no. 77490002 



SPD module 


Order no. 77490002 

*) 

*) 

Main building 

connection point 1 

Main building 

connection point 2 

*) Mounting on earthed top hat rail. 

OSY‐ControlCenter *) Mounting on earthed top hat rail. 

Cables guided through the earth. 



12. Functional checks 

Check each room for possible faults 

Test light call function for each room 

Test functions between the rooms. 

Test the ward console 

Test mobile console 

Test central console 

Test functions between the wards 

NOTE ! National standards for nurse call systems in the relevant countries must 

be complied with. 

NOTE ! If the nurse call system shall comply with the German standard 

DIN VDE 0834, then all tests and checks must be executed as prescribed in 

this standard. Note: The tests and checks as prescribed by DIN VDE 0834 may 

go beyond the tests and checks as described in this manual. 

67


12.1 Checking the room installation 

12.1.1 Checking every room for faults 

68 

ComTerminal Flamenco or RommTerminal Flamenco: Perform the test 

RAN, as prescribed in the product leaflet for the Terminal. The LEDs of all 

operational room devices will flash. After that call for the state in the display. 

If “OK“ is displayed, the number of operational room devices equals to the 

RAN number set at the Terminal. 

No fault may be indicated at any of these devices for the room: 

ComStationBUS , ComStationCT Flamenco, ComStationPC , Management‐ 

CenterPC , OSYnet‐SafetyController (output for fault messages). 

Use the patient handset or the pear push switch to check for correct light 

switching. 

Use the patient handset to check for correct radio reception and TV sound. 


12.1.2 Check light call function for each room 

12.1.2.1 Check each room 

Press call button 

(red). 

Activate 

presence 1 

(green). 

Deactivate 

presence 1 

(green). 

Press call button 

(red). 

Activate 

presence 2 

(yellow). 

Deactivate 

presence 2 

(yellow). 



The following test is performed to check all call devices in the room: 

Start 

yes 

LED for 

call button (red) 

weak light. 

no 

LED for call button 

(red) bright. 


(red) 

weak light. 


(red) bright. 


(red) weak light 

LED in presence 

button (green). 

is on 


button (green) 

is off. 


button (yellow) 

is on 

LED in 

presence button 

(yellow) is off. 

Correct the fault. 

Room lamp: 

Red flashing. 

Room lamp: 

Red is on. 

Green is on. 

Room lamp: 

Lights are off. 

Room lamp: 

Red flashing. 

Room lamp: 

Red is on. 

Yellow is on. 

Room lamp: 


69


12.1.2.2 Check function from WCs en suite to room 

70 

Press WC call 

button (red). 

Press WC 

cancel button 

(grey). 

Press WC 

cancel button 

(grey) again. 

The following test is performed to check all call devices from WCs en suite to 

rooms: 

LED for WC call 

button (red) bright. 

LED for WC- call 

button (red) 

weak light. 

Start 

yes 

LED for WC call 

button (red) 

weak light. 

no 

LED for WC 

cancel button 

(grey) is on. 

LED for WC 

cancel button 

(grey) is off. 

Correct the fault. 

Room lamps 

77 0170 00 

77 0171 00: 

Red flashing. 

Room lamp 

77 0170 01: 

White flashing. 

Room lamps 

77 0170 10 

77 0171 10 

Red flashing + 

White flashing. 

Room lamps 

7 0170 00 

77 0171 00: 

Red is on. 

Room lamp 

77 0170 01: 

White is on. 

Room lamps 

77 0170 10 

77 0171 10 

Rot is in+ 

White is on. 

Room lamps 

77 0170 00 

77 0171 00: 


Room lamp 

77 0170 01: 

Lights are off 

Room lamps 

77 0170 10 

77 0171 10 

Lights are off 


12.1.2.3 Testing of code blue / cardiac alarm 

Start 

Activate 

presence 1 

(green). 

Press code 

blue/cardiac alarm 

button (blue). 

Activate 

presence 2 

(yellow). 

Deactivate 

presence 2 

(yellow). 

Deactivate 

presence 1 

(green). 



The following test is performed for the code blue/cardiac alarm button at the 

ComTerminal (if available), at the RoomTerminal, and for all separate code blue/ 

cardiac alarm switches: 

LED for code 


button (blue) is on. 

LED for code 


button (blue) 

weak light. 

LED for presence 

button 1 (green) 

is on. 

LED for 


(yellow) is on. 

LED for 


(yellow) is off. 

LED for 


(green) is off. 

Room lamps 

77 0170 00 

77 0171 00 

77 0170 10 

77 0171 10: 

Green is on. 

Room lamps 

77 0170 00 

77 0171 00: 

77 0170 10 

77 0171 10 

Red flicker. 

Green is on. 

Room lamp 

77 0170 01: 

Blue flickers. 

Room lamps 

77 0170 00 

77 0171 00: 

77 0170 10 

77 0171 10 

Red is on. 

Green is on. 

Yellow is on 

Room lamp 

77 0170 01: 

Blue is on. 

Room lamps 

77 0170 00 

77 0171 00: 

77 0170 10 

77 0171 10 

Red is off. 

Green is on. 

Yellow is off. 

Room lamp 

77 0170 01: 


Room lamps 

77 0170 00 

77 0171 00 

77 0170 10 

77 0171 10: 


71


12.2 Checking the ward functions 

12.2.1 Call forwarding 

72 

When a call is not answered within a programmed time frame, it will be for‐ 

warded to all rooms with activated presence states. Forwarded calls are 

presented on the display at the ComTermina and at the RoomTerminal Fla‐ 

menco, and a tone also signals such calls. Furthermore a call tone will sound 

at the staff presence combination with call tone wp (order no. 70 0119 00) as 

well as at the cancel switch/WC with call tone wp (order no. 70 0183 00). 

12.2.1.1 Rooms with ComTerminal Flamenco 

Refer to the operating instructions for the ComTerminal Flamenco for details on 

the handling of forwarded calls. 

Check for each room: 

Is the call forwarding tone audible at the ComTerminal? 

Does the display of the ComTerminals show the correct room number? 

Can the call be answered? Can a speech connection be established to the 

call location? 

Can calls of call type “Call“ be cancelled from the remote position? 

12.2.1.2 Rooms with RoomTerminal Flamenco 

Refer to the operating instructions for the ComTerminal Flamenco for details on 

the handling of forwarded calls. 


Is the call forwarding tone audible at the RoomTerminal? 

Does the display of the RoomTerminals show the correct room number? 

Can the call be acknowledged? 

12.2.1.3 Rooms with ControlTerminal Flamenco 


Is the call forwarding tone audible at the staff presence combination with call 

tone wp (order no. 70 0119 00) and at the cancel switch/WC with call tone 

(order no. 70 0183 00)? 

12.2.2 Corridor display 

Check whether calls in the ward are correctly indicated at the corridor display. 


12.2.3 Direction lamps 



Check each direction lamp for the correct indication of the direction for the alloc‐ 

ated rooms. 

12.2.4 Call devices 

Check whether calls from additional call devices (e.g. radio triggers and pear 

push switches) are indicated as desired. 

73


12.3 Checking the consoles 

74 

Perform this test for all installed consoles: Ward consoles, mobile consoles, 

central consoles. For information on the correct operation and use of the con‐ 

soles refer to the relevant operating instructions. 

Two persons are required for executing these checks. One person will handle 

the console, and the other person will proceed from one room to another. 


Is the room number correctly displayed? 

Do all types of calls arrive at the console and are they signalled in the appro‐ 

priate manner (e.g. normal call, WC call, diagnostic call, emergency call 1, 

emergency call 2, WC call, WC emergency call, code blue / cardiac alarm)? 

Are bed numbers (channel numbers) correctly presented? 

Can calls be answered at the console? 

Can a speech connection be established with the console via voice devices 

(ComTerminal, patient handset)? 

Are presence states correctly displayed? 

Can announcements be broadcast from the console? 

NOTE ! If you note that a false bed number has been set at the connection 

socket combi bedhead unit, the medical supply unit must be opened in order 

to set the correct number (refer to documents on the medical supply unit). 

12.4 Checking functions between wards 

Check: 

Can ward coupling be activated at the ward console? 

Correct function of group lamps. 



13. Spare parts 

Functions Order No. 

Terminating resistor 120 Ohm 

as bus terminating element in the final bus de‐ 

vice. 

Fuse 1 A F 

e.g. for corridor display Alpha 16, corridor display 

Alpha 16, double-sided. 

Mains fuse, front plate (5 x 20) T 5.0 A 

e.g. for power supply unit and power supply unit 

UPS, power supply unit UPS 60. 

Output fuse, bottom 15 A FKS 

e.g. for power supply unit and power supply unit 


Battery fuse, internal 20 A FKS 

e.g. for power supply unit UPS, battery set for 

UPS 60. 

Push-wire connector for junction boxes, 

5-pole 

e.g. for connection socket ComStation, Control‐ 

Terminal Flamenco, ControlTerminal with door‐ 

plate Flamenco. 

Wire cross-section: 0.5 - 2.5 mm2 Clamp for battery connection, 2 pole 

e.g. for power supply unit UPS 60. 

Screw connecting clamp, 6‐pole 

e.g. for OSYlink-Door entry speaker, OSY-Con‐ 

trolCenter (data wires). 

00 0040 76 

00 0130 24 

00 0130 41 

00 0132 02 

00 0132 03 

00 0210 21 

00 0211 20 

00 0211 32 

75


76 

Functions 

Screw connecting clamp, voltage supply, 

4‐pole 

e.g. for OSYlink-Door entry speaker, OSYlink- 

Group lamp, OSYlink-Announcement, OSYlink‐ 

Universal and for OSY‐ControlCenter (DC/DC 

converter). 


e.g. for OSYlink-Door entry speaker, OSYlink- 

Group lamp, OSYlink-Announcement, OSYlink‐ 

Universal, OSY-ControlCenter (audio wires). 


e.g. for connection socket with call switch bed‐ 

head unit. 


e.g. for OSYlink‐Universal. 

Clamp for control and indicator outputs, 

7-pole 

for power supply unit and power supply unit 


Clamp for mains connection, 3-pole 



Clamp for 24 V connection, 4-pole 



Order No. 

00 0211 33 

00 0211 36 

00 0211 37 

00 0211 38 

00 0211 39 

00 0211 40 

00 0211 41 


Functions 

Cage clamp, 10‐pole 

for OSY‐ControlCenter. 

Bridging contact EBP 2 - 5 

e.g. for ControlTerminal Flamenco, ControlTermi‐ 

nal with doorplate Flamenco. 

Bridging contact EB 2 - 5 for control 

clamps “x“ and “y“ 

for power supply unit UPS, power supply unit 

UPS 60. 

Plug-in screw terminal with fuse holder 

e.g. for corridor display Alpha 16, corridor display 

Alpha 16, double-sided. 

Rechargeable lead-gel batteries, Type 

BAT 24-7 

consisting of 2 batteries for power supply unit 

UPS, order no. 77 3400 00. 

Rechargeable lead-gel battery, Type BAT 

12-24 

Battery for battery set for UPS 60, 

order no. 77 3450 00 

LED module, red 

for group lamps, direction lamp. 

LED module, green 

for group lamps, direction lamp. 


Order No. 

00 0211 44 

00 0220 52 

00 0223 56 

00 0224 81 

00 0648 85 

00 0648 87 

13 5200 00A 

13 5202 00A 


77


78 

Functions 

Connecting cable 

e.g. for connection socket with call switch or for 

connection socket with call switch bedhead unit 

for the connection of an external call device to 

the additional external call input. 

Connector, 3-pole 

for switches and room lamps. 

Connector, 4‐pole 

for connection socket with call switch. 

Fixing clamp 

for switches. 

Order No. 

50 0308 02 

70 0807 00 

70 0807 01 

70 0808 00 

Overvoltage protection circuit 70 0890 97 


Functions 

LED module, red 

for room lamps. 

LED module, yellow 


LED module, green 


LED module, white 


LED module, blue 


OSYnet connecting plug 

for OSYnet‐Y‐RepeaterOpto. 


Order No. 

77 0190 00 

77 0190 01 

77 0190 02 

77 0190 03 

77 0190 04 

77 0950 00 


79


80 



14. Product leaflets 

Each device is furnished with a product leaflet with information on mounting and 

connection details. In addition, we have collated the relevant product leaflets 

in this chapter of the technical manual. 

WARNING ! Do not install the power supply unit at this time. The mounting and 

installation of the various devices and equipment shall be executed with no 

electric power in the system. Otherwise there is the ever present danger of a 

short-circuit situation! 

NOTE ! Check that the order no. on the products is the same as the order no. 

on the installation plans. Example: Switches for WC call have the same housing 

as the switches for normal call, however, they are programmed differently. 

Order no. Product name Page 

Display equipment 

77 0112 02 Group lamp, 2 groups 86 



77 0150 00 Corridor display Alpha 16 87 - 88 

77 0160 00 Corridor display Alpha 16, double-sided 89 - 90 

77 0170 00 Room lamp, 3 sections 91 

77 0170 01 Room lamp code blue/cardiac alarm, WC 91 

77 0170 10 Room lamp, 4 sections 91 

77 0171 00 Room lamp, 3 sections, with doorplate 92 

77 0171 10 Room lamp, 4 sections, with doorplate 92 

77 0182 10 

Switches 

Room lamp Universal, 2 sections 93 - 94 

70 0106 00 Pneumatic call switch 96 

70 0106 01 Pneumatic call switch/WC 96 

70 0111 00 Call switch wp 97 

70 0111 01 Call switch/WC wp 97 

70 0112 00 Staff presence switch wp 98 

70 0113 00 Cancel switch/WC wp 98 

70 0114 00 Code blue / cardiac alarm switch wp 97 

70 0115 00 Pull cord call switch wp 99 

70 0115 01 Pull cord call switch/WC wp 99 

70 0117 00 Call switch/WC with cancel switch wp 100 

Page 81


Order no. Product name 

Page 

70 0118 00 Call switch with privacy switch wp 100 

70 0119 00 Staff presence combination with call tone 

wp 

101 

70 0183 00 Cancel switch/WC with call tone wp 101 

Room terminals 

77 0510 00 ComTerminal Flamenco 104 - 107 

77 0520 00 RoomTerminal Flamenco 108 - 111 

77 0550 00 ControlTerminal Flamenco 112 - 114 

77 0551 00 ControlTerminal with doorplate Flamenco 115 - 117 


70 0171 03 Connection socket with Call switch 120 

70 0171 50 Connection socket with Call switch, bed‐ 

head unit 

121 - 122 

70 0424 00 Connection socket combi 123 - 124 

70 0434 00 Connection socket combi, bedhead unit 125 - 126 

74 0452 30 Connection socket ComStation 127 - 128 

Consoles 

77 0602 00 ComStationPC 130 

77 0606 00 ComStationCT Flamenco 131 - 132 

77 0610 00 ManagementCenter PC 133 

Interfaces in the room 

70 0360 10 IR TV control module universal 136 - 137 

70 0360 11 IR TV control module universal Audio 138 - 139 

70 0840 00 RAN interface normal call 140 

70 0841 00 RAN interface code blue / cardiac 140 

70 0842 00 RAN interface telephone call 141 

70 0860 00 RAN interface TV 142 - 143 

70 0880 00 RAN interface with speech 144 

11 5350 00 Telephone interface relay 145 

Interfaces in the group 

77 0801 00 OSYlink‐Door entry speaker 148 - 149 

77 0802 00 OSYlink‐Group lamp 150 - 151 

77 0803 00 OSYlink‐Universal 152 - 153 

77 0804 00 OSYlink‐Announcement 154 - 155 

Accessories 

70 0790 00 Sound detector 158 

70 0812 00 Diagnostic connection cable 159 

Page 82 




Order no. Product name 

Page 

77 0901 00 Smoke detector 160 

System devices 

77 2x0x 00 OSY‐ControlCenter 162 - 165 

77 2100 00 OSYnet‐SafetyController 166 - 167 

Power supply 

77 3400 00 Power supply unit UPS 170 - 176 

77 3400 10 Power supply unit UPS 60 177 - 182 

77 3401 00 Power supply unit 183 - 185 

77 3450 00 Battery set for UPS 60 186 - 189 

Installation 

77 4000 00 OSYnet‐Y‐RepeaterOpto 192 

77 4001 00 OSYnet‐Gateway 193 

Page 83


Page 84 


14.1 Display equipment 

77 0112 02 Group lamp, 2 groups 





77 0170 00 Room lamp, 3 sections 

77 0170 01 Room lamp Code blue / cardiac alarm, WC 

77 0170 10 Room lamp, 4 sections 

77 0171 00 Room lamp, 3 sections, with doorplate 

77 0171 10 Room lamp, 4 sections, with doorplate 

77 0182 10 Room lamp Universal, 2 sections 


Page 85 

14. Product leaflets

Tunstall GmbH, Orkotten 66, D-48291 Telgte, www.tunstall.de 

Installationsanleitung D Installation Instructions GB 

Gruppenleuchte, 2‐teilig, Best.‐Nr. 77 0112 02 



Signalleuchte für mehrere Gruppen zur gruppenbezogenen Signalisierung von Rufen. 

(2-teilig: 2 Gruppen, 3-teilig: 3 Gruppen, 4-teilig: 4 Gruppen) Je Gruppe stehen zwei 

Einzelleuchtfelder (rot und grün) mit Anschlussmöglichkeiten zur Signalisierung von Rufen 

und Rufstatus zur Verfügung. Inkl. LED‐Module. 

Abmessungen (HxBxT) ohne Montagerahmen: 

2-teilig: 160 x 86 x 70 mm 

3-teilig: 240 x 86 x 70 mm 

4-teilig: 320 x 86 x 70 mm 

Betriebsstrom pro Leuchtfeld: 75 mA 

Hinweis! Die vollständige Installation des Systems ist im technischen 

Handbuch beschrieben. 

Einbaudose und Befestigungsschrauben für die Wandmontage nicht im Lieferumfang. 

Back box and fixing screws for wall mounting not included in delivery. 

77 0112 02 

Gruppenleuchte, 2‐teilig 

Group lamp, 2 groups 

00 8802 47, 09/11 (Rev. 2.0) 

LED‐Modul, rot / LED module, red 

LED‐Modul, grün / LED module, green 

77 0113 02 



Page 86 

Group lamp, 2 groups, order no. 77 0112 02 



Signal lamps for several groups for group related display of calls: 2 groups, 3 groups or 4 

groups. Two single sections (red and green) per group with connection possibilities for 

signalling of calls and call status incl. LED modules. 

Dimensions (HxWxD) without mountnig frame: 

2 groups: 160 x 86 x 70 mm 

3 groups: 240 x 86 x 70 mm 

4 groups: 320 x 86 x 70 mm 

Operating current per light section: 75 mA 

Note! The complete installation of the system is described in the technical 

manual. 

Plus‐Pol: Ruf (rot) 

positive terminal: call (red) 

Anschlüsse / Connections: 

Plus-Pol: Status (grün) 

positive terminal: status (green) 

Rotes Leuchtfeld: Ruf 

red light section: call 

Grünes Leuchtfeld: Status 

green light section: status 

77 0114 02 



Gemeinsamer Minus‐Pol 

collective negative terminal



Flurdisplay Alpha 16, Best.‐Nr. 77 0150 00 

Display zur alphanumerischen Anzeige von Rufen und allgemeinen Systeminformationen. 

16 Zeichen, alphanumerisch 

Automatische Anzeige als Laufschrift bei längeren Texten 

Tongeber zur Anzeige von nachgesendeten Rufen 

Lautsprecher z.B. für Durchsagen und Signaltöne 

Stromaufnahme: 300 mA (Durchschnitt) 



00 8802 43, 09/11 (Rev. 2.0) 

Corridor Display Alpha 16, order no. 77 0150 00 

Display for alphanumeric indication of calls and general system information. 

16 digits, alphanumeric 

Longer texts are automatically displayed as ticker 

Buzzer for signalling forwarded calls 

Loudspeaker, e.g. for announcements or signal tones 

Supply current: 300 mA (average) 

Adresse einstellen (1 - 110) Setting of address (1 - 110) 

Zum Einstellen der Adresse dienen die Codierschalter 1 bis 7 mit den Werten 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 

32, 64. Entsprechenden Schalter auf ON stellen. 

Beispiele: Adresse 1 wird durch Einschalten des Codierschalters 1 eingestellt. 

Adresse 4 wird durch Einschalten des Codierschalters 3 eingestellt. 

Adresse 24 wird durch Addition gebildet: Schalter 4 und 5 auf ON stellen (8+16=24). 

Wenn die Adresse während des Betriebs geändert wird, muss anschließend ein Reset 

durchgeführt werden. Für den Reset Codierschalter 10 für eine Sekunde auf ON setzen. 


manual. 

For setting the address please use the code switches 1 to 7 with the values 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 

64. Set the appropriate switch to ON. 

Examples: Address 1 is set by using the code switch 1. Address 4 is set by using the code 

switch 3. Address 24 is selected through addition: coding switch 4 and 5 (8 + 16 = 24). 

After the address is changed while system operation a reset has to be made. For the reset set 

code switch 10 for one second to ON. 

Montage Mounting 

Das Flurdisplay ist vorgesehen zur Montage in Fluren oder Diensträumen. 

The corridor display is designed for mounting in corridors or duty rooms. 

Das mitgelieferte Zubehör dient zur Deckenmontage. 

The standard accessory is used for ceiling mounting. 

785 mm 

Gesamtgewicht ca. 3 kg 

Total weight approx. 3 kg 

770 mm 

77 0150 00 

Flurdisplay Alpha 16 

Corridor Display Alpha 16 

570 mm 

1 

2 

4 

8 

16 

32 

64 

Test 

Reset 

Anschlussleitung von Rohrende 

bis Kabelende, ca. 750 mm 

Connection Cable from tube end 

up to cable end, approx. 750 mm 

Adresse 

Address 

Rohr Länge ca. 645 mm 

Tube length approx. 645 mm 

35 

Page 87 

A 

Das Seil durch die Hülse A der Öse 

schieben. Das Seil arretiert automatisch. 

Seil bis zur gewünschten Länge 

abschneiden. (Zum Lösen der 

Arretierung Hülse A eindrücken.) 

Slide the rope through the sleeve A of 

the eye. The rope is fixed automatically. 

Cut off the rope to the desired length. 

(For pulling out the rope press sleeve A.)

Anschlüsse D Connections GB 

Anschluss Connection 

Das Flurdisplay wird direkt an den Gruppenbus OSYnet angeschlossen. Die freien 

Drahtenden der Anschlussleitung dienen zum bauseitigen Anschluss. 

00 8802 43, 09/11 (Rev. 2.0) 

The corridor display is directly connected to the group bus OSYnet. Use the free wire ends of 

the connection cable for on site connection. 

Funktionstest Functional test 

Wenn das Flurdisplay angeschlossen ist, sollte ein Funktionstest durchgeführt werden. When the corridor display is connected, a functional test should be carried out. 

Zum Starten des Funktionstest Codierschalter 9 “Test” auf ON setzen. 

To start the functional test set code switch 9 “Test” to ON. 

Das Display durchläuft nun die im Folgenden beschriebenen Testschritte. Jeder Schritt The corridor display will run through the test steps described in the following table. Each 

dauert ca. 2 Sekunden. 

step takes approx. 2 seconds. 

Display zeigt: Test ok, wenn... Was wird getestet? 

Start Test 

Tunstall GmbH 

Display Check 

0123456789abcdef 

Buzzer test 

Buzzer: low 

Buzzer: medium 

Buzzer: loud 

Buzzer OFF 

Speech relay 1 ON 


Speech relays OFF 

IIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIII 

(Anzeige in Laufschrift) 

To stop the test: 

DIP switch 9 -> OFF 

End of Test 

00:00 (Uhrzeit) 

Die 3 Texte werden 

nacheinander angezeigt. 

Funktionstest startet. 

Optische Anzeige. 

Tongeber-Test startet. 

Leiser Signalton ertönt. Tongeber‐Einstellung “leise”. 

Mittel-lauter Signalton ertönt. Tongeber-Einstellung “mittel”. 

Lauter Signalton ertönt. Tongeber-Einstellung “laut”. 

Tongeber wird ausgeschaltet. 

Leises Klicken eines Relais 

Sprechkanal 1 der Rufanlage. 

ist zu hören. 


ist zu hören. 

Klicken von Relais ist zu hören. 

Anzeige ohne “Löcher”. 

Löcher zeigen defekte LEDs an. 


Sprechkanäle werden geschlossen. 

Funktionsfähigkeit der LEDs. 

Zum Beenden des Tests den Codierschalter 9 auf OFF setzen. 

Test beendet. 

Wenn OSYnet angeschlossen: Anzeige der Systemuhrzeit. 

Sonst läuft die interne Uhr des Flurdisplays ab 00:00 Uhr. 

Anschlussleitung 

connection cable 

1 

2 

4 

8 

16 

32 

64 

Test 

Reset 

Adresse 

Address 

Display shows: Test ok, if... What is being tested? 

Start Test 


Display Check 

0123456789abcdef 

Buzzer test 

Buzzer: low 


Buzzer: loud 

Buzzer OFF 





(displayed as ticker) 



End of Test 

00:00 (time) 

schwarz/black: 0 V 

blau/blue: 0 V 

rot/red: 24 V 

braun/brown: NF 1a 

weiß/white: NF 1b 

grau/grey: NF 2a 

rosa/pink: NF 2b 

gelb/yellow: DL 

grün/green: DH 

violett/violet: DG 

The 3 texts are displayed one 

after the other. 

Functional test starts. 

Buzzer test starts. 

Optical display. 

Low signal tone sounds. Buzzer setting “low”. 

Medium signal tone sounds. Buzzer setting “medium”. 

Loud signal tone sounds. Buzzer setting “loud”. 

Low relay click can be heard. 

Buzzer is switched off. 

Speech channel 1 of system. 

Low relay click can be heard. Speech channel 2 of system. 

Relay click can be heard. 

Display without “holes”. 

Holes show defective LEDs. 

Speech channels are closed. 

LED function. 

To stop the test set code switch 9 to OFF. 

Test ended. 

If OSYnet is connected: System time is displayed. 

Otherwise internal clock of corridor display starts at 00:00 h. 

*) Steck‐Schraubklemme mit Si‐Halter (00 0224 81), Sicherung F1A (00 0130 24) 

*) Plug-in screw terminal with fuseholder (00 0224 81), Fuse F1A (00 0130 24) 

Page 88 

bauseitiger Anschluss 

on site connection 

Si * ) 

77 0150 00 

Flurdisplay Alpha 16 

Corridor Display Alpha 16 

Ip 

Ip 

OSYnet 

OSYnet 

Tunstall GmbH, Orkotten 66, D-48291 Telgte, www.tunstall.de



Flurdisplay Alpha 16, doppelseitig, Best.‐Nr. 77 0160 00 

Doppelseitiges Display zur Anzeige von Rufen und allgem. Systeminformationen. 

16 Zeichen alphanumerisch 

Automatische Anzeige als Laufschrift bei längeren Texten 

Tongeber zur Anzeige von nachgesendeten Rufen 

Lautsprecher z.B. für Durchsagen und Signaltöne 

Stromaufnahme: 600 mA (Durchschnitt) 



00 8802 44, 09/11 (Rev. 2.0) 

Corridor Display Alpha 16, double‐sided, order no. 77 0160 00 

Double-sided display for indication of calls and general system information. 

16 digits, alphanumeric 

Longer texts are automatically displayed as ticker 

Tone generator for signalling forwarded calls 

Loudspeaker, e.g. for announcements or signal tones 

Supply current: 600 mA (average) 


manual. 


Das Flurdisplay ist vorgesehen zur Montage in Fluren oder Diensträumen. 

The corridor display is designed for mounting in corridors or duty rooms. 

Das mitgelieferte Zubehör dient zur Deckenmontage. 

The standard accessory is used for ceiling mounting. 

785 mm 

Gesamtgewicht ca. 6 kg 

total weight approx. 6 kg 

770 mm 

570 mm 

77 0160 00 

Flurdisplay Alpha 16, doppelseitig 

Corridor Display Alpha 16, double‐sided 

Anschlussleitung von Rohrende 

bis Kabelende, ca. 750 mm 

Connection Cable from tube end 

up to cable end, approx. 750 mm 

Option: 

Gewinkelte Montage für bessere Lesbarkeit 

Angled mounting for better readability 

Rohr Länge ca. 645 mm 

Tube length approx. 645 mm 

120 mm 

Page 89 

Gerade Montage 

Upright mounting 

A 

Das Seil durch die Hülse A der Öse schieben. Das 

Seil arretiert automatisch. Seil bis zur gewünschten 

Länge abschneiden. (Zum Lösen der Arretierung 

Hülse A eindrücken.) 

Slide the rope through the sleeve A of the eye. The 

rope is fixed automatically. Cut off the rope to the 

desired length. 

(For pulling out the rope press sleeve A) 

Die beiden unteren Schrauben in 

die anderen Löcher einschrauben. 

Srew the two bottom screws in 

the other holes. 

Gewinkelte Montage 

Angled mounting



Das Flurdisplay wird direkt an den Gruppenbus OSYnet angeschlossen. Die freien 

Drahtenden der Anschlussleitung dienen zum bauseitigen Anschluss. 


In einem der beiden Displays befindet sich hinter der seitlichen Schutzkappe ein 10‐teiliger 

Codierschalter. Zum Einstellen der Adresse dienen die Codierschalter 1 bis 7 mit den 

Werten 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64. Entsprechenden Schalter auf ON stellen. 




Wenn die Adresse während des Betriebs geändert wird, muss anschließend ein Reset 

durchgeführt werden. Für den Reset Codierschalter 10 für eine Sekunde auf ON setzen. 

00 8802 44, 09/11 (Rev. 2.0) 

The corridor display is directly connected to the group bus OSYnet. Use the free wire ends of 

the connection cable for on site connection. 

Behind the protection cover at the side of one display there is a 10 part code switch. For setting 

the address please use the code switches 1 to 7 with the values 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64. Set the 

appropriate switch to ON. 

Examples: Address 1 is set by using the code switch 1. Address 4 is set by using the code 

switch 3. Address 24 is selected through addition: coding switch 4 and 5 (8 + 16 = 24). 

After the address is changed while system operation a reset has to be made. For the reset set 

code switch 10 for one second to ON. 

Funktionstest Functional test 

Nach dem Anschließen des Flurdisplays sollte ein Funktionstest durchgeführt werden. After the corridor display has been connected, a functional test should be carried out. 

Zum Starten des Funktionstest Codierschalter 9 “Test” auf ON setzen. 

To start the functional test set code switch 9 “Test” to ON. 

Das Display durchläuft nun die im Folgenden beschriebenen Testschritte. Jeder Schritt The corridor display will run through the test steps described in the following table. Each 

dauert ca. 2 Sekunden. Sie müssen den Test zweimal durchführen, d.h. jeweils ein Display step takes approx. 2 seconds. You have to carry out the test twice, i.e. check each display 

beobachten. 

separately. 

Display zeigt: Test ok, wenn... Was wird getestet? 

Start Test 


Display Check 

0123456789abcdef 

Buzzer test 

Buzzer: low 


Buzzer: loud 

Buzzer OFF 





(Anzeige in Laufschrift) 



End of Test 

Die 3 Texte werden 

nacheinander angezeigt. 

Funktionstest startet. 

Optische Anzeige. 

Tongeber-Test startet. 

Leiser Signalton ertönt. Tongeber‐Einstellung “leise”. 

Mittel-lauter Signalton ertönt. Tongeber-Einstellung “mittel”. 

Lauter Signalton ertönt. Tongeber-Einstellung “laut”. 

Tongeber wird ausgeschaltet. 



ist zu hören. 1) 



Klicken von Relais 


Anzeige ohne “Löcher”. 

Löcher zeigen defekte LEDs an. 


Sprechkanäle werden geschlossen. 

Funktionsfähigkeit der LEDs. 

Zum Beenden des Tests den Codierschalter 9 auf OFF setzen. 

Test beendet. 

00:00 (Uhrzeit) 

Wenn OSYnet angeschlossen: Anzeige der Systemuhrzeit. 

Sonst läuft interne Uhr des Flurdisplays ab 00:00 Uhr. 

1) Die Relais für die beiden Sprechkanäle befinden sich nur in dem Display, in dem sich 

auch der Codierschalter befindet. 


connection cable 

schwarz/black: 0 V 

blau/blue: 0 V 

rot/red: 24 V 

braun/brown: NF 1a 

weiß/white: NF 1b 

grau/grey: NF 2a 

rosa/pink: NF 2b 

gelb/yellow: DL 

grün/green: DH 

violett/violet: DG 

Display shows: Test ok, if... What is being tested? 

Start Test 


Display Check 

0123456789abcdef 

Buzzer test 

Buzzer: low 


Buzzer: loud 

Buzzer OFF 





(displayed as ticker) 



End of Test 

The 3 texts are displayed one 

after the other. 

Functional test starts. 

Buzzer test starts. 

Optical display. 

Low signal tone sounds. Buzzer setting “low”. 

Medium signal tone sounds. Buzzer setting “medium”. 

Loud signal tone sounds. Buzzer setting “loud”. 

Buzzer is switched off. 

Low relay click can be heard. 1) 

Speech channel 1 of system. 

Low relay click can be heard. 1) Speech channel 2 of system. 

Relay click can be heard. 1) 

Display without “holes”. 

Holes show defective LEDs. 

Speech channels are closed. 

LED function. 

To stop the test set code switch 9 to OFF. 

Test ended. 

If OSYnet is connected: System time is displayed. 

00:00 (time) 

Otherwise internal clock of corridor display starts at 00:00 h. 

1) The relays for the speech channels are only in the display with the coding switch. 

*) Steck‐Schraubklemme mit Si‐Halter (00 0224 81) Sicherung F1A (00 0130 24) 

*) Plug-in screw terminal with fuseholder (00 0224 81) Fuse F1A (00 0130 24) 

1 

2 

4 

8 

16 

32 

64 

Test 

Reset 

Adresse 

Address 

bauseitiger Anschluss 

on site connection 

Si * ) 

Page 90 

Ip 

Ip 

OSYnet 

OSYnet 

77 0160 00 

Flurdisplay Alpha 16, doppelseitig 

Corridor Display Alpha 16, double‐sided 




Zimmerleuchte, 3-teilig, Best.‐Nr. 77 0170 00 

zur optischen Anzeige von allen Rufarten und Personalanwesenheiten. Wandmontage. 

Zimmerleuchte Alarm, WC, Best.‐Nr. 77 0170 01 

als Ergänzung zu Zimmerleuchte 77 0170 00 zur optischen Anzeige von Alarm‐ und/oder 

WC‐Rufen. Wandmontage wahlweise vor der Zimmertür neben Zimmerleuchte 77 0170 00 

zur eindeutigen Anzeige von WC‐ und/oder Alarmruf, oder Montage im Zimmer am 

WC‐Eingang, um die Richtung zum WC‐Ruf anzuzeigen. 

Zimmerleuchte, 4‐teilig, Best.‐Nr. 77 0170 10 

zur optischen Anzeige von allen Rufarten und Personalanwesenheiten sowie zusätzliche 

Anzeige für WC‐Ruf. Wandmontage 



Achtung! Die Leiterplatte und die LED‐Module sind mit elektrostatisch gefährdeten 

Bauteilen bestückt. Vermeiden Sie deshalb eine direkte Berührung. 


1* Einbaudose 

2 Gehäuse‐Rückwand 

3* Anschlussklemme (70 0807 00) 

4 Leiterplatte mit LED‐Modulen 

00 8802 49, 08/06 (Rev. 1.0) 

5 Dekorrahmen 

6 Befestigungsschrauben 

7 Lichtkuppel mit Trenneinsatz 

* ist nicht im Lieferumfang enthalten. 

1. Gehäuse‐Rückwand 2 mit den Schrauben der Einbaudose an der Einbaudose 1 

festschrauben. Einbaurichtung beachten, siehe Markierung im Gehäuse. 

2. Angeschlossene Anschlussklemme 3 in die eingebaute Buchse der Leiterplatte 4 

stecken. 

3. Leiterplatte 4 in die Gehäuse‐Rückwand 2 einsetzen (erst oben, dann unten). Dabei die 

beiden Löcher unten in der Leiterplatte 4 auf die Arretierungsstifte der 

Gehäuse‐Rückwand 2 stecken. 

4. LED‐Module gemäß der folgenden Übersicht auf die Leiterplatte stecken. 

5. Dekorrahmen 5 mit den Befestigungsschrauben 6 auf die Gehäuse‐Rückwand 2 

schrauben. 

6. Lichtkuppel mit Trenneinsatz 7 auf den Dekorrahmen 5 drücken bis sie einrastet. 

Room lamp, 3 sections, order no. 77 0170 00 

for optical signalling of all call types and staff presences. Wall mounting. 

Room lamp code blue / cardiac alarm, WC, order no. 77 0170 01 

as complement to room lamp 77 0170 00 for optical signalling of code blue/cardiac alarm 

and/or WC calls. Wall mounting either in the corridor be-sides the room lamp 77 0170 00 

for explicit signalling of WC calls and/or code blue/cardiac alarm or it is installed besides 

the WC door in the patient room for displaying the direction to the WC call. 

Room lamp, 4 sections, order no. 77 0170 10 

for optical signalling of all call types and staff presences as well as additional display for 

WC call. Wall mounting. 


manual. 

Attention! The printed circuit board and the LED modules include electrostatic 

sensitive components. Avoid touching. 

1* Back box 

2 Pattress 

3* Connector (70 0807 00) 

4 Printed circuit board (PCB) with LED modules 

Farben der LED‐Module LED module colours 

77 0170 00 77 0170 01 77 0170 10 

rot: Rufe 

blau: Alarmruf 

rot: Rufe 

grün: Personal 1 blau: Alarmruf 

grün: Personal 1 

gelb: Personal 2 weiß: WC‐Ruf 

gelb: Personal 2 

kein LED‐Modul kein LED‐Modul weiß: WC‐Ruf 

5 Decorative frame 

6 Fixing screws 

7 Light dome with insert module 

* not included with product delivery. 

1. Fit the pattress 2 with the back box screws to the back box 1. For the correct mounting 

direction refer to the markings in the pattress. 

2. Plug the pre-connected connector 3 into the socket on the PCB 4. 

3. Put the PCB 4 into the pattress 2 (first the top, then the bottom). The two holes on the 

base of the PCB must fit onto the fixing pins of the pattress 2. 

4. Plug the LED modules onto the PCB according to the following overview. 

5. Fit the decorative frame 5 with the fixing screws 6 onto the pattress 2. 

6. Press the light dome with the insert module 7 onto the decorative frame 5 until it locks in 

place. 

77 0170 00 77 0170 01 77 0170 10 

red: calls 

blue: code blue/cardiac alarm red: calls 

green: staff 1 blue: code blue/cardiac alarm green: staff 1 

yellow: staff 2 white: WC call 

yellow: staff 2 

no LED module no LED module 

white: WC call 

Anschluss Zimmerbus (RAN) ohne Sprechen Connection of room bus (RAN) without speech 

vom RAN-Teilnehmer 

B (lack) = 0V schwarz 

Y (ellow) = RAN gelb 

R (ed) = +24 V rot 

B 

Y 

R 70 0807 00 

from RAN user 

B (lack) = 0V 

Y (ellow) = RAN 

R (ed) = +24 V 

B 

Y 

R 70 0807 00 

Bei der Einstellung der RAN‐Anzahl am ComTerminal muss beachtet werden: 

Die Zimmerleuchte, 4-teilig, Best.‐Nr. 77 0170 10, entspricht zwei 

Zimmergeräten, d.h. ihre RAN‐Anzahl beträgt nicht 1 sondern 2. 

Kanalcodierung Channel coding 

Die Zimmerleuchten können zur Bildung von Funktionseinheiten verschiedenen Kanälen 

zugeordnet werden. Die Kanalnummern werden an einer markierten Stelle auf der 

Leiterplatte (P1, P2, P3) durch Trennen (Messer) bzw. Verbinden (Löten) eingestellt. 

Werkseitig ist immer die Kanalnummer 0 eingestellt. 

Die einzustellende Kanalnummer entnehmen Sie dem entsprechenden Installationsplan. 

Beispiel Kanalnummer 6: 

P2 und P3 trennen 

= 6 

= werkseitig verbunden 

= getrennt 

= Lötpunkt 

Zum Wiederverbinden 

getrennter Leitungen 

When setting the RAN number in the ComTerminal take into account: 

Room lamp, 4 sections, order no. 77 0170 10, is equivalent to two room 

devices, i.e. its RAN number is not 1 but 2. 

If functional units are requested, the room lamps have to be assigned to different channels. 

The channel number is configured at the position marked on the PCB (P1, P2, P3) by 

breaking the links (cutter) or reconnecting (solder). The product is pre‐set on channel 0. 

For the channel number to be set please refer to the installation plan. 

Example channel number 6: 

Break links P2 and P3 

= 6 

= pre-set link 

= broken link 

Demontage Dismantling 

Lichtkuppel von oben und unten leicht zusammendrücken und dann abziehen. Compress and pull off the light dome. 

77 0170 00 

Zimmerleuchte, 3‐teilig 

Room lamp, 3 sections 

77 0170 01 

Zimmerleuchte Alarm, WC 

Room lamp code blue / 

cardiac alarm, WC 

77 0170 10 

Zimmerleuchte, 4‐teilig 

Room lamp, 4 sections 

1 

2 

3 

OBEN 

TOP 

4 

5 

Page 91 

6 

6 

7 

P1 P2 P3 

Kanalnummer 

Channel number 

= Solder point 

to reconnect a broken link 

= 0 

= 1 

= 2 

= 3 

= 4 

= 5 

= 6 

= 7 

1. 

1. 

2.



Zimmerleuchte, 3-teilig, mit Türschild, Best.‐Nr. 77 0171 00 

zur optischen Anzeige von allen Rufarten und Personalanwesenheiten. Türschild als 

Beschriftungsfeld für die Raumbezeichnung. Wandmontage. 

Zimmerleuchte, 4-teilig, mit Türschild, Best.‐Nr. 77 0171 10 

wie 77 0171 00, jedoch zusätzlich Anzeige des WC‐Rufs. 






1* Einbaudose 




5 Dekorrahmen 

00 8802 54, 02/07 (Rev. 1.0) 



8* Namensschild (Höhe x Breite: 70 x 92 mm) 

9 Schutzabdeckung 





stecken. 






schrauben. 


7. Namenschild 8 und Schutzabdeckung 9 einlegen. 

Room lamp, 3 sections, with doorplate, order no. 77 0171 00 

for optical signalling of all call types and staff presences. Doorplate as label field for room 

designation. Wall mounting. 

Room lamp, 4 sections, with doorplate, order no. 77 0171 10 

as 77 0171 00, but additionally with display for WC call. 


manual. 



1* Back box 


2 Pattress 


3* Connector (70 0807 00) 

8* Label strip (HxW: 70 x 92 mm) 

4 Printed circuit board (PCB) with LED modules 9 Protection cover 











place. 

7. Insert the label strip 8 and the protection cover 9. 


77 0171 00 77 0171 10 

77 0171 00 77 0171 10 

rot: Rufe 

rot: Rufe 

red: calls red: calls 

grün: Personal 1 grün: Personal 1 

green: staff 1 green: staff 1 

gelb: Personal 2 gelb: Personal 2 

yellow: staff 2 yellow: staff 2 

kein LED‐Modul weiß: WC‐Ruf 

no LED module white: WC call 





R (ed) = +24 V rot 

B 

Y 

R 70 0807 00 

from RAN user 

B (lack) = 0V 


R (ed) = +24 V 

B 

Y 

R 70 0807 00 

Bei der Einstellung der RAN‐Anzahl am ComTerminal muss beachtet werden: 

Die Zimmerleuchte, 4-teilig, mit Türschild, Best.‐Nr. 77 0171 10, entspricht 

zwei Zimmergeräten, d.h. ihre RAN‐Anzahl beträgt nicht 1 sondern 2. 


Die Zimmerleuchten können zur Bildung von Funktionseinheiten verschiedenen Kanälen 

zugeordnet werden. Die Kanalnummern werden an einer markierten Stelle auf der 






= 6 


= getrennt 

= Lötpunkt 



When setting the RAN number in the ComTerminal take into account: 

Room lamp, 4 sections, with doorplate, order no. 77 0171 10, is equivalent to 

two room devices, i.e. its RAN number is not 1 but 2. 

If functional units are requested, the room lamps have to be assigned to different channels. 






= 6 


= broken link 



77 0171 00 

Zimmerleuchte, 3‐teilig, mit Türschild 

Room lamp, 3 sections, with doorplate 

77 0171 10 

Zimmerleuchte, 4‐teilig, mit Türschild 

Room lamp, 4 sections, with doorplate 

1 

2 

3 

OBEN 

TOP 

4 

5 

6 

6 

8 

Page 92 

9 

7 

P1 P2 P3 

Kanalnummer 




= 0 

= 1 

= 2 

= 3 

= 4 

= 5 

= 6 

= 7 

1. 

1. 

2.



Zimmerleuchte Universal, 3-teilig, Best.‐Nr. 77 0180 10 

zur optischen Anzeige von allen Rufarten und Personalanwesenheit 1 sowie zusätzliche 

Anzeige für WC‐Ruf. Wandmontage. 


wie 77 0180 10, jedoch zusätzlich mit Personalanwesenheit 2. 


zur optischen Anzeige von Personalanwesenheit 1 und von Telefonruf. Wandmontage. 


zur optischen Anzeige von allen Rufarten. Wandmontage. 

Achtung! Die LED‐Module sind mit elektrostatisch gefährdeten Bauteilen bestückt. 

Vermeiden Sie deshalb eine direkte Berührung. 


1* Einbaudose 




00 8802 56, 10/11 (Rev. 2.0) 

5 Dekorrahmen 







stecken. 






schrauben. 



Anschlusspunkt 

L1 

L2 

L3 

L4 

Anschlusspunkt 

L1 

L2 

L3 

L4 

77 0180 10 77 0180 00 

rot: Rufe 

rot: Rufe 

grün: Personal 1 grün: Personal 1 

kein LED‐Modul gelb: Personal 2 

weiß: WC‐Ruf weiß: WC‐Ruf 

77 0182 10 77 0182 50 

kein LED‐Modul rot: Rufe 

grün: Personal 1 kein LED‐Modul 

weiß: Telefonruf kein LED‐Modul 

kein LED‐Modul 

kein LED‐Modul 


Room lamp universal, 3 sections, order no. 77 0180 10 

for optical signalling of all call types and staff presence 1 as well as additional display for 

WC call. Wall mounting. 


as 77 0180 10, but additionally with staff presence 2. 


for optical signalling of staff presence 1 and telephone call. Wall mounting. 

Room lamp universal, 1 section, order no. 77 0182 50 

for optical signalling of all call types. Wall mounting. 

Attention! The LED modules include electrostatic sensitive components. Avoid 

touching. 

1* Back box 


2 Pattress 


3* Connector (70 0807 07) 


4 Printed circuit board (PCB) with LED modules * not included with product delivery. 









place. 

Connector 

L1 

L2 

L3 

L4 

Connector 


77 0180 10 

Zimmerleuchte Universal , 3‐teilig 

Room lamp universal, 3 sections 

77 0180 00 

Zimmerleuchte Universal, 4‐teilig 


77 0182 10 

Zimmerleuchte Universal , 2‐teilig 


77 0182 50 

Zimmerleuchte Universal, 1‐teilig 

Room lamp universal, 1 section 

1 

2 

3 

4 

Page 93 

OBEN 

TOP 

5 

6 

L1 

L2 

L3 

L4 

6 

77 0180 10 77 0180 00 

red: calls red: calls 

green: staff 1 green: staff 1 

no LED module yellow: staff 2 

white: WC call white: WC call 

77 0182 10 

no LED module 

green: staff 1 

white: telephone call 

no LED module 

7 

77 0182 50 

red: calls 

no LED module 

no LED module 

no LED module 

1. 

1. 

2.


77 0180 10 

System EccoLine L200, NewLine L200: System CCS: 

Terminal L200 

77 0180 00 

77 0182 10 

00 8802 56, 10/11 (Rev. 2.0) 

0V 

RL 

AWL 

WCL 

COM 

L1 

L2 

L3 

L4 

LB1 

LB2 

ComTerminal 

System CCS: 

3 0V 

2 AW 

ComTerminal 

System Flamenco, EccoLine mit Sprechen, EccoLine L200: 

System Flamenco, EccoLine with speech, EccoLine L200: 

Steckvorrichtung ComStation 

(Bestell‐Nr. 74 0452 30) 

mit Anschluss einer ComStation BUS , 

EccoLine ComStation 

oder ComStation L200 

Connection socket ComStation 

(order no. 74 0452 30) 

with connection of a ComStation BUS , 

EccoLine ComStation 

or ComStation L200 

77 0182 10 

77 0182 50 

COM 

L1 

L2 

L3 

L4 

LB1 

LB2 

System Flamenco: 

Telefonanschaltrelais 

(Bestell‐Nr. 11 5350 00) 

Telephone interface relay 

(order no. 11 5350 00) 

0V 

C 

S 

WL 

0V 

C 

S 

HS 

WL 

COM 

L1 

L2 

L3 

L4 

LB1 

LB2 

COM 

L1 

L2 

L3 

L4 

LB1 

LB2 

System CONCENTO PLUS / Concento: 

Terminal / 

Displaymodul / 

RAB / 

System Flamenco: 

Steckvorrichtung ComStation PC 

(Bestell‐Nr. 74 0452 60A) 

mit Anschluss einer ComStation PC 

Connection socket ComStation PC 

(order no. 74 0452 60A) 

with connection of a ComStation PC 

14 

A1 

System Communicall Connect: 

+24VDC AUX NO 

PiperTerminal 

mit 24VDC-Zusatzstromversorgung 

Speech module 

with 24VDC additional power supply 

Page 94 

0 V 

COM 

L1 

L2 

L3 

L4 

LB1 

LB2 

COM 

L1 

L2 

L3 

L4 

LB1 

LB2 

GND 

RL 

AW 

WL 

0 V 

2 AW 

COM 

L1 

L2 

L3 

L4 

LB1 

LB2 

COM 

L1 

L2 

L3 

L4 

LB1 

LB2 


14.2 Switches 

70 0106 00 Pneumatic call switch 

70 0106 01 Pneumatic call switch/WC 

70 0111 00 Call switch wp 

70 0111 01 Call switch/WC wp 

70 0112 00 Staff presence switch wp 

70 0113 00 Cancel switch/WC wp 

70 0114 00 Code blue / cardiac alarm switch wp 

70 0115 00 Pull cord call switch wp 

70 0115 01 Pull cord call switch/WC wp 

70 0117 00 Call switch/WC with cancel switch wp 

70 0118 00 Call switch with privacy switch wp 

70 0119 00 Staff presence combination with call tone wp 

70 0183 00 Cancel switch/WC with call tone wp 


Page 95 




Pneumatischer Ruftaster, Best.‐Nr. 70 0106 00 

Taster zur Rufauslösung durch pneumatische Betätigung. Das integrierte Beruhigungslicht 

leuchtet auf, sobald ein Ruf ausgelöst wird. Vorzugsweise hergestellt für den Wandeinbau. 

Pneumatischer Ruftaster/WC, Best.‐Nr. 70 0106 01 

Wie Bestell‐Nr. 70 0106 00, jedoch für WC‐Ruf und WC‐Notruf. 

Hinweis! Die vollständige Installation des Systems ist im technischen Handbuch 

beschrieben. 

Achtung! Die Leiterplatte ist mit elektrostatisch gefährdeten Bauteilen bestückt. 



1* Einbaudose 

2 Klemmkralle 

3 Montagerahmen 



00 8800 22, 09/11 (Rev. 3.1) 

5 Leiterplatte (vormontiert) 

6 Tastergehäuse 

7 Luftschlauch 

8 Gummiball 

1. Angeschlossene Anschlussklemme 4 durch den Montagerahmen 3 ziehen. 

2. - Einbaudose Mauerwerk: Den Montagerahmen 3 mit der Klemmkralle 2 an der 

Einbaudose 1 befestigen (Mittenversatz!). 

- Einbaudose Hohlwand: Montagerahmen 3 an den Schraubpunkten der Einbaudose 1 

verschrauben (Mittenversatz!) 

3. Anschlussklemme 4 in die eingebaute Buchse der Leiterplatte 5 stecken. 

4. Tastergehäuse 6 über den Montagerahmen 3 drücken und einrasten lassen. 

5. Falls erforderlich: Den Luftschlauch 7 auf die gewünschte Länge kürzen und den 

Gummiball 8 wieder aufstecken. 

Pneumatic call switch, order no. 70 0106 00 

One call button with pneumatic function for call activation, complete with integrate reassurance 

lamp. Suitable for wall mounting. 

Pneumatic call switch/WC, order no. 70 0106 01 

As 70 0106 00, but for WC rooms. 


manual. 

Attention! The printed circuit board includes electrostatic sensitive components. 

Avoid touching. 

1* Back box 

2 Fixing clamp 

3 Mounting frame 

4* Connector (70 0807 00) 


5 Printed circuit board PCB (pre‐mounted) 

6 Switch housing 

7 Air tube 

8 Rubber ball 

1. Pull the cable‐connected connector 4 through the mounting frame 3. 

2. - Back box for solid walls: Use the fixing clamp 2 to fix the mounting frame 3 to the back 

box 1 (centre offset!). 

- Back box for partition walls: Screw the mounting frame 3 to the screw points of the 

back box 1 (centre offset!). 

3. Plug the connector 4 into the socket on the PCB 5. 

4. Push and lock in the switch housing 6 onto the mounting frame 3. 

5. If necessary, shorten the air tube to length and refit the rubber ball. 





R (ed) = +24 V rot 

B 

Y 

R 

from RAN user 

B (lack) = 0V 


R (ed) = +24 V 

B 

Y 

R 


Die Ruftaster können zur Bildung von Funktionseinheiten verschiedenen Kanälen 

If functional units are requested, the switches have to be assigned to different channels. 

zugeordnet werden. 


Die Kanalnummern werden an einer markierten Stelle auf der Leiterplatte (P1, P2, P3) breaking the links (cutter) or reconnecting (solder). The product is pre‐set on channel 0. 

durch Trennen (Messer) bzw. Verbinden (Löten) eingestellt. 




Beispiel Kanal 6: 



= 6 

= Lötpunkt 




= 6 





= getrennt 

= broken link 


1. Schraubendreher an der Rastnase ansetzen und Tastergehäuse abhebeln. 

2. Anschlussklemme 4 abziehen. 

3. Schraube am Montagerahmen 3 lösen. 

1 

2 

3 

70 0106 00 

Pneumatischer Ruftaster 

Pneumatic call switch 

4 

5 

7 

8 

6 

1. Using a screw driver, prize the switch cover from above away from the mounting frame. 

2. Remove the connector 4. 

3. Unscrew the mounting frame 3. 

Einbaudose Hohlwand (17 5100 00), 

Mittenversatz: 

Back box partition wall (17 5100 00), 

Centre offset: 

Page 96 

1 

3 

P1 P2 P3 

Kanalnummer 


= 0 

= 1 

= 2 

= 3 

= 4 

= 5 

= 6 

= 7 

70 0106 01 

Pneumatischer Ruftaster/WC 

Pneumatic call switch/WC



Ruftaster wg, Best.‐Nr. 70 0111 00 

Zwei rote Ruftasten mit gleicher Funktion zum Auslösen von Normalrufen oder Notrufen. 

Ruftaster/WC wg, Best.‐Nr. 70 0111 01 

Zwei rote Ruftasten mit gleicher Funktion zum Auslösen von WC‐Rufen oder WC‐Notrufen. 

Alarmtaster wg, Best.‐Nr. 70 0114 00 

Zwei blaue Alarmtasten zum Auslösen von Alarmen durch das Personal. Vor der 

Alarmauslösung muss die Schutzklappe nach oben geklappt werden. 


beschrieben. 




1* Einbaudose 




00 8802 00, 09/11 (Rev. 3.1) 

4 Tastergehäuse mit Leiterplatte (vormontiert) 

5 Schutzklappe (nur beim Alarmtaster) 

6 Klemmkralle (bei fehlender Schraubmöglichkeit) 


2. Montagerahmen 2 an den Schraubpunkten der Einbaudose 1 verschrauben. Bei 

fehlender Schraubmöglichkeit dient die Klemmkralle 6 zur Befestigung des 

Montagerahmens. Klemmkralle nicht für Hohlwanddosen geeignet. 

3. Anschlussklemme 3 in die eingebaute Buchse der Leiterplatte im Tastergehäuse 4 

stecken. 


5. Schutzklappe 5 (nur bei Alarmtaster) auf das Tastergehäuse setzen und an den oberen 

beiden Einkerbungen einrasten lassen. 

Call switch wp, order no. 70 0111 00 

Two red call buttons with identical function for raising normal calls or emergency calls. 

Call switch/WC wp, order no. 70 0111 01 

Two red call buttons with identical function for raising WC calls or WC emergency calls. 

Code blue/Cardiac alarm switch wp, order no. 70 0114 00 

Two blue code blue/cardiac alarm buttons with identical function for raising codes 

blue/cardiac alarms by the staff. Protection cover must be lift before pressing a button. 


manual. 



1* Back box 


3* Connector (70 0807 00) 


4 Switch housing with pre‐installed printed circuit board 

5 Protection cover (Code blue/Cardiac alarm switch only) 

6 Fixing clamp (if screw fixing is not possible) 


2. Screw the mounting frame 2 to the back box 1. If screw fixing is not possible, use the 

fixing clamp 6 to fix the mounting frame to the box. The fixing clamp cannot be used 

with back boxes for partition walls. 

3. Plug the connector 3 into the socket on the printed circuit board within the switch 

housing 4 . 


5. Fit the protection cover 5 (only relevant to code blue/cardiac alarm switch) over the 

switch housing and lock in the upper notches. 





R (ed) = +24 V rot 

B 

Y 

R 

from RAN user 

B (lack) = 0V 


R (ed) = +24 V 

B 

Y 

R 


Nur wenn die Bildung von Funktionseinheiten gewünscht ist, müssen die Taster 

verschiedenen Kanälen zugeordnet werden. Hierzu muss die Leiterplatte im Tastergehäuse 

4 freigelegt werden. 

Zum Freilegen der Leiterplatte die Rasthaken der Kunststoffkappe einzeln vorsichtig 

lösen. 

Die Kanalnummern werden an einer markierten Stelle auf der Leiterplatte (P1, P2, P3) 

durch Trennen (Messer) bzw. Verbinden (Löten) eingestellt. Werkseitig ist immer die 

Kanalnummer 0 eingestellt. 

Die einzustellende Kanalnummer entnehmen Sie dem Installationsplan. 



= 6 


= getrennt 

= Lötpunkt 



Only if functional units are requested, the switches have to be assigned to different 

channels. For this the printed circuit board (PCB) within the switch housing 4 must be 

exposed. 

To expose the PCB, carefully unlock each locking nose separately from the plastic 

cover. 






= 6 


= broken link 


1. Schraubendreher an einer der beiden Rastnasen ansetzen und Tastergehäuse 

abheben. 


3. Schrauben am Montagerahmen 2 lösen. 

1 

6 

70 0111 00 

Ruftaster wg 

Call switch wp 

2 

3 

4 

5 



1. Using a screw driver, prize the switch cover from above or below away from the 

mounting frame. 


3. Unscrew the mounting frame 2 . 

P1 P2 P3 

= 0 

= 1 

= 2 

= 3 

= 4 

= 5 

= 6 

= 7 

Kanalnummer 


70 0111 01 

70 0114 00 

Ruftaster/WC wg 

Alarmtaster wg 

rot / red 


rot / red 

Code blue/Cardiac alarm switch wp 

blau / blue 

Page 97



Anwesenheitstaster wg, Best.‐Nr. 70 0112 00 

Zwei verschiedene Anwesenheitstasten zum Ein‐ und Ausschalten der 

Personalanwesenheit von zwei verschiedenen Personalgruppen. 

Grün: Anwesenheit 1, Gelb: Anwesenheit 2 

Abstelltaster/WC wg, Best.‐Nr. 70 0113 00 

Zwei graue Abstelltasten mit gleicher Funktion zur lokalen Abstellung von WC‐Rufen oder 

WC‐Notrufen. Vorzugsweise zur Abstellung von Rufen aus WC‐Räumen, die 

Patientenzimmern zugeordnet sind. 






1* Einbaudose 



00 8802 01, 09/11 (Rev. 3.1) 


5 Klemmkralle (bei fehlender Schraubmöglichkeit) 






3. Anschlussklemme 3 in die eingebaute Buchse der Leiterplatte im Tastergehäuse 4 

stecken. 


Staff presence switch wp, order no. 70 0112 00 

Two different presence buttons for activating and deactivating staff presence of two different 

staff groups. 

Green: Staff presence 1, Yellow: Staff presence two 

Cancel switch/WC wp, order no. 70 0113 00 

Two grey cancel buttons with identical function for locally cancelling WC calls or WC 

emergency calls. Preferably for calls from WC rooms en‐suite to a patient room. 


manual. 



1* Back box 


3* Connector (70 0807 00) 





2. Screw the mounting frame 2 to the back box 1. 

If screw fixing is not possible, use the fixing clamp 5 to fix the mounting frame to the 

box. The fixing clamp cannot be used with back boxes for partition walls. 

3. Plug the connector 3 into the socket on the printed circuit board within the switch 

housing 4. 






R (ed) = +24 V rot 

B 

Y 

R 

from RAN user 

B (lack) = 0V 


R (ed) = +24 V 

B 

Y 

R 


Nur wenn die Bildung von Funktionseinheiten gewünscht ist, müssen die Taster verschiede‐ 

nen Kanälen zugeordnet werden. Hierzu muss die Leiterplatte im Tastergehäuse 4 freige‐ 

legt werden. 


lösen. 







= 6 


= getrennt 

= Lötpunkt 





exposed. 


cover. 






= 6 


= broken link 



abheben. 



1 

5 

70 0112 00 

Anwesenheitstaster wg 

Staff presence switch wp 

2 

3 

4 

grün / green 

gelb / yellow 

Page 98 







P1 P2 P3 

70 0113 00 

Abstelltaster/WC wg 

Cancel switch/WC wp 

= 0 

= 1 

= 2 

= 3 

= 4 

= 5 

= 6 

= 7 

Kanalnummer 


grau / grey



Rufzugtaster wg, Best.‐Nr. 70 0115 00 

Taster zur Rufauslösung durch Tast- oder Zugbetätigung. 

Rufzugtaster/WC wg, Best.‐Nr. 70 0115 01 

wie 70 0115 00, jedoch für WC-Rufe bzw. WC-Notrufe. 





00 8802 04, 06/06 (Rev. 3.0) 

Pull cord call switch wp, order no. 70 0115 00 

One call button as well as a pull cord for raising a call. 

Pull cord call switch/WC wp, order no. 70 0115 01 

as 70 0115 00, but for WC calls or WC emergency calls. 


manual. 



Wandmontage / Deckenmontage Wall installation / Ceiling installation 

Wandmontage: siehe Abbildung A1. 

Wall installation: Refer to figure A1. 

Deckenmontage: ACHTUNG: Die Rufschnur muss von der Zugtaster‐Haube 6 in Richtung Ceiling installation: ATTENTION: The pull cord has to be pulled away from the pull cord 

des Tastergehäuses 5 gezogen werden. Eine andere Zugrichtung verhindert die 

switch bonnet 6 into the direction of the switch housing 5. Another pull direction prevents a 

Rufauslösung (Abbildung A3). Achten Sie deshalb darauf, dass die Zugtaster‐Haube von call activation (figure A3). Therefore pay attention, that the pull cord bonnet is turned away 

der Zugrichtung (z.B. Badewanne) abgewandt ist (Abbildung A2). 

from the pull direction (eg. bathtub) (figure A2). 

Wenn eine Raumwand in der Nähe ist, richten Sie die Zugtaster‐Haube 6 in Richtung der If a room wall is near, turn the pull cord switch bonnet 6 into the direction of the wall. Then 

Wand aus. Das Tastergehäuse 5 ist dann von der Wand abgewandt. Eine problemlose 

Rufauslösung ist gewährleistet. 

the switch housing 5 is turned away from the wall. A correct call activation is guaranteed. 


1* Einbaudose 

2 Zugtaster-Basis 




6 Zugtaster-Haube 

7 Rufschnur 

8 Rufgriff * nicht im Lieferumfang enthalten. 

1. Angeschlossene Anschlussklemme 4 durch die Zugtaster‐Basis 2 und den 

Montagerahmen 3 ziehen. 

Einbaurichtung von Zugtaster‐Basis und Montagerahmen beachten, siehe Abbildung B! 

2. Montagerahmen 3 auf die Zugtaster‐Basis 2 drücken. 

3. Zugtaster‐Basis 2 inkl. Montagerahmen 3 mit vier Schrauben und Dübeln an die Wand 

schrauben. Eine Befestigung in der Einbaudose ist nicht ausreichend! 

4. Anschlussklemme 4 in die eingebaute Buchse am Taster 5 stecken. 

5. Tastergehäuse 5 auf den Montagerahmen 3 drücken, bis es einrastet. 

Einbaurichtung beachten! Das heißt, Symbole korrekt orientieren. 

6. Die Zugtaster‐Haube 6 von oben auf den Taster schieben, bis sie einrastet. 

7. Die Rufschnur 7 auf die gewünschte Länge kürzen und im Rufgriff 8 neu verknoten. 

1* Back box 

2 Pull cord switch base 


4* Connector (70 0807 00) 

5 Switch housing with pre‐installed PCB 

6 Pull cord switch bonnet 

7 Pull cord 

8 Red cord grip * not included in product delivery. 

1. Pull the pre‐assembled connector 4 through the pull cord switch base 2 and the 

mounting frame 3. Take into account the correct orientation of the pull cord switch base 

and of the mounting frame as shown in figure B! 

2. Press the mounting frame 3 onto the pull cord switch base 2. 

3. Screw the pull cord switch base 2 incl. the mounting frame 3 on the wall using four 

screws and dowels. A fixing onto the back box is not stable enough! 

4. Plug the connector 4 into the socket on the switch housing 5. 


Note the orientation! I.e. place the symbols in the correct direction. 

6. Push and lock the pull cord switch bonnet 6 from above onto the switch. 

7. If needed, shorten the cord 7 to length and fix the grip 8 by tying a knot accordingly. 




B 


Y 

R (ed) = +24 V rot 

R 

from RAN user 




5 freigelegt werden. Zum Freilegen der Leiterplatte die Rasthaken der Kunststoffkappe 

einzeln vorsichtig lösen. Die Kanalnummern werden an einer markierten Stelle auf der 






= 6 


= getrennt 

= Lötpunkt 



B(lack) = 0V 

Y(ellow) = RAN 

R(ed) = +24 V 

Only if functional units are requested, the call switches have to be assigned to different chan‐ 

nels. For this the printed circuit board (PCB) within the switch housing 5 must be exposed. To 

expose the PCB, carefully unlock each locking nose separately from the plastic cover. The 

channel number is configured at the position marked on the PCB (P1, P2, P3) by breaking the 

links (cutter) or reconnecting (solder). The product is pre‐set on channel 0. 

For the channel number to be set, please refer to the appropriate installation drawing. 



= 6 


= broken link 

B 

Y 

R 




1. Zugtaster‐Haube 6 nach oben abschieben. Zum Lösen des Scharniers evtl. von unten 1. Remove up the pull cord switch bonnet 6. To release the hinges you may beat lateral 

seitlich gegen die Zugtaster‐Haube schlagen. 

from below against the pull cord switch bonnet. 

2. Tastergehäuse 5 mit Schraubendreher vom Montagerahmen 3 abhebeln. 

2. Using a screw driver, lift the switch housing 5 from the mounting frame 3. 



4. Befestigungsschrauben von Montagerahmen 3 und Zugtaster‐Basis 2 lösen. 

4. Unscrew the fixing screws from the mounting frame 3 and the pull cord switch base 2. 

5. Montagerahmen 3 von Zugtaster‐Basis 2 abheben. 

5. Lift the mounting frame 3 from the pull cord switch base 2. 

Ï 

Ï 

Ï 

Ï 

ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ 

6 

7 

5 

ÀÀ 

Ï ÀÀÀ ÀÀ 

ÀÀÀ 

A1 A2 

A3 

70 0115 00 

Rufzugtaster wg 

Pull cord call switch wp 

6 5 

7 

Verboten! 

Forbidden! 

70 0115 01 

Rufzugtaster/WC wg 


1 

2 

6 

Page 99 

3 

5 

7 

4 

8 

P1 P2 P3 

0 = 

1 = 

2 = 

3 = 

4 = 

5 = 

6 = 

7 = 

Kanalnummer 

Channel number



Ruftaster/WC mit Abstelltaste wg, Best.‐Nr. 70 0117 00 

Rote Ruftaste und graue Abstelltaste zum Auslösen und Abstellen von WC-Rufen und 

WC-Notrufen. Ruftaste mit Beruhigungslicht und Findelicht. 

Ruftaster mit Privattaste wg, Best.‐Nr. 70 0118 00 

Rote Ruftaste mit Beruhigungslicht und Findelicht zur Rufauslösung. Graue Privattaste zur 

lokalen Schaltung der Mithörsperre. 





00 8802 02, 09/11 (Rev. 3.1) 

Call switch/WC with cancel switch wp, order no. 70 0117 00 

Red call button and grey cancel button for raising and cancelling WC calls and WC 

emergency calls. Call button with reassurance light and location light. 

Call switch with privacy switch, order no. 70 0118 00 

Red call button with reassurance light and location light for raising calls. Grey privacy 

button for local switching of privacy. 


manual. 




1* Einbaudose 

4 Tastergehäuse mit Leiterplatte (vormontiert) 1* Back box 



5 Klemmkralle (bei fehlender Schraubmöglichkeit) 2 Mounting frame 



3* Connector (70 0807 00) 











3. Anschlussklemme 3 in die eingebaute Buchse der Leiterplatte im Tastergehäuse 4 3. Plug the connector 3 into the socket on the printed circuit board within the switch 

stecken. 

housing 4. 







R (ed) = +24 V rot 

B 

Y 

R 

from RAN user 

B (lack) = 0V 


R (ed) = +24 V 

B 

Y 

R 






lösen. 







= 6 


= getrennt 

= Lötpunkt 





exposed. 


cover. 






= 6 


= broken link 



abheben. 



1 

5 

70 0117 00 

Ruftaster/WC mit Abstelltaste wg 

Call switch/WC with cancel switch wp 

2 

3 

4 

rot / red 

grau / grey 

Page 100 







P1 P2 P3 

= 0 

= 1 

= 2 

= 3 

= 4 

= 5 

= 6 

= 7 

Kanalnummer 


70 0118 00 

Ruftaster mit Privattaste wg 

Call switch with privacy switch wp 

rot / red 

grau / grey



Anwesenheits‐Kombination mit Rufton wg, Best.‐Nr. 70 0119 00 

Grüne Anwesenheitstaste mit integriertem Erinnerungslicht zum Ein‐ und Ausschalten der 

Personalanwesenheit. Rote Ruftaste mit Beruhigungslicht und Findelicht zum Auslösen von 

Rufen. Signalgeber zur akustischen Signalisierung nachgesendeter Rufe. 

Abstelltaster/WC mit Rufton wg, Best.‐Nr. 70 0183 00 

Zwei graue Abstelltasten mit integriertem Erinnerungslicht zur lokalen Abstellung von 

WC‐Rufen und WC‐Notrufen. Signalgeber zur akustischen Signalisierung nachgesendeter 

Rufe. Vorzugsweise zur separaten Abstellung von Rufen aus WC-Räumen, die Patienten‐ 

zimmern zugeordnet sind. 





00 8802 03, 09/11 (Rev. 3.1) 

Staff presence combination with call tone wp, order no. 70 0119 00 

Green presence button with integrated reminder light for activating and deactivating of staff 

presence. Red call button with reassurance light and location light for raising calls. Tone 

generator for acoustic signalling of forwarded calls. 

Cancel switch/WC with call tone, order no. 70 0183 00 

Two grey cancel buttons with integrated reminder light for local cancelling of WC calls and 

WC emergency calls. Tone generator for acoustic signalling of forwarded calls. Preferably 

for cancelling of calls in WC rooms en-suite to a patient room. 


manual. 




1* Einbaudose 

4 Tastergehäuse mit Leiterplatte (vormontiert) 1* Back box 



5 Klemmkralle (bei fehlender Schraubmöglichkeit) 2 Mounting frame 



3* Connector (70 0807 00) 











3. Anschlussklemme 3 in die eingebaute Buchse der Leiterplatte im Tastergehäuse 4 3. Plug the connector 3 into the socket on the printed circuit board within the switch 

stecken. 

housing 4. 







R (ed) = +24 V rot 

B 

Y 

R 

from RAN user 

B (lack) = 0V 


R (ed) = +24 V 

B 

Y 

R 






lösen. 







= 6 


= getrennt 

= Lötpunkt 





exposed. 


cover. 






= 6 


= broken link 



abheben. 



1 

5 

2 

70 0119 00 

Anwesenheits-Kombination mit Rufton wg 

Staff presence combination with call tone wp 

3 

4 







P1 P2 P3 

= 0 

= 1 

= 2 

= 3 

= 4 

= 5 

= 6 

= 7 

Kanalnummer 


grün / green 70 0183 00 

Abstelltaster/WC mit Rufton wg 

rot / red grau / grey 

Cancel switch/WC with call tone wp 

Page 101


Page 102 


14.3 Room terminals 


77 0520 00 RoomTerminal Flamenco 


77 0551 00 ControlTerminal with doorplate Flamenco 


Page 103 




ComTerminal Flamenco, Best.‐Nr. 77 0510 00 

Universelles Kommunikationsterminal in Gegensprechtechnik inkl. roter Ruftaste, blauer 

Alarmtaste, grüner Anwesenheitstaste (AW1), gelber Anwesenheitstaste (AW2), 

4 Funktionstasten mit situationsabhängiger Belegung, Mikrofon und Lautsprecher. 

120 mm 

120 mm 



Vorsicht! Die Leiterplatte ist mit elektrostatisch gefährdeten Bauteilen bestückt. 


Vorsicht! Lassen Sie das Terminal‐Frontteil nicht auf eine harte Oberfläche fallen 

und setzen es auch nicht einem beträchtlichen Druck oder Stoß aus. Die 

Bedienfront des ComTerminals besteht aus Glas und kann brechen. 

Montage der Terminal‐Rückwand Mounting pattress 

00 8802 97, 09/09 (Rev. 1.3) 

Beachten Sie beim Setzen der Einbaudosen den Platzbedarf 

des ComTerminals. Vom Mittelpunkt der Dose muss nach oben 

und unten ein Platzbedarf von mindestens 120 mm vorgesehen 

werden. 

1. Anschlussleitungen durch den Ausbruch in der Terminal‐Rückwand 2 führen. 

2. Terminal‐Rückwand 2 mit den Schrauben 1 der Einbaudose auf der Einbaudose 

festschrauben. Vorsicht! Die 2 Leitungen 3 zu den Lautsprechern 4 nicht abziehen. 

Hinweis! Wenn die Montage auf einer Einbaudose nicht möglich ist, kann das ComTerminal 

mit Schrauben und Dübeln an der Wand befestigt werden, wobei dieselben Bohrungen in 

der Terminal‐Rückwand benutzt werden. 

Anschließend Anschlussleitungen von Gruppenbus OSYnet und Zimmerbus RAN am 

Anschlussfeld der Terminal‐Rückwand 2 gemäß dem Anschlussplan anschließen (siehe 

Seite “Anschlüsse”). 

ComTerminal Flamenco, order no. 77 0510 00 

Universal communication terminal with two-way speech communication, incl. red call 

button, blue code blue/cardiac alarm button, green presence button (staff 1), yellow 

presence button (staff 2), 4 function keys as soft keys, microphone and loudspeakers. 

120 mm 

120 mm 

Montage des Terminal‐Frontteils Mounting front panel 

1. Flachkabel 7 des Terminal‐Frontteils 6 in die zugehörige Buchse auf der 

Terminal‐Rückwand 2 stecken. 

2. Terminal-Frontteil 6 oben auf die Terminal-Rückwand 2 aufsetzen, so dass ein Scharnier 

8 entsteht. Anschließend das Terminal-Frontteil mit leichten Druck (Glasbruchgefahr!) 

auf die Terminal-Rückwand herunterdrücken, bis die Rastnase 9 einrastet. Dabei darauf 

achten, dass das Flachkabel 7 nicht eingeklemmt wird. 

3. Zur Sicherung kann eine Sicherungsschraube 10 unten in die Bohrung unterhalb der 

gelben Anwesenheitstaste eingeschraubt werden. 

Abschließend muss das ComTerminal konfiguriert werden (siehe S. “Konfigurationsanleitung”). 


1. Falls eine Sicherungsschraube 10 unten am ComTerminal eingeschraubt ist, die 

Schraube lösen. 

2. Mit dem Schraubendreher Rastnase 9 vorsichtig nach oben drücken, bis sich das 

Terminal-Frontteil 6 löst. 

3. Das Terminal-Frontteil 6 nach unten abnehmen. 

4. Stecker des Flachkabels 7 von Terminal‐Rückwand 2 abziehen. 

5. Terminal‐Frontteil 6 geschützt ablegen. Vorsicht: Elektrostatisch gefährdete Bauteile! 

Vorsicht: Glas! 

1 

1* Vier Schrauben der Einbaudose 

2 Terminal‐Rückwand 

3 Zwei Anschlussleitungen 

zu den Lautsprechern 

4 Zwei Lautsprecher 

5* Einbaudose 

4 

3 

2 

6 Terminal‐Frontteil 

7 Flachkabel 

8 Scharnier 

9 Rastnase 

10 Sicherungsschraube (optional) 

* ist nicht im Lieferumfang enthalten 

5 

77 0510 00 

ComTerminal Flamenco ® 

9 

Page 104 


manual. 

Caution! The printed circuit board includes electrostatic sensitive components. 


Caution! The operating front cover of the ComTerminal is made of glass. Handle 

with care! The glass could break if it is dropped on a hard surface or receives a 

substantial impact. 

When installing the back box consider the space required for the 

complete ComTerminal. Measuring from the centre of the box, the 

available space must be at least 120 mm above and below. 

1. Insert the connection cables through the outlet in the pattress 2. 

2. Fix the pattress 2 using the back box screws 1 to the back box. Caution! Do not 

disconnect the wire connections 3 to the loudspeakers 4. 

Note! If mounting on a back box is not possible, the ComTerminal may be fixed to the wall 

with dowels and screws using the same holes in the pattress. 

Afterwards the connection cables to the group bus OSYnet and to the room bus RAN have 

to be connected to the connection field in the pattress 2 according to the connection plan 

(see page “Connections”). 

1. Plug the flat cable 7 of the front panel 6 into the appropriate socket on the connection 

field in the pattress 2. 

2. Place front panel 6 onto the top of the pattress 2 creating a hinge 8. Now press the front 

panel downwards onto the pattress with low pressing power (glass!) until the catch 9 

engages. Make sure that the flat cable 7 is not pinched. 

3. For improved security a security screw 10 can be fitted into the hole below the yellow 

presence button. 

Finally the ComTerminal has to be configured (see page “Configuration Instructions”). 

1. If a security screw 10 is fitted into the base of the ComTerminal, remove it. 

2. Use a screwdriver to push the catch 9 upwards until the front panel 6 looses. 

3. Remove the front panel 6. 

4. Disconnect the flat cable 7 from the pattress 2. 

5. Lay down the front panel 6 protected. Caution: Electrostatic sensitive components! 

Caution: Glass! 

1* Four back box screws 

2 Pattress 

3 Two connections to the two loudspeakers 

4 Two loudspeakers 

5* Back box 

205 mm 

110 mm 

7 

8 

Funktionstasten 

Function keys 

2 

6 

10 

8 

9 

6 Front panel 

7 Flat cable 

8 Hinge 

9 Catch 

10 Security screw (option) 

* not included 

2


ComTerminal Flamenco, Best.‐Nr. 77 0510 00 

Wichtige Hinweise 

Leiterquerschnitte: 0,2 ‐ 2,5 mm 2 

Alle Leitungen für die Sprachübertragung (geschirmte Leitungen) dürfen maximal 30 mm 

abgemantelt werden, damit die Schirmfunktion erhalten bleibt. 

Zur Vermeidung von Kurzschlüssen den Beidraht (SCH‐B) isolieren. 

Schraubendreherklinge: 0,6 x 3,5 mm 

Abisolierlänge der Drähte: 6 mm 

Bei kleinen Leitungsquerschnitten mehrere Leiter pro Klemme möglich. 

Gruppenbus (OSYnet) Zimmerbus (RAN) 

Power 

Spannungsversorgung 

Kabel: NYM 2x2,5 mm 2 

Zimmerbus (RAN) 

mit Sprechen 

(max. 2 Anschlüsse) 

Kabel: CCS32‐Kabel 

00 8802 97, 09/09 (Rev. 1.3) 

+24 V 

0 V 

Zimmerbus (RAN) +24 V - Si 

mit Sprechen 


Kabel: 2x IY(ST)Y 2x2x0,8 

RAN 

0V 

0V 

RAN 

LS 

MIC 

SCH B 


ohne Sprechen 

+24 V - Si 

(max. 4 Anschlüsse) RAN 

Kabel: IY(ST)Y 2x2x0,8 

0V 

Gruppenbus OSYnet 

Kabel: CAT5‐Kabel 



77 0510 00 

ComTerminal Flamenco ® 

LS 

MIC 

SCH B 

+24 V - Si 

D‐L 

D‐H 

D‐G 

NF 1a 

NF 1b 

NF 2a 

NF 2b 

D‐L 

D‐H 

D‐G 

NF 1a 

NF 1b 

NF 2a 

NF 2b 

}{ 

rt 

ge 

sw 

ws 

ge 

ws 

sw 

rt 

br 

sw 

gr 

ws 

bl 

rt 

ge 

sw 

ws 

ws-bl 

bl 

ws-gn 

gn 

br 

ws-br 

or 

ws-or 

vom letzten Zimmer oder 

zum nächsten Zimmer 

zur Steckvorrichtung 

Kombi oder Kombi Kanal 

zur Steckvorrichtung 

Kombi oder Kombi Kanal 


vom vorigen Zimmer 

oder zum nächsten Zimmer 

ComTerminal Flamenco, order no. 77 0510 00 

Important notes 

Wire cross‐sections: 0.2 - 2.5 mm 2 

All cables for speech transmission (shielded cables) may be only be stripped to a maxi‐ 

mum of 30 mm to maintain the shielding function. 

Insulate the shield wire (SCH‐B) to prevent short circuiting. 

Screwdriver blade: 0.6 x 3.5 mm 

Strip wire to 6 mm. 

For smaller wire cross sections more than one wire may be inserted in one connection 

terminal. 

Power supply 

Cable: NYM 2x2.5 mm 2 

Room bus (RAN) 

with speech 

(max. 2 connections) 

Cable: 2x IY(ST)Y 2x2x0.8 


with speech 


Cable: CCS32‐Kabel 


without speech 


Cable: IY(ST)Y 2x2x0.8 

Group bus (OSYnet) 

Cable: CAT5 cable 

+24 V - Si 

RAN 

0V 

LS 

MIC 

SCH B 

+24 V - Si 

0V 

RAN 

LS 

MIC 

SCH B 

+24 V 

+24 V - Si 

RAN 

0V 

D‐L 

D‐H 

NF 1a 

NF 1b 

NF 2a 

NF 2b 

rt 

bl 

gn 



D‐L 

D‐H 

ws 



D‐G 

br 

NF 1a 

ws 

NF 1b 

ge 

NF 2a 

ws NF 2b 

Anschlussfeld (Schraubklemmen) 

Connection field (screw clamps) 

Room bus (RAN) Power 


Spannungs‐ 

versorgung 

Power supply 

Gruppenbus 

Group bus 

OSYnet 

Zimmerbus 

Room bus 

RAN 

Lautsprecher‐Anschluss 

Connection to 

loudspeakers 

Page 105 

Nicht benutzen! 

Don't use! 

D‐G 

0 V 

}{ 

brown 

black 

grey 

white 

blue 

shield 

red 

yellow 

black 

white 

white-blue 

blue 

white-green 

green 

brown 

white-brown 

orange 

white-orange 

red 

blue 

green 

white 

brown 

white 

yellow 

white 

red 

yellow 

black 

white 

yellow 

white 

black 

red 

from previous room 

or to next room 

to connection socket 

combi or 


to connection socket 

combi or 


from RAN user 







Konfigurationsanleitung - Seite 1 D Configuration Instructions - Page 1 GB 

ComTerminal Flamenco, Best.‐Nr. 77 0510 00 ComTerminal Flamenco, order no. 77 0510 00 

1. Konfigurationsmenü starten 1. Start configuration menu 

Funktionstaste ganz links und Funktionstaste ganz rechts gleichzeitig so lange (3 Sek.) 

gedrückt halten, bis das Konfigurationsmenü im Display erscheint. 

Symbole im Konfigurationsmenü: 

= Kreistaste = Markierten Menüpunkt einstellen (und speichern) 

= Pfeiltaste nach oben = In der Liste nach oben wandern 

= Pfeiltaste nach unten = In der Liste nach unten wandern 

= Haustaste = Abbrechen, d.h. zur höheren Menüebene 

zurückkehren ohne zu speichern. 

00 8802 97, 09/09 (Rev. 1.3) 


Menüpunkt Bedeutung 

Sprache Sprache der Displaytexte einstellen, z.B. Deutsch oder Englisch. 

Raumtyp Raumtyp einstellen, z.B. Patientenzimmer. 

RAN RAN Anzahl: Anzahl Zimmergeräte (= RAN Anzahl) einstellen. 

Test RAN: Test, ob Zimmergeräte funktionsbereit sind und korrekt am RAN 

angeschlossen sind. 

Status: Prüfung, ob eingestellte RAN Anzahl mit Anzahl funktionsbereiter 

Zimmergeräte übereinstimmt. 

Adresse Zimmer‐Adresse einstellen (1 bis 110 einstellbar) 

Reinigungszeit Sekunden einstellen, die benötigt werden um die Front des ComTerminals 

abzuwischen 

Kontrast Kontrast des ComTerminal‐Displays auf hoch oder niedrig einstellen 

Tastenton Ton bei Drücken der Tasten am ComTerminal ein‐ oder ausschalten 

Info Version der Software im ComTerminal anzeigen lassen. 

Audio Test Menüpunkt nur zur Verwendung durch Tunstall‐Techniker 

Tastenfunktion Funktion der Alarmtaste und der Anwesenheitstasten am ComTerminal 

ein‐ oder ausschalten (Ein = Standardeinstellung) 

Reset Verwendung nur durch Tunstall‐Techniker. (ComTerminal neu starten) 

Press the left and right function keys simultaneously (3 sec.) until the configuration 

menu is shown in the display. 

Function keys 

Symbols in the configuration menu: 

= Circle key = Set (and store) marked menu item 

= Upwards arrow key = Scroll upwards through the list 

= Downwards arrow key = Scroll downwards through the list 

= Home key = Cancel, go back to the higher menu level 

without storing 

Menu Item Meaning 

Language Selecting the user language (e.g. English or German). 

Room type Selecting the room type (e.g. Patient room). 

RAN RAN number: Setting of number of room devices (= RAN number). 

Test RAN: Test if room devices are ready to operate and if they are 

correctly connected to the RAN. 

Status: Check whether the stored RAN number is equal to the number 

of operational room devices. 

Address Setting of room address (1 until 110 available) 

Cleaning time Setting the time (seconds) how long it takes to clean (wipe) the front 

of the ComTerminal 

Contrast Setting the display contrast to “high” or “low”. 

Key sound Switching the key sound on or off (on = recommended) 

Info Displaying the ComTerminal's software version. 

Audio Test Function use only for Tunstall technicians. 

Key Function Switching on or of the function of Alarm Key, Presence Key 1 and 

Presence Key 2 (On = standard setting). 

Reset Function use only for Tunstall technicians. (Restart the ComTerminal) 

2. Zwingend erforderliche Einstellungen 2. Entering of necessary settings 

Sprache einstellen (wenn Menüpunkt vorhanden) 

Mit den Pfeiltasten “Sprache” markieren; dann Kreistaste drücken. 

Mit den Pfeiltasten gewünschte Sprache markieren: D = Deutsch, GB = Englisch, E = 

Spanisch, F = Französisch, NL = Niederländisch, I = Italienisch. “Selbstdefiniert” = eine 

weitere Sprache, wenn diese mit der SystemOrganizer‐Software hinterlegt wurde. 

Kreistaste drücken, um markierte Sprache zu speichern. 

Raumtyp einstellen 

Mit den Pfeiltasten “Raumtyp” markieren; dann Kreistaste drücken. 

Mit den Pfeiltasten gewünschten Raumtyp markieren: 

- Patientenzimmer 

- Patientenzimmer mit Abstelltaste für WC-Ruf im ComTerminal 

- Dienstzimmer (Notrufe werden als Normalrufe signalisiert) 

- Kinderzimmer (Keine Taste zum Einschalten der Mithörsperre im ComTerminal, 

Mithörsperre AUS) 

- Anschlussterminal (Tasten und Display im ComTerminal außer Betrieb) 

Kreistaste drücken, um markierten Raumtyp zu speichern. 

RAN Anzahl einstellen (0 - 30) 

RAN Anzahl = Anzahl Zimmergeräte (Taster, Steckvorrichtungen, Zimmerleuchten etc.), die 

am ComTerminal über RAN angeschlossen sind (Kein Birntaster, keine PBK Hand). 

Achtung, Ausnahme! Eine 4‐teilige Zimmerleuchte (Best.‐Nr. 77 0170 10 oder 77 0171 10) 

gilt als zwei Zimmergeräte. 

Mit den Pfeiltasten “RAN” markieren; dann Kreistaste drücken. 

Mit den Pfeiltasten “RAN Anzahl” markieren; dann Kreistaste drücken. 

Mit den Pfeiltasten RAN‐Anzahl des Zimmers markieren. 

Kreistaste drücken, um die markierte RAN‐Anzahl zu speichern. 

Zimmer-Adresse einstellen (1 - 110) 

Mit den Pfeiltasten “Adresse” markieren; dann Kreistaste drücken. 

Mit den Pfeiltasten gewünschte Adresse markieren. 

Kreistaste drücken, um die markierte Adresse zu speichern. 

Selecting the user language (if the menu item is available) 

Mark ”Language” using the arrow keys. Then press the circle key. 

Mark the desired language using the arrow keys: D = German; GB = English; E = Spa‐ 

nish; F = French; NL = Dutch; I = Italian. “Custom” = another language, if this is stored 

using the SystemOrganizer software. 

Press the circle key to store the marked language. 

Selecting the room type 

Mark “Room type” using the arrow keys. Then press the circle key. 

Mark the desired room type using the arrow keys: 

- Patient room 

- Patient room with cancel key for WC call at ComTerminal 

- Staff room (emergency calls are signalled as normal calls) 

- Children's room (no key to switch the privacy function at ComTerminal, Privacy OFF) 

- Connection terminal (keys and display at ComTerminal non-operational) 

Press the circle key to store the marked room type. 

Setting of RAN number (0 - 30) (Room Area Network) 

RAN number = Number of devices in the room (switches, connection sockets, room lamps, 

etc.) which are connected to the ComTerminal via RAN. (No pear push switch, no patient 

handset). Attention, exception! One room lamp with 4 sections (order no. 77 0170 10 or 77 

0171 10) is equivalent to two room devices. 

Mark “RAN” using the arrow keys. Then press the circle key. 

Mark “RAN number” using the arrow keys. Then press the circle key. 

Mark the desired room number for the room using the arrow keys. 

Press the circle key to store the marked address. 

Setting of room address (1 - 110) 

Mark “Address” using the arrow keys. Then press the circle key. 

Mark the desired room address using the arrow keys. 


2. Optionale Einstellungen (Teil 1) bei Bedarf vornehmen 2. Entering of optional settings (section 1) 

Reinigungszeit einstellen (10 – 30 Sekunden) 

Die Reinigungszeit legt fest, wie lange die Tasten des ComTerminals außer Funktion sind, 

nachdem die Taste Clean gedrückt wurde (Zeit zum Abwischen der Bedienfront). 

Mit den Pfeiltasten “Reinigungszeit” markieren; dann Kreistaste drücken. 

Mit den Pfeiltasten gewünschte Reinigungszeit (in Sekunden) markieren. 

Kreistaste drücken, um markierte Reinigungszeit zu speichern. 

Kontrast des ComTerminal‐Displays einstellen (hoch, niedrig) 

Je nach Umgebungslicht ist die Einstellung “hoch” oder “niedrig” besser lesbar. 

Mit den Pfeiltasten “Kontrast” markieren; dann Kreistaste drücken. 

Mit den Pfeiltasten “hoch” oder “niedrig” markieren. 

Kreistaste drücken, um markierten Kontrast zu speichern. 

Tastenton ausschalten / einschalten 

Auf Wunsch kann der Tastenton der ComTerminal‐Tasten ausgeschaltet werden. Die 

Einstellung “Tastenton Ein” wird jedoch empfohlen. 

Mit den Pfeiltasten “Tastenton” markieren; dann Kreistaste drücken. 

Mit den Pfeiltasten “Ein” oder “Aus” markieren. 

Kreistaste drücken, um die markierte Auswahl zu speichern. 

Page 106 

Setting of cleaning time (10 – 30 seconds) 

The cleaning time defines how long the ComTerminal keys are not operational after the 

Clean key has been pressed (time for wiping the front). 

Mark “Cleaning time” using the arrow keys. Then press the circle key. 

Mark the desired cleaning time using the arrow keys. 

Press the circle key to store the marked cleaning time. 

Setting of display contrast (high, low) 

Depending on the ambient light a high or low display contrast is better legible. 

Mark “Contrast” using the arrow keys. Then press the circle key. 

Mark “high” or “low” using the arrow keys. 

Press the circle key to store the marked selection. 

Switching the key sound off or on 

If required the ComTerminal key sound can be switched off. But the setting “Key sound On” 

is recommended. 

Mark “Key Sound” using the arrow keys. Then press the circle key. 

Mark “On” or “Off” using the arrow keys. 

Press the circle key to store the marked selection.


ComTerminal Flamenco, Best.‐Nr. 77 0510 00 ComTerminal Flamenco, order no. 77 0510 00 

2. Optionale Einstellungen (Teil 2) bei Bedarf vornehmen 2. Entering of optional settings (section 2) 

Softwareversion anzeigen lassen 

Displaying the software version 

Mit den Pfeiltasten “Info” markieren; dann Kreistaste drücken. 

Mark “Info” using the arrow keys. Then press the circle key. 

Softwareversion des ComTerminals wird angezeigt. 

The ComTerminal's software version is displayed. 

Haustaste drücken um zum Menü zurückzukehren. 

Press the home key to return to the menu. 

Tastenfunktion ausschalten / einschalten 

In der Werkseinstellung des ComTerminal sind die Alarmtaste und beide AW‐Tasten (AW = 

Anwesenheit) funktionsbereit. In begründeten Ausnahmefällen ist es möglich die 

Tastenfunktion von diesen Tasten auszuschalten. 

AW‐Taste 2 (gelb) 

00 8802 97, 09/09 (Rev. 1.3) 

Alarmtaste (blaues Symbol) 

AW‐Taste 1 (grün) 

Mit den Pfeiltasten “Tastenfunktion” markieren; dann Kreistaste drücken. 

Mit den Pfeiltasten gewünschte Taste (Alarmtaste oder AW‐Taste) markieren; 

dann Kreistaste drücken. 



Achtung! Ausgeschaltete Tasten sind im Pflegebetrieb nicht verfügbar! 

Switching on or of the key function 

With the factory settings the alarm key and both presence keys are operational. In 

well‐founded exceptional cases you can switch of the key function for these keys. 

Presence Key 2 (yellow) 

3. Zimmerbus RAN prüfen 3. Checking room bus RAN 

Status 

Prüfung, ob eingestellte RAN Anzahl (siehe oben “RAN Anzahl einstellen”) mit Anzahl 

funktionsbereiter Zimmergeräte übereinstimmt. 


Mit den Pfeiltasten “Status” markieren; dann Kreistaste drücken. 

Anzeige: OK: ComTerminal hat gemeldet, dass eingestellte RAN Anzahl gleich Anzahl 

funktionsbereiter Zimmergeräte ist. 

Anzeige: Fehler: ComTerminal hat gemeldet, dass eingestellte RAN Anzahl nicht gleich 

Anzahl funktionsbereiter Zimmergeräte ist. 

Zum Verlassen der Anzeige Haustaste drücken. Bei Fehler “Test RAN” durchführen. 

Test RAN 

Test, ob Zimmergeräte funktionsbereit und korrekt am RAN angeschlossen sind. 


Test Starten: Mit den Pfeiltasten “Test RAN” markieren; dann Kreistaste drücken. 

Die LEDs aller angeschlossenen Zimmergeräte müssen blinken. (Geräte, die nicht 

blinken, sind falsch angeschlossen oder defekt. Defekte Geräte austauschen. Falsch 

angeschlossene Geräte korrekt anschließen) 

Prüfen, ob Anzahl angeschlossener Zimmergeräte gleich der eingestellten RAN Anzahl 

ist. Falls eingestellte RAN‐Anzahl falsch ist, diese nach dem RAN Test wie oben be‐ 

schrieben einstellen. 

Test beenden: Haustaste drücken. 

Alarm Key (blue symbol) 

Presence Key 1 (green) 

Mark “Key Function” using the arrow keys. Then press the circle key. 

Mark the desired key (alarm key or presence key) using the arrow keys. Then 

press the circle key. 



Attention! Switched off keys are not available for nursing staff! 

4. Konfigurationsmenü verlassen 4. Exit the configuration menu 

Wenn keine Einstellungen mehr vorgenommen werden sollen und alle Tests beendet sind, 

müssen Sie das Konfigurationsmenü verlassen. 

Haustaste so oft drücken, bis die normale Betriebsanzeige angezeigt wird. 

Hinweis: Wenn drei Minuten keine Funktionstaste gedrückt wird, wird das 

Konfigurationsmenü automatisch verlassen. 

Status 

Check whether the stored RAN number (see above “Setting of RAN number”) is equal to the 

number of operational room devices. 


Mark “Status” using the arrow keys. Then press the circle key. 

Display: OK: ComTerminal has reported: Stored RAN number is equal to the number of 

operational room devices. 

Display: Error: ComTerminal has reported: Stored RAN number is not equal to the 


Press the home key to end. In case of an error carry out “Test RAN”. 

Test RAN 

Test if room devices are ready to operate and if they are correctly connected to the RAN. 

Check the correct setting of the RAN number. 


Test start: Mark “Test RAN” using the arrow keys. Then press the circle key. 

The LEDs of all connected room devices must flash. (Non-flashing devices are wrongly 

connected or defective. Replace defective devices. Correct any wrong connection) 

Compare the number of connected room devices with the stored RAN number. If the 

stored RAN number is not equal to the number of connected room devices, correct the 

RAN number setting after the RAN test as described above. 

End of test: Press the home key. 

When all settings are performed and all tests are finished, exit the configuration menu. 

During this procedure all settings are stored. 

Press home key until normal operation display appears. 

Note: If for a period of three minutes no function key is pressed, the system will leave the 

configuration menu. 

Page 107 




ZimmerTerminal Flamenco, Best.‐Nr. 77 0520 00 

Terminal zum universellen Einsatz in Patientenzimmern, Dienstzimmern und allgemeinen 

Funktionsräumen, ohne Sprechkommunikation. Rote Ruftaste, blaue Alarmtaste, grüne 

Anwesenheitstaste (AW1), gelbe Anwesenheitstaste (AW2) und 4 Funktionstasten Das 

ZimmerTerminal steuert und überwacht alle Zimmerfunktionen gemäß DIN VDE 0834. 

Direkter Anschluss an den Gruppenbus (OSYnet) und den Zimmerbus (RAN). 

120 mm 

120 mm 





Montage der Terminal‐Rückwand Mounting pattress 

00 8801 65, 05/10 (Rev. 1.0) 

Beachten Sie beim Setzen der Einbaudosen den Platzbedarf 

des ZimmerTerminals. Vom Mittelpunkt der Dose muss nach 

oben und unten ein Platzbedarf von mindestens 120 mm 

vorgesehen werden. 

1. Anschlussleitungen durch den Ausbruch in der Terminal‐Rückwand 2 führen. 

2. Terminal‐Rückwand 2 mit den Schrauben 1 der Einbaudose auf der Einbaudose 

festschrauben. 

Hinweis! Wenn die Montage auf einer Einbaudose nicht möglich ist, kann das 

ZimmerTerminal mit Schrauben und Dübeln an der Wand befestigt werden, wobei dieselben 

Bohrungen in der Terminal‐Rückwand benutzt werden. 

Anschließend Anschlussleitungen von Gruppenbus OSYnet, Zimmerbus RAN und 

Spannungsversorgung am Anschlussfeld der Terminal‐Rückwand 2 gemäß dem 

Anschlussplan anschließen (siehe Seite “Anschlüsse”). 

Room Terminal Flamenco, order no. 77 0520 00 

Room terminal designed for universal use in patient rooms, duty rooms and general 

function rooms, without speech communication. Red call button, blue code blue/cardiac 

alarm button, green presence button (staff 1), yellow presence button (staff 2) and 4 

function keys as soft keys. Control and monitoring of all room functions in compliance with 

DIN VDE 0834. Direct connection to the group bus (OSYnet) and the room bus (RAN). 


manual. 



120 mm 

120 mm 

Montage des Terminal‐Frontteils Mounting front panel 

1. Flachkabel 5 des Terminal‐Frontteils 4 in die zugehörige Buchse auf der 

Terminal‐Rückwand 2 stecken. 

2. Terminal-Frontteil 4 oben auf die Terminal-Rückwand 2 aufsetzen, so dass ein Scharnier 

6 entsteht. Anschließend das Terminal-Frontteil mit leichten Druck auf die 

Terminal-Rückwand herunterdrücken, bis die Rastnase 7 einrastet. Dabei darauf achten, 

dass das Flachkabel 5 nicht eingeklemmt wird. 

3. Zur Sicherung kann eine Sicherungsschraube 8 unten in die Bohrung unterhalb der 

gelben Anwesenheitstaste eingeschraubt werden. 

Abschließend muss das ZimmerTerminal konfiguriert werden (siehe S. 

“Konfigurationsanleitung”). 


1. Falls eine Sicherungsschraube 8 unten am ZimmerTerminal eingeschraubt ist, die 

Schraube lösen. 

2. Mit dem Schraubendreher Rastnase 7 vorsichtig nach oben drücken, bis sich das 

Terminal-Frontteil 4 löst. 

3. Das Terminal-Frontteil 4 nach unten abnehmen. 

4. Stecker des Flachkabels 5 von Terminal‐Rückwand 2 abziehen. 

5. Terminal‐Frontteil 4 geschützt ablegen. Vorsicht: Elektrostatisch gefährdete Bauteile! 

1 


2 Terminal‐Rückwand 

3* Einbaudose 

4 Terminal‐Frontteil 

2 

5 Flachkabel 

6 Scharnier 

7 Rastnase 

8 Sicherungsschraube (optional) 

* ist nicht im Lieferumfang enthalten 

77 0520 00 

ZimmerTerminal Flamenco ® 

Room Terminal Flamenco ® 

3 

4 

7 

Page 108 

When installing the back box consider the space required for the 

complete Room Terminal. Measuring from the centre of the box, the 

available space must be at least 120 mm above and below. 

1. Insert the connection cables through the outlet in the pattress 2. 

2. Fix the pattress 2 using the back box screws 1 to the back box. 

Note! If mounting on a back box is not possible, the Room Terminal may be fixed to the wall 

with dowels and screws using the same holes in the pattress. 

Afterwards the connection cables to the group bus OSYnet, to the room bus RAN and to the 

power supply have to be connected to the connection field in the pattress 2 according to the 

connection plan (see page “Connections”). 

1. Plug the flat cable 5 of the front panel 4 into the appropriate socket on the connection 

field in the pattress 2. 

2. Place front panel 4 onto the top of the pattress 2 creating a hinge 6. Now press the front 

panel downwards onto the pattress with low pressing power until the catch 7 engages. 

Make sure that the flat cable 5 is not pinched. 

3. For improved security a security screw 8 can be fitted into the hole below the yellow 

presence button. 

Finally the Room Terminal has to be configured (see page “Configuration Instructions”). 

1. If a security screw 8 is fitted into the base of the Room Terminal, remove it. 

2. Use a screwdriver to push the catch 7 upwards until the front panel 4 looses. 

3. Remove the front panel 4. 

4. Disconnect the flat cable 5 from the pattress 2. 

5. Lay down the front panel 4 protected. Caution: Electrostatic sensitive components! 

205 mm 

5 

6 

1* Four back box screws 

2 Pattress 

3* Back box 

4 Front panel 

110 mm 


Function keys 

2 

4 

8 

6 

7 

5 Flat cable 

6 Hinge 

7 Catch 

8 Security screw (option) 

* not included 

2


ZimmerTerminal Flamenco, Best.‐Nr. 77 0520 00 






Gruppenbus (OSYnet) Zimmerbus (RAN) Power 




ohne Sprechen 







00 8801 65, 05/10 (Rev. 1.0) 

+24 V 

0 V 

+24 V - Si 

RAN 

0V 

D‐L 

D‐H 

D‐G 

NF 1a 

NF 1b 

NF 2a 

NF 2b 

D‐L 

D‐H 

D‐G 

NF 1a 

NF 1b 

NF 2a 

NF 2b 

rt 

ge 

sw 

ws 

ws-bl 

bl 

ws-gn 

gn 

br 

ws-br 

or 

ws-or 


zum nächsten Zimmer 




Hinweis! Die Anschlüsse NF 1a, NF 1b, NF 2a und NF 2b sind in folgenden 

Installationen nicht erforderlich: Es sind keine ComTerminals (= Terminals mit 

Sprachübertragung) an diesem Gruppenbus OSYnet angeschlossen UND es 

sollen auch in Zukunft keine ComTerminals an diesen Gruppenbus OSYnet 

angeschlossen werden. 

77 0520 00 

ZimmerTerminal Flamenco ® 

Room Terminal Flamenco ® 

Room Terminal Flamenco, order no. 77 0520 00 






terminal. 



Power supply 








+24 V 

RAN 

0V 

D‐L 

D‐H 

NF 1a 

NF 1b 

NF 2a 

NF 2b 

rt 

bl 

gn 



D‐L 

D‐H 

ws 



D‐G 

br 

NF 1a 

ws 

ge 

NF 1b 

NF 2a 

ws NF 2b 

Anschlussfeld (Schraubklemmen) 

Connection field (screw clamps) 

+24 V - Si 

D‐G 

0 V 

red 

yellow 

black 

white 

white-blue 

blue 

white-green 

green 

brown 

white-brown 

orange 

white-orange 

red 

blue 

green 

white 

brown 

white 

yellow 

white 



from RAN user 





Note! The connections NF 1a, NF 1b, NF 2a and NF 2b are not required in the 

following installations: There are no ComTerminals (= terminals with speech) 

connected to this group bus OSYnet AND there shall not be connected any 

ComTerminals to this group bus OSYnet in the future. 

Spannungs‐ 

versorgung 

Power supply 

Gruppenbus 

Group bus 

OSYnet 

Zimmerbus 

Room bus 

RAN 

Page 109 


Don't use! 




ZimmerTerminal Flamenco, Best.‐Nr. 77 0520 00 Room Terminal Flamenco, order no. 77 0520 00 












Raumtyp Raumtyp einstellen, z.B. Patientenzimmer. 







Kontrast Kontrast des ZimmerTerminal‐Displays auf hoch oder niedrig einstellen 

Tastenton Ton bei Drücken der Tasten am ZimmerTerminal ein‐ oder ausschalten 

Info Version der Software im ZimmerTerminal anzeigen lassen. 

Reset Verwendung nur durch Tunstall‐Techniker. (ZimmerTerminal neu starten) 

00 8801 65, 05/10 (Rev. 1.0) 




Function keys 









Room type Selecting the room type (e.g. Patient room). 







Contrast Setting the display contrast to “high” or “low”. 


Info Displaying the Room Terminal's software version. 

Reset Function use only for Tunstall technicians. (Restart the Room Terminal) 








Raumtyp einstellen 

Mit den Pfeiltasten “Raumtyp” markieren; dann Kreistaste drücken. 

Mit den Pfeiltasten gewünschten Raumtyp markieren: 

- Patientenzimmer 

- Patientenzimmer mit Abstelltaste für WC-Ruf im ZimmerTerminal 

- Dienstzimmer (Notrufe werden als Normalrufe signalisiert) 

- Anschlussterminal (Tasten und Display im ZimmerTerminal außer Betrieb) 

Kreistaste drücken, um markierten Raumtyp zu speichern. 



am ZimmerTerminal über RAN angeschlossen sind (Kein Birntaster). 











2. Optionale Einstellungen bei Bedarf vornehmen 2. Entering of optional settings 

Kontrast des ZimmerTerminal‐Displays einstellen (hoch, niedrig) 






Auf Wunsch kann der Tastenton der ZimmerTerminal‐Tasten ausgeschaltet werden. Die 

Einstellung “Tastenton Ein” wird jedoch empfohlen. 






Softwareversion des ZimmerTerminals wird angezeigt. 


Page 110 



Mark the desired language using the arrow keys: D = German; GB = English; E = Spa‐ 

nish; F = French; NL = Dutch; I = Italian. “Custom” = another language, if this is stored 



Selecting the room type 

Mark “Room type” using the arrow keys. Then press the circle key. 

Mark the desired room type using the arrow keys: 

- Patient room 

- Patient room with cancel key for WC call at Room Terminal 

- Staff room (emergency calls are signalled as normal calls) 

- Connection terminal (keys and display at Room Terminal non-operational) 

Press the circle key to store the marked room type. 



etc.) which are connected to the Room Terminal via RAN. (No pear push switcht). Attention, 

exception! One room lamp with 4 sections (order no. 77 0170 10 or 77 0171 10) is 

equivalent to two room devices. 















If required the Room Terminal key sound can be switched off. But the setting “Key sound 

On” is recommended. 






The Room Terminal's software version is displayed. 

Press the home key to return to the menu.


ZimmerTerminal Flamenco, Best.‐Nr. 77 0520 00 Room Terminal Flamenco, order no. 77 0520 00 


Status 





Anzeige: OK: ZimmerTerminal hat gemeldet, dass eingestellte RAN Anzahl gleich An‐ 

zahl funktionsbereiter Zimmergeräte ist. 

Anzeige: Fehler: ZimmerTerminal hat gemeldet, dass eingestellte RAN Anzahl nicht 

gleich Anzahl funktionsbereiter Zimmergeräte ist. 


Test RAN 

















00 8801 65, 05/10 (Rev. 1.0) 

Status 





Display: OK: Room Terminal has reported: Stored RAN number is equal to the number of 


Display: Error: Room Terminal has reported: Stored RAN number is not equal to the 



Test RAN 
















Page 111 




ControlTerminal Flamenco ® , Best.‐Nr. 77 0550 00 

Das ControlTerminal steuert und überwacht alle Zimmerfunktionen gemäß DIN VDE 0834. 


Außerdem Funktion als Zimmerleuchte zur optischen Anzeige von allen Rufarten und 

Personalanwesenheiten sowie zusätzliche Anzeige für WC‐Ruf. Wandmontage. 





Montage mit Schraubbefestigung Mounting with screw fixing 

Sie können zwischen zwei Montage-Varianten wählen. In diesem Abschnitt A „Montage mit 

Schraubbefestigung“ ist beschrieben, wie Sie das ControlTerminal vollständig auf der 

Montageplatte festschrauben. Im Abschnitt C „Montage mit Steckbefestigung“ ist 

beschrieben, wie Sie das ControlTerminal nur über zwei Anschlussklemmen an der 

Montageplatte befestigen. Die Montage-Variante A dauert länger als C. Aber bei Variante A 

wird das ControlTerminal stabiler befestigt als bei C. 

1* Einbaudose 

2** Montageplatte mit Anschlussklemmen 



5** Zwei Befestigungsschrauben 

6 Leiterplatte 

7 Befestigungsschraube 

00 8801 75, 07/2010 (Rev. 1.0) 

8 4 LED-Module 

9 Dekorrahmen 

10 Zwei Befestigungsschrauben 


Separat bestellen: 

* Einbaudose (inkl. zwei Schrauben) 

** Montagekit, Bestell-Nr. 77 0960 00 

1. Leitungen gemäß Kapitel „Anschlüsse“ dieser Verpackungsbeilage an die 

Anschlussklemmen (Schraubklemmen) auf der Montageplatte 2 anschließen. Dabei 

zwei Einlegebrücken wie gezeigt einlegen. 

2. Montageplatte 2 mit den vier Schrauben der Einbaudose 3 an der Einbaudose 1 

festschrauben. Einbaurichtung beachten: Klemme für Spannungsversorgung oben. 

3. Gehäuse‐Rückwand 4 mit den beiden Befestigungsschrauben 5 auf der Montageplatte 

2 festschrauben. 

4. Leiterplatte 6 auf Anschlussklemmen aufdrücken und mit der Befestigungsschraube 7 

auf der Gehäuse-Rückwand 4 festschrauben. 

5. Die vier LED‐Module gemäß Abbildung B auf die Leiterplatte stecken. 

6. Dekorrahmen 9 mit den beiden Befestigungsschrauben 10 auf die Gehäuse‐Rückwand 

4 schrauben. 

7. Lichtkuppel mit Trenneinsatz 11 auf den Dekorrahmen 9 drücken, bis sie einrastet. 

1* 

2** 

3* 

3* 

4 

3* 

3* 

5** 

Montage mit Schraubbefestigung 

Mounting with screw fixing 

5** 

6 

7 

8 

9 

Control Terminal Flamenco ® , order no. 77 0550 00 

Control and monitoring of all room functions in compliance with DIN VDE 0834. Direct 

connection to the group bus (OSYnet) and the room bus (RAN). 

Furthermore optical signalling of all call types and staff presences as well as additional 

display for WC call. Wall mounting. 


manual. 



You can choose between two mounting options. In this section A “Mounting with screw 

fixing“ is written, how you completely screw the Control Terminal to the mounting plate. In 

section C “Mounting with plug fixing“ is written, how you you fix the Control Terminal to the 

mounting plate only via two connectors. For mounting option A you need more time. 

Therefore the Control Terminal will be stronger fixed using option A. 

1* Back box 

2** Mounting plate with connectors 

3* Four back box fixing screws 

4 Pattress 

5** Two fixing screws 

6 Printed circuit board (PCB) 

7 One fixing screw 

8 4 LED modules 


10 Two fixing screws 


Order separately: 

* Back box (incl. two screws) 

** Mounting kit, order no. 77 0960 00 

1. Connect the connection wires according to chapter “Connections” of this product leaflet 

to the connectors (screw clamps) on the mounting plate 2. Thereby insert two insertion 

bridges as shown. 

2. Fit the mounting plate 2 to the back box 1 using the four back box screws 3. For the 

correct mounting direction the connector for power supply must be at the top. 

3. Fit the pattress 4 with the two fixing screws 5 to the mounting plate 2. 

4. Press the PCB 6 to the connectors and fit the PCB with the fixing screw 7 to the 

pattress 4. 

5. Plug the four LED modules onto the PCB according to the figure B. 

6. Fit the decorative frame 9 with the two fixing screws 10 onto the pattress 4. 

7. Press the light dome with the insert module 11 onto the decorative frame 9 until it locks 

in place. 

10 

77 0550 00 


Control Terminal Flamenco 

Page 112 

11 

10 

LED-Module 

LED modules 

rot: Rufe 



weiß: WC‐Ruf 

red: Calls 

green: Staff 1 

yellow: Staff 2 

white: WC call






Personalanwesenheiten sowie zusätzliche Anzeige für WC‐Ruf. Wandmontage. 





Montage mit Steckbefestigung Mounting with plug fixing 

Sie können zwischen zwei Montage-Varianten wählen. In Abschnitt A „Montage mit 


Montageplatte festschrauben. In diesem Abschnitt C „Montage mit Steckbefestigung“ ist 




1* Einbaudose 







00 8801 75, 07/2010 (Rev. 1.0) 


9 Dekorrahmen 




* Einbaudose (inkl. vier Schrauben) 


1. Leitungen gemäß Anschlussplan an die Anschlussklemmen (Schraubklemmen) auf der 

Montageplatte 2 anschließen. Dabei zwei Einlegebrücken gemäß Anschlussplan 

einlegen. 


festschrauben. Einbaurichtung beachten: 4-polige Klemme für Spannungsversorgung 

oben. 

3. Gehäuse-Rückwand 4 mit eingebauter Leiterplatte 6 (mit Schraube 7 verschraubt) auf 

die Montageplatte 2 aufsetzen. Vorsichtig in der Mitte der Leiterplatte 7 drücken. 

Drücken Sie bis zum Anschlag, so dass Stecker und Buchsen der Anschlussklemmen 

sehr fest miteinander verbunden sind. Achtung! Schutzmaßnahmen gegen 

elektrostatische Entladungen beachten. 

4. Die vier LED‐Module 7 gemäß Abbildung B auf die Leiterplatte stecken. 


4 schrauben. 


1 

2 

3 

3 

4 

3 

3 

6 





display for WC call. Wall mounting. 


manual. 



You can choose between two mounting options. In section A “Mounting with screw fixing“ is 

written, how you completely screw the Control Terminal to the mounting plate. In this 

section C “Mounting with plug fixing“ is written, how you you fix the Control Terminal to the 


Therefore the Control Terminal will be stronger fixed using option A. 

1* Back box 



4 Pattress 




Montagevariante mit Steckbefestigung 

Mounting option with plug fixing 

7 



8 

9 

10 






* Back box (incl. four screws) 


1. Connect the connection wires according to the connection plan to the connectors (screw 

clamps) on the mounting plate 2. Thereby insert two insertion bridges according to the 

connection plan. 


correct mounting direction the 4 pole connector for power supply must be at the top. 

3. Place the pattress 4 with the pre-mounted PCB 7 (fixed with screw 6) onto the mounting 

plate 2. Press the centre of the PCB very carefully. Press up to the stop, so that plugs 

and sockets of the connectors are very firmly connected. Attention! Observe protection 

measures against electrostatic discharges. 

4. Plug the four LED modules 7 onto the PCB according to the figure B. 



in place. 

11 

77 0550 00 

ControlTerminal Flamenco ® 

Control Terminal Flamenco ® 

Page 113 

10 

Demontage 

Dismantling 

1. 

1. 

2. 










Gruppenbus (OSYnet) Zimmerbus (RAN) Stromversorg. 




ohne Sprechen 





(AWG 23) 

* siehe 

Hinweis 

unten! 



* siehe 

Hinweis 

unten! 

00 8801 75, 07/2010 (Rev. 1.0) 

+24 V Einlegebrücke 

+24 V 

(00 0220 52) 


0 V 

Einlegebrücke zum nächsten Zimmer 

0 V (00 0220 52) 

+24 V RAN 

* 

RAN 

0V 

D‐L 

D‐H 

D‐G 

NF 1a 

NF 1b 

NF 2a 

NF 2b 

rt 

ge 

sw 

ws 

ws-bl 

bl 

ws-gn 

gn 

br 

ws-br 

or 

ws-or 










terminal. 

Power supply 








(AWG 23) 

+24 V insertion bridge 

+24 V 

(00 0220 52) 


0 V 

insertion bridge or to next room 

0 V (00 0220 52) 

RAN 

0V 

D‐L 

D‐H 

NF 1a 

NF 1b 

* NF 2a 

NF 2b 

red 

yellow 

black 

white 

white-blue 

blue 

white-green 

green 

brown 

white-brown 

orange 

white-orange 

D‐L 

D‐H 

rt 

bl 



D‐L 

D‐H 

red 

blue 

gn 

green 

D‐G 

ws 



D‐G white 

NF 1a 

br 

NF 1a brown 

* 

NF 1b 

NF 2a 

NF 2b 

ws 

ge 

ws 

* refer to 

Note 

below! * 

NF 1b 

NF 2a 

NF 2b 

white 

yellow 

white 

* Hinweis! Die Adern NF 1a, NF 1b, NF 2a und NF 2b sind nur am Gruppenbus 

OSYnet vorhanden, wenn am selben Gruppenbus auch ComTerminals (= Terminals 

mit Sprachübertragung) angeschlossen sind. Diese Adern werden an dem Con‐ 

trolTerminal nicht angeschlossen. Sie müssen mit der Verbindungsdosenklemme 

(Bestell-Nr. 00 0210 21, Leitungsquerschnitt 0,5 - 2,5 mm 2 ) durchverbunden werden. 

Anschlussklemmen (Schraubklemmen) 

Connectors (screw clamps) 

4-polige Anschlussklemme 

4pole connector 


8 pole connector 

Einlegebrücke 

Insertion bridge 

0V RAN +24V 

RAN 

Zimmerbus 

Room bus 

RAN 




Power supply 

+24 V +24 V 0 V 0 V 

DG 

DH 

DL 

Gruppenbus 

Group bus 

OSYnet 

77 0550 00 

ControlTerminal Flamenco ® 

Control Terminal Flamenco ® 

Page 114 

* refer to 

Note 

below! 

+24 V RAN 

D‐G 

from RAN user 





* Note! The wires NF 1a, NF 1b, NF 2a and NF 2b exist only at the group bus 

OSYnet, if ComTerminals (= terminals with speech) are connected to the same 

group bus. These wires are not connected to the Control Terminal. They have to 

be connected through using the push-wire connector (oder no. 00 0210 21, wire 

cross section 0.5 - 2.5 mm 2 ). 




Don't use!



ControlTerminal mit Türschild Flamenco ® , Best.‐Nr. 77 0551 00 




Personalanwesenheiten sowie zusätzliche Anzeige für WC‐Ruf. Türschild als 






Montage mit Schraubbefestigung Mounting with screw fixing 

Sie können zwischen zwei Montage-Varianten wählen. In diesem Abschnitt A „Montage mit 


Montageplatte festschrauben. Im Abschnitt C „Montage mit Steckbefestigung“ ist 




1* Einbaudose 







00 8801 94, 03/2011 (Rev. 1.0) 


9 Dekorrahmen 



12 Namensschild (Höhe x Breite: 70 x 92 mm) 



* Einbaudose (inkl. zwei Schrauben) 


1. Leitungen gemäß Kapitel „Anschlüsse“ dieser Verpackungsbeilage an die 

Anschlussklemmen (Schraubklemmen) auf der Montageplatte 2 anschließen. Dabei 

zwei Einlegebrücken wie gezeigt einlegen. 


festschrauben. Einbaurichtung beachten: Klemme für Spannungsversorgung oben. 

3. Gehäuse‐Rückwand 4 mit den beiden Befestigungsschrauben 5 auf der Montageplatte 

2 festschrauben. 

4. Leiterplatte 6 auf Anschlussklemmen aufdrücken und mit der Befestigungsschraube 7 

auf der Gehäuse-Rückwand 4 festschrauben. 

5. Die vier LED‐Module gemäß Abbildung B auf die Leiterplatte stecken. 


4 schrauben. 


8. Namensschild 12 und Schutzabdeckung 13 einlegen. 

1* 

2** 

3* 

3* 

4 

3* 

3* 

5** 

Montage mit Schraubbefestigung 

Mounting with screw fixing 

5** 

6 

7 

8 

9 

10 

ControlTerminal with doorplate Flamenco ® , order no. 77 0551 00 




display for WC call. Doorplate as label field for room designation. Wall mounting. 


manual. 



You can choose between two mounting options. In this section A “Mounting with screw 

fixing“ is written, how you completely screw the ControlTerminal to the mounting plate. In 

section C “Mounting with plug fixing“ is written, how you you fix the ControlTerminal to the 


Therefore the ControlTerminal will be stronger fixed using option A. 

1* Back box 



4 Pattress 








12 Label strip (hxw: 70 x 92 mm) 

13 Protection cover 


* Back box (incl. two screws) 


1. Connect the connection wires according to chapter “Connections” of this product leaflet 

to the connectors (screw clamps) on the mounting plate 2. Thereby insert two insertion 

bridges as shown. 


correct mounting direction the connector for power supply must be at the top. 

3. Fit the pattress 4 with the two fixing screws 5 to the mounting plate 2. 

4. Press the PCB 6 to the connectors and fit the PCB with the fixing screw 7 to the 

pattress 4. 

5. Plug the four LED modules onto the PCB according to the figure B. 



in place. 


10 

12 

77 0551 00 

ControlTerminal mit Türschild Flamenco 


Page 115 

13 

11 

LED-Module 

LED modules 

rot: Rufe 



weiß: WC‐Ruf 

red: Calls 

green: Staff 1 

yellow: Staff 2 

white: WC call






Personalanwesenheiten sowie zusätzliche Anzeige für WC‐Ruf. Türschild als 






Montage mit Steckbefestigung Mounting with plug fixing 

Sie können zwischen zwei Montage-Varianten wählen. In Abschnitt A „Montage mit 


Montageplatte festschrauben. In diesem Abschnitt C „Montage mit Steckbefestigung“ ist 




1* Einbaudose 







00 8801 94, 03/2011 (Rev. 1.0) 


9 Dekorrahmen 



12 Namensschild (Höhe x Breite: 70 x 92 mm) 



* Einbaudose (inkl. vier Schrauben) 


1. Leitungen gemäß Anschlussplan an die Anschlussklemmen (Schraubklemmen) auf der 

Montageplatte 2 anschließen. Dabei zwei Einlegebrücken gemäß Anschlussplan 

einlegen. 


festschrauben. Einbaurichtung beachten: 4-polige Klemme für Spannungsversorgung 

oben. 

3. Gehäuse-Rückwand 4 mit eingebauter Leiterplatte 6 (mit Schraube 7 verschraubt) auf 

die Montageplatte 2 aufsetzen. Vorsichtig in der Mitte der Leiterplatte 7 drücken. 

Drücken Sie bis zum Anschlag, so dass Stecker und Buchsen der Anschlussklemmen 

sehr fest miteinander verbunden sind. Achtung! Schutzmaßnahmen gegen 

elektrostatische Entladungen beachten. 

4. Die vier LED‐Module 7 gemäß Abbildung B auf die Leiterplatte stecken. 


4 schrauben. 


7. Namensschild 12 und Schutzabdeckung 13 einlegen. 

1 

2 

3 

3 

4 

3 

3 

6 

ControlTerminal Flamenco ® , order no. 77 0551 00 




display for WC call. Doorplate as label field for room designation. Wall mounting. 


manual. 



You can choose between two mounting options. In section A “Mounting with screw fixing“ is 

written, how you completely screw the ControlTerminal to the mounting plate. In this 

section C “Mounting with plug fixing“ is written, how you you fix the ControlTerminal to the 


Therefore the ControlTerminal will be stronger fixed using option A. 

1* Back box 



4 Pattress 




Montagevariante mit Steckbefestigung 

Mounting option with plug fixing 

7 



8 

9 

10 





12 Label strip (hxw: 70 x 92 mm) 

13 Protection cover 


* Back box (incl. four screws) 


1. Connect the connection wires according to the connection plan to the connectors (screw 

clamps) on the mounting plate 2. Thereby insert two insertion bridges according to the 

connection plan. 


correct mounting direction the 4 pole connector for power supply must be at the top. 

3. Place the pattress 4 with the pre-mounted PCB 7 (fixed with screw 6) onto the mounting 

plate 2. Press the centre of the PCB very carefully. Press up to the stop, so that plugs 

and sockets of the connectors are very firmly connected. Attention! Observe protection 

measures against electrostatic discharges. 

4. Plug the four LED modules 7 onto the PCB according to the figure B. 



in place. 


10 

12 

77 0551 00 

ControlTerminal mit Türschild Flamenco 


Page 116 

13 

11 

Demontage 

Dismantling 

1. 

1. 

2. 




ControlTerminal mit Türschild Flamenco ® , Best.‐Nr. 77 0551 00 






Gruppenbus (OSYnet) Zimmerbus (RAN) Stromversorg. 




ohne Sprechen 





(AWG 23) 

* siehe 

Hinweis 

unten! 



* siehe 

Hinweis 

unten! 

00 8801 94, 03/2011 (Rev. 1.0) 

+24 V Einlegebrücke 

+24 V 

(00 0220 52) 


0 V 

Einlegebrücke zum nächsten Zimmer 

0 V (00 0220 52) 

+24 V RAN 

* 

RAN 

0V 

D‐L 

D‐H 

D‐G 

NF 1a 

NF 1b 

NF 2a 

NF 2b 

rt 

ge 

sw 

ws 

ws-bl 

bl 

ws-gn 

gn 

br 

ws-br 

or 

ws-or 




ControlTerminal with doorplate Flamenco ® , order no. 77 0551 00 






terminal. 

Power supply 








(AWG 23) 

+24 V insertion bridge 

+24 V 

(00 0220 52) 


0 V 

insertion bridge or to next room 

0 V (00 0220 52) 

RAN 

0V 

D‐L 

D‐H 

NF 1a 

NF 1b 

* NF 2a 

NF 2b 

red 

yellow 

black 

white 

white-blue 

blue 

white-green 

green 

brown 

white-brown 

orange 

white-orange 

D‐L 

D‐H 

rt 

bl 



D‐L 

D‐H 

red 

blue 

gn 

green 

D‐G 

ws 



D‐G white 

NF 1a 

br 

NF 1a brown 

* 

NF 1b 

NF 2a 

NF 2b 

ws 

ge 

ws 

* refer to 

Note 

below! * 

NF 1b 

NF 2a 

NF 2b 

white 

yellow 

white 

* Hinweis! Die Adern NF 1a, NF 1b, NF 2a und NF 2b sind nur am Gruppenbus 

OSYnet vorhanden, wenn am selben Gruppenbus auch ComTerminals (= Terminals 

mit Sprachübertragung) angeschlossen sind. Diese Adern werden an dem Con‐ 

trolTerminal nicht angeschlossen. Sie müssen mit der Verbindungsdosenklemme 

(Bestell-Nr. 00 0210 21, Leitungsquerschnitt 0,5 - 2,5 mm 2 ) durchverbunden werden. 

Anschlussklemmen (Schraubklemmen) 

Connectors (screw clamps) 







0V RAN +24V 

RAN 

Zimmerbus 

Room bus 

RAN 




Power supply 

+24 V +24 V 0 V 0 V 

DG 

DH 

DL 

Gruppenbus 

Group bus 

OSYnet 

77 0551 00 

ControlTerminal mit Türschild Flamenco ® 

ControlTerminal with doorplate Flamenco ® 

Page 117 

* refer to 

Note 

below! 

+24 V RAN 

D‐G 

from RAN user 





* Note! The wires NF 1a, NF 1b, NF 2a and NF 2b exist only at the group bus 

OSYnet, if ComTerminals (= terminals with speech) are connected to the same 

group bus. These wires are not connected to the ControlTerminal. They have to 

be connected through using the push-wire connector (oder no. 00 0210 21, wire 

cross section 0.5 - 2.5 mm 2 ). 




Don't use!


Page 118 


14.4 Connection sockets 

70 0171 03 Connection socket with call switch 

70 0171 50 Connection socket with call switch, bedhead unit 

70 0424 00 Connection socket combi 

70 0434 00 Connection socket combi, bedhead unit 



Page 119 




Steckvorrichtung mit Ruftaste, Best.‐Nr. 70 0171 03 

Steckvorrichtung mit zwei 8‐poligen Steckbuchsen zum Anschluss von Rufgeräten, wie z.B. 

Birntastern oder medizinischen Überwachungsgeräten. Der Anschluss für ein drittes 

Rufgerät (externer Ruftaster) erfolgt von der Rückseite mit einer speziellen 

Anschlussleitung. 






1* Einbaudose 


3 Montagerahmen mit Leiterplatte (vormontiert) 


00 8800 79, 06/06 (Rev. 4.0) 

4 Abdeckung 

5 Klemmkralle (bei fehlender 

Schaubmöglichkeit) 

1. Anschlussklemme 2 in die eingebaute Buchse (grün) der Leiterplatte 3 stecken. 

2. Wenn gewünscht: Klemme der Anschlussleitung (50 0308 02) für das externe Rufgerät 

in die eingebaute Buchse (schwarz) auf der Leiterplatte 3 stecken. 




4. Abdeckung 4 über den Montagerahmen 3 drücken und einrasten lassen. 

Connection socket with call switch, order no. 70 0171 03 

Connection socket with two 8pole jacks for connection of call devices like pear push 

switches or medical monitoring devices. The connection for a third call device (external call 

switch) is made on the back side with a special connection cable. 


manual. 



1* Back box 

2* Connector (70 0807 01) 

3 Mounting frame with 

printed circuit board (pre‐mounted) 

Anschlüsse Connections 

Zum Anschluss als externe Rufgeräte dürfen nur Öffner‐Kontakte verwendet werden. Der 

Anschluss erfolgt über die Anschlussleitung, Best.Nr. 50 0308 02 (Länge: 50 cm). 

Die maximale Leitungslänge für den externen Rufanschluss beträgt 2,5 m. 

Bettennummer einstellen Setting the bed number 

Über den Programmierschalter 1, 2 und 3 der Leiterplatte kann die entsprechende 

Bettennummer eingestellt werden. 

*1 Achtung: Diagnostikruf nur in Verbindung mit eingestellter Bettennummer. 

Bei Bettennummer 6 kann kein Diagnostikruf verwendet werden. 


1. Schraubendreher an einer der beiden Rastnasen ansetzen und Abdeckung abheben. 



1 

2 

Buchsen 

jacks 

3 Rückseite 

back side 

3 

50 0308 02 

4 

5 

externes Rufgerät 

external call device 

RAN + Licht 

RAN & light 

70 0171 03 

Steckvorrichtung mit Ruftaste 

Connection socket with call switch 

Page 120 

4 Cover 

5 Fixing clamp (if screw fixing is 

not possible) 

* not included in delivery. 

1. Plug the connector 2 into the green socket on the printed circuit board 3. 

2. If required: Plug the terminal of the connection cable (50 0308 02) for the external call 

device into the black socket on the printed circuit board 3. 

3. Fix the mounting frame 3 using the screwpoints of the back box 1. If screw fixing is not 

possible, use the fixing clamp 5 to fix the mounting frame to the box. The fixing clamp 

cannot be used with back boxes for partition walls. 

4. Fit the cover 4 over the mounting frame 3 and lock it. 

As external call devices only normally-closed contacts may be used. The external call 

device is connected via the special connection cable, order no. 50 0308 02 (length: 50 cm). 

The maximum cable length for the external call device is 2.5 m. 

The corresponding bed number can be specified by means of the coding switches 1, 2 and 3 

of the printed circuit board. 

*1 Attention: Diagnostic call only in combination with programmed bed number. 

With bed number 6 no diagnostic call can be used. 

1. Place the screwdriver in one of the two notches and take off the cover. 

2. Remove the screws at the mounting frame 3. 


B(lack) = 0V schwarz 

vom RAN‐Teilnehmer 

Y(ellow) = RAN gelb 

from RAN user 

R(ed) = +24 V rot 

Lichtanschaltung / Light control L (ight) = Licht weiß 

B(lack) = 0V schwarz 

Impulsdauer / pulse duration 

150 ms, 24 V DC, max. 200 mA 

Anschluss externes Rufgerät: 

Connection external call device: 

Beruhigungslicht / reassurance light 

P3 P2 P1 PG NC 

ON 

+24V 

0V 

Rufeingang / call input 

1 2 3 4 5 

Werkseitige Einstellung 

PG = nicht verändern 

NC = nicht verwendet 

Factory setting 

PG = do not change 

NC = not used 

B 

Y 

R 

L 

= Bett / bed 1 





2 

= Bett / bed 6 *1



Steckvorrichtung mit Ruftaste, Kanal, Best.‐Nr. 70 0171 50 

Steckvorrichtung mit zwei 8‐poligen Steckbuchsen zum Anschluss von Rufgeräten, wie z.B. 

Birntastern oder medizinischen Überwachungsgeräten. Der Anschluss für ein zusätzliches, 

externes Rufgerät inkl. Findelicht und Beruhigungslicht erfolgt von der Rückseite mit einer 

speziellen Anschlussleitung. Zwei Schaltausgänge für Lichtschaltung. Einbau in 

medizinische Versorgungseinheit. 





Elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit! Durch unzureichende Entstörung von Leuchtstoff‐ 

lampen in medizinischen Versorgungseinheiten kann es zu Störungen der Rufanlage 

kommen. Unter Umständen lassen sich diese externen Störungen durch den Einbau von 

Entstörgliedern (Varistor‐Schaltungen) vermeiden. Die Varistor‐Schaltungen sind bei den 

Herstellern der medizinischen Versorgungseinheiten zu beziehen. Tunstall bietet hierfür das 

Überspannungsschutzfilter 230 V (Bestell‐Nr. 70 0890 97) an. 

Das EMV‐Verhalten von verschiedenen medizinischen Versorgungseinheiten kann sehr 

unterschiedlich sein. Sogar zwei Versorgungseinheiten des gleichen Typs können sich 

unterschiedlich verhalten, wenn sie unterschiedlich installiert wurden. 

In medizinischen Versorgungseinheiten gelten für die Verlegung der Leitungen der Rufan‐ 

lage die Bestimmungen von DIN EN ISO 11197. 

Codierschalter einstellen Setting coding switches 

Bett-Nr.: Externes Rufgerät: 

= Bett 1 

= Bett 2 

= Bett 3 

= Bett 4 

= Bett 5 

= Bett 6 *1 

Codierschalter 4 muss immer in Position OFF stehen. 

*1 Achtung: Diagnostikrufe können nur verwendet werden, wenn ein Bett‐Nr. eingestellt 

ist. Bei Bett‐Nr. 6 kann kein Diagnostikruf verwendet werden. 

00 8801 81, 10/11 (Rev. 2.0) 

OFF 

Bett‐Nr. Externes Rufgerät 

= Kein externes Rufgerät angeschlossen. 

= Externes Rufgerät ist Schließer. 

= Externes Rufgerät ist Öffner. 


Der Einbau der Steckvorrichtung in die medizinische Versorgungseinheit ist von der 

jeweiligen Ausführung der Versorgungseinheit abhängig. Der Einbau erfolgt durch den 

Hersteller der medizinischen Versorgungseinheit. 

Rückwärtige Montage: / Mounting from backside: 

Anschlussklemme, 5-polig (Best.-Nr. 00 0211 37) 

Connector, 5 pole (order no. 00 0211 37) 

RAN + Licht 

RAN & light 

Medizinische Versorgungseinheit 


Externes Rufgerät 

External call device 

Verbindungsleitung (Best.‐Nr. 50 0308 02) 

Connection cable (order no. 50 0308 02) 

Steckvorrichtung mit Ruftaste Kanal 

Connection socket with call switch bedhead unit 

Connection socket with call switch, bedhead unit, order no. 70 0171 50 

Connection socket with two 8-pole sockets for connection of call devices like pear push 

switches or medical monitoring devices. The connection of an additional external call 

device incl. location light and reassurance light is made on the back side with a special 

connection cable. Two outputs for light control. Mounting in a medical supply unit. 


manual. 



Electromagnetic compatibility! Due to insufficient suppression at fluorescent lamps in 

medical supply units faults in the call system may occur. These external interferences 

possibly can be avoided by installing suppressor elements (varistor circuits). Varistor cir‐ 

cuits are available from the manufacturers of the medical supply units. Tunstall offers a 

proven overvoltage filter 230 V (order no. 70 0890 97). 

Medical supply units may differ clearly in EMC behaviour. Even two supply units of the 

same type may differ, if the installation is different. 

When laying call system cables in medical supply units the regulations of European stand‐ 

ard ISO 11197 have to be followed. 

Bed no.: External call device: 

= Bed 1 

= Bed 2 

= Bed 3 

= Bed 4 

OFF 

Bed no. External call device 

= No external call device connected. 

= Normally open contact. 

= Normally closed contact. 

= Bed 5 

= Bed 6 *1 

Coding switch 4 must always be set to OFF. 

*1 Attention: A diagnostic call can only be used, if a bed number is set. 

With bed number 6 no diagnostic call can be used. 

The mounting depends on the individual model of the medical supply unit. The connection 

socket is mounted by the manufacturer of the medical supply unit. 

Ruftaste 

Call button 

Steckbuchsen 

Sockets 

70 0171 50 

Steckvorrichtung mit Ruftaste, Kanal 

Connection socket with call switch, bedhead unit 

Page 121 

55 mm 

70,5 mm 

55 mm 

70,5 mm


Zum Anschluss als externes Rufgerät darf ein Öffner‐ oder ein Schließer-Kontakt verwendet 

werden. Der Anschluss erfolgt über die Anschlussleitung, Best.-Nr. 50 0308 02 (Länge: 

50 cm). Die maximale Leitungslänge für den externen Rufanschluss beträgt 2,5 m. 

Anschlussklemme, 5-polig 

(Best.-Nr. 00 0211 37) 

RAN und Licht anschließen: 

00 8801 81, 10/11 (Rev. 2.0) 

0V schwarz 

vom RAN‐Teilnehmer RAN gelb 

+24V rot 

Lichtanschaltung 1 

Lichtanschaltung 2 

Die Impulsdauer (24 V DC, max. 200 mA) entspricht 

der Dauer des Tastendrucks. 

Externes Rufgerät als Öffner anschließen: 

Beruhigungslicht 

+24V 

Rufeingang 

Externes Rufgerät als Schließer (z.B. Siemens Mediset) anschließen: 

Beruhigungslicht 

+24V 

Rufeingang 

56kOhm 

RAN + Licht 

Externes Rufgerät 


(Best.‐Nr. 50 0308 02) 

links 

rechts 

Anschlussklemme 

Best.‐Nr. 00 0211 37 

links 

rechts 


Best.‐Nr. 50 0308 02 

links 

rechts 


Best.‐Nr. 50 0308 02 

As external call devices only normally-closed contacts may be used. The external call 

device is connected via the special connection cable, order no. 50 0308 02 (length: 50 cm). 

The maximum cable length for the external call device is 2.5 m. 

Connecting RAN and light: 

light control 1 

light control 2 

from RAN user 

0V black 

RAN yellow 

+24V red 

The pulse duration (24 V DC, 200 mA max.) is the 

same as the duration of depressing the button. 

call input 

Connecting external call device as normally open contact (e.g. Siemens Mediset): 

reassurance light 

+24V 

call input 

70 0171 50 

Steckvorrichtung mit Ruftaste, Kanal 

Connection socket with call switch, bedhead unit 

56kOhm 

left-hand 

right-hand 

Connector 

order no. 00 0211 37 

Connecting external call device as normally closed contact: 

left-hand 

reassurance light 

+24V 

Page 122 

Connector, 5 pole 

(order no. 00 0211 37) 

RAN & light 

External call device 

Connection cable 

(order no. 50 0308 02) 

right-hand 


order no. 50 0308 02 

left-hand 

right-hand 


order no. 50 0308 02 




Steckvorrichtung Kombi, Best.‐Nr. 70 0424 00 

Kombinierte Steckvorrichtung mit zwei unterschiedlichen Steckbuchsen zum Anschluss 

von Bedien- und Rufgeräten. Vorgesehen zur Übertragung von Rufen, ELA-Programmen 

und zur Steuerung von 2 Relais zur Lichtschaltung. Vorzugsweise hergestellt für den 

Wandeinbau. 






1. Buchsenelement 1 in die Einbaudose stecken. 

2. Montagerahmen 2 zusammen mit dem Buchsenelement auf die Einbaudose schrauben. 

3. Beide Stecker 3 mit den Steckbuchsen verbinden (Stecker A in Buchse A, Stecker B in 

Buchse B). 

4. Abdeckplatte 4 auf den Montagerahmen 2 drücken. 


Verwendbare Leitungsquerschnitte: 0,55 - 1 mm Ø. 

Abgeschirmte Leitungen für LS, MIC bis auf max. 30 mm absetzen! 

Zur Vermeidung von Kurzschlüssen den Beidraht (SCH) isolieren. 

Nur einen Schaltdraht pro Klemme einstecken. 

Handhabung der Klemmen mit lötfreier Anschlusstechnik nach dem Steckklemmprinzip: 

1. Leiter 8 mm abisolieren. 

2. Abisolierten Leiter bis zum Anschlag in die Klemme stecken. 

3. Zum Lösen des Leiters einen Schraubendreher mit einer Klinge 2,5 x 0,4 mm oder 3,5 x 

0,5 mm in die Öffnung stecken und den Leiter herausziehen. 

Hinweis! Zum Anschluss des Schirmdrahts Schraubendreher in die Öffnung stecken und 

Federkontakt mit dem Schraubendreher geöffnet halten, während Sie die Schirmleitung 

einführen. Anschließend korrekte Kontaktbelegung prüfen durch Ziehen an der Leitung. 

TV 

In Verbindung mit der Anschaltung eines TV‐Geräts ist die Bedienung und der zur 

Verfügung stehende Funktionsumfang unterschiedlich und abhängig von dem verwendeten 

TV‐Gerät sowie der integrierten Steuerung. Genaue Einzelheiten der Anschaltung und der 

Funktionen sollten vor der Installation mit dem Auftraggeber geklärt werden. 

00 8800 74, 10/11 (Rev. 3.0) 

Connection socket combi, order no. 70 0424 00 

A combined connection socket with two different sockets for connection of patient units and 

call devices. Designed for transmission of calls, entertainment programmes and control of two 

relays for light switching. Suitable for wall mounting. 


manual. 



1. Fit the socket 1 into the back box. 

2. Screw the mounting frame 2 together with the socket onto the back box. 

3. Connect both plugs 3 with the sockets (A in A, B in B). 

4. Push the cover 4 onto the mounting frame 2. 

Useable wire gauges: 0.55 - 1 mm Ø 

Shielded wires for LS, MIC: Strip to max. 30 mm! 

Insulate the guide wire (SCH) to prevent short circuiting. 

Connect only one wire per terminal. 

Handling of terminals with solderless connection technique: 

1. Strip the wire (8 mm). 

2. Insert the stripped wire into the terminal until it stops. 

3. For detaching the wire insert a screw driver with a tip of 2.5 x 0.4 mm or 3.5 x 0.5 mm 

into the opening and pull out the wire. 

Note! For connecting the shield wire, use the screw driver to hold the spring contact open, 

while you are inserting the shield wire. Afterwards check for a firm wire contact by pulling at 

the wire. 

TV 

The available TV functions depend on the TV set in use. 

Before the final installation, technicians shall check with the ordering party for the project to 

clarify the details regarding the connection and the functions. 

Bettennummer und TV‐Option einstellen Setting bed number and TV option 

Bettennummer 1 bis 6 einstellen: Mit den Schaltern P3, P2, P1 wie in der Tabelle 

abgebildet einstellen. Beispiel.: Bettenummer 1 = P3 off, P2 off, P1 on . 

TV auf ON: Hörfunkbetrieb über Tuner im TV-System. 

TV auf OFF: Hörfunkbetrieb über ELA 

PG‐Schalter nicht verändern. 

*1 Achtung: Bei Bettennummer 6 kann kein Diagnostik-Ruf verwendet werden. 

4 

A 

3 

B 

2 

1 

P3 P2 P1 

1 off off on 

2 off on off 

3 off on on 

4 on off off 

5 on off on 

6 on on off 

*1 

70 0424 00 

Steckvorrichtung Kombi 


Page 123 

Setting of bed numbers 1 to 6: Use switches P3, P2, P1 as shown in the table. 

Example: Bed number 1 = P3 OFF, P2 OFF, P1 ON 

TV to ON: Radio sound via tuner in TV system. 

TV to OFF: Radio sound via Entertainment (ELA). 

PG switches: Do not change. 

*1 Attention: With bed number 6 diagnostic call is not possible. 

ON 

OFF 

Obere oder rechte Seite 

top or right side 

A B 

1b 

1a 

2b 

2a 

3b 

3a 

4b 

4a 

5b 

5a 

10 

9 

8 

7 

6 

5 

4 

3 

2 

1 

1 2 3 4 5 

P3 P2 P1 PG TV 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

9 

10 

11 

Schirmleitung 

shield wire 

Schraubendreher 

screw driver

ELA 


TV 

Licht 




Kabel: 2x IY(ST)Y 2x2x0,8 



Kabel: CCS32‐Kabel 

TV‐Ton zum Bett 

00 8800 74, 10/11 (Rev. 3.0) 

ELA1a 

ELA1b 

ELA2a 

ELA2b 

ELA3a 

ELA3b 

ELA4a 

ELA4b 

ELA5a 

ELA5b 

24V 

RAN 

0V 

LS 

MIC 

SCH B 

Anschaltung Lichtrelais 

OV 

Leselicht LT 1 

Raumlicht LT 2 

24V 

0V 

RAN 

LS 

MIC 

SCH B 

}{ 

}{ 

}{ 

}{ 

}{ 

}{ 

ge 

ws 

rt 

ge 

sw 

ws 

ge 

ws 

sw 

rt 

br 

sw 

gr 

ws 

bl 

25 V 

ELA vom Zimmer 

}{ 

paarig verseilt 

vom ComTerminal oder 


Is 

vom ComTerminal oder 


Is 

vom TV‐System 

25Veff, 3 KOhm, 200 mW pro Bett 

zum Relais Lichtschaltung 

Pulsdauer 150 ms, 

24 V DC, max. 200 mA 



Cable: 2x IY(ST)Y 2x2x0.8 



Cable: CCS32 cable 

24V 

RAN 

0V 

LS 

MIC 

SCH B 

24V 

0V 

RAN 

LS 

MIC 

SCH B 

OV 

reading light LT 1 

room light LT 2 

}{ 

}{ 

}{ 

}{ 

}{ 

ELA1a 

ELA1b 

ELA2a 

ELA2b 

ELA3a 

25 V 

Ie 

ELA3b 

ELA4a 

Ie 

Entertainment from room 

ELA4b 

ELA5a 

}{ 

ELA5b 

twisted pair 

Entertainment 


TV 

Light 

Obere oder rechte Seite 

top or right side 

A B 

1b 

1a 

2b 

2a 

3b 

3a 

4b 

4a 

5b 

5a 

10 

9 

8 

7 

6 

5 

4 

3 

2 

1 

70 0424 00 



TV sound to the bed 

Connection of light relay 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

9 

10 

11 

Page 124 

}{ 

yellow 

white 

red 

yellow 

black 

white 

yellow 

white 

black 

red 

brown 

black 

grey 

white 

blue 

shield 

from ComTerminal 

or connection socket 

combi 


or connection socket 

combi 

Is 

from TV system 

25Veff, 3 KOhm, 200 mW per bed 

to light switching relay 

pulse duration 150 ms, 

24 V DC, max. 200 mA 

Is 




Steckvorrichtung Kombi Kanal, Best.‐Nr. 70 0434 00 

Kombinierte Steckvorrichtung mit zwei unterschiedlichen Steckbuchsen zum Anschluss 

von Bedien- und Rufgeräten. Vorgesehen zur Übertragung von Rufen, ELA-Programmen 

und zur Steuerung von 2 Relais zur Lichtschaltung. 

Vorzugsweise hergestellt für den Einbau in medizinische Versorgungseinheiten. 





Elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit! Durch unzureichende Entstörung von Leuchtstofflam‐ 

pen in medizinischen Versorgungseinheiten kann es zu Störungen der Rufanlage kommen. 

Unter Umständen lassen sich diese externen Störungen durch den Einbau von Entstörglie‐ 

dern (Varistor‐Schaltungen) vermeiden. Die Varistor‐Schaltungen sind bei den Herstellern zu 

beziehen. Tunstall bietet hierfür das Überspannungsschutzfilter 230 V (70 0890 97) an. 

Das EMV‐Verhalten von verschiedenen medizinischen Versorgungseinheiten kann sehr 

unterschiedlich sein. Sogar zwei Versorgungseinheiten des gleichen Typs können sich 

unterschiedlich verhalten, wenn sie unterschiedlich installiert wurden. 

In medizinischen Versorgungseinheiten gelten für die Verlegung der Leitungen der Rufan‐ 

lage die Bestimmungen von DIN EN ISO 11197. 

00 8800 75, 10/11 (Rev. 4.1) 

Connection socket combi bedhead unit, order no. 70 0434 00 

Combined connection socket with two different sockets for connection of patient handsets and 

other call devices. Designed for transmission of calls, entertainment programmes and control 

of two relays for light switching. 

Suitable for mounting in medical supply units. 


manual. 



Electromagnetic compatibility! Due to insufficient suppression at fluorescent lamps in 

medical supply units faults in the call system may occur. These external interferences 

possibly can be avoided by installing suppressor elements (varistor circuits). Varistor circuits 

are commercially available from electric/electronic suppliers. Tunstall offers a proven over‐ 

voltage filter 230 V (order no. 70 0890 97). 

Medical supply units may differ clearly in EMC behaviour. Even two supply units of the same 

type may differ, if the installation is different. 

When laying call system cables in medical supply units the regulations of European stan‐ 

dard ISO 11197 have to be followed. 

Steckvorrichtung einstellen Setting the connection socket 

Folgende Einstellungen müssen vor Einbau der Steckvorrichtung gemacht werden: 

Before mounting the connection socket please adjust as follows: 

1. Bettennummer einstellen 

1. Setting of bed numbers 

Bett-Nr. Jumper gesteckt: 

Bed no. jumper placed: 

Bett 1 P1 

Bed 1 P1 

Bett 2 P2 

Bed 2 P2 

Bett 3 P1, P2 (werkseitige Einstellung) 

Bed 3 P1, P2 (factory setting) 

Bett 4 P3 

Bed 4 P3 

Bett 5 P1, P3 

Bed 5 P1, P3 

Bett 6*) P2, P3 

Bed 6*) P2, P3 

*) Bei Bett-Nr. 6 kann kein Diagnostikruf verwendet werden. 

*) When using bed number 6 no diagnostic call can be used. 

2. Lichtoption 

2. Light option 

Jumper offen: Separate Ausgänge LT1 und LT2 für die Lichtrelais 

Jumper open: Separate outputs LT1 and LT2 for the light relays 

(Lichttasten separat) 

(light switches are separate). 

Jumper gesteckt: Ausgänge LT1 und LT2 sind verbunden (Lichttasten parallel). 

Jumper placed: Outputs LT1 and LT2 are connected (light switches are 

In diesem Fall nur ein Relais anschließen. 

parallel). In this case connect only one relay. 

3. TV‐Option 

3. TV option 

Jumper 1 gesteckt: Hörfunkbetrieb über ELA (werkseitige Einstellung). 

Jumper 1 placed: Radio via entertainment system (factory setting). 

Jumper 2 gesteckt: Hörfunkbetrieb über Tuner im TV‐System. 

Jumper 2 placed: Radio via tuner in TV system. 

4. TV-Tonkanal TV1 - TV4 

4. TV tone TV1 - TV4 

Für diese Einstellung werden immer 2 Jumper gesteckt. 

For this settings, always place 2 jumpers. 

Bei sternförmig verteiltem TV‐Ton wird der Tonkanal entsprechend der Bett‐Nummer 

Where star-type distribution of TV tone is provided, the tone channel is set in reference to 

eingestellt. 

the bed number. 

Bett-Nr. Jumper gesteckt: 

Bed no. Jumper placed: 

Bett 1 TV1 

Bed 1 TV1 

Bett 2 TV2 

Bed 2 TV2 

Bett 3 TV3 

Bed 3 TV3 

Bett 4 TV4 

Bed 4 TV4 

Bei parallel verteiltem TV-Ton wird der Tonkanal 1 gewählt. 

Where TV tone is parallel, select tone channel 1. 

TV-Ton 

TV-Ton 

Die verfügbaren TV-Funktionen hängen von dem verwendeten TV-Gerät ab. Einzelheiten The available TV functions depend on the TV set in use. Before the final installation, 

der Anschaltung und der Funktionen sollten vor der Installation mit dem Auftraggeber technicians shall check with the ordering party for the project to clarify the details regarding 

geklärt werden. 

the connection and the functions. 


Der Einbau der Steckvorrichtung in die medizinische Versorgungseinheit ist von der 

jeweiligen Ausführung der Versorgungseinheit abhängig. 

1. Gehäuse der medizinischen Versorgungseinheit öffnen. 

2. Steckvorrichtung einsetzen. 

3. Das Flachbandkabel zum Anschluss an die mediz. Versorgungseinheit aufstecken. 

4. Bei vorhandenem Bettenlicht auch den Anschluss zum Lichtrelais aufstecken. 

5. Gehäuse der medizinischen Versorgungseinheit schließen. 

70 0434 00 

Steckvorrichtung Kombi Kanal 

Connection socket combi bedhead unit 

Page 125 

After the settings are made the connection socket is mounted into the medical supply unit. 

The mounting depends on the individual model of the medical supply unit. 

1. Open the housing of the medical supply unit. 

2. Put in the connection socket. 

3. Put on the flat band cable to the medical supply unit. 

4. If there is bedlight available put on also the connection to the light relay. 

5. Close the housing of the medical supply unit. 

Anschluss Leselicht 

Impulsdauer 150 ms, 

24 V Gleichspannung, 

max. 200 mA 

connection reading light 

pulse duration 

150 ms, 

24 V DC 

max. 200 mA 

+24 V 

OV 

LT1 

NC 

Bett‐Nummer 

bed number 

P3 P2 P1 

Lichtoption 

light option 

1 2 

Anschluss Versorgungseinheit 

connection supply unit 

TV1 TV2 TV3 TV4 

TV‐Option TV‐Tonkanal 

TV option 

TV tone channel

ELA 


TV 

Licht 

Anschlüsse am Anschlussfeld D Connections to connection field GB 



Kabel: 

2x IY(ST)Y 2x2x0,8 



Kabel: 

CCS32‐Kabel 

TV‐Ton zum Bett 

Anschaltung Lichtrelais 

70 0434 00 

Steckvorrichtung Kombi Kanal 

Connection socket combi bedhead unit 

00 8800 75, 10/11 (Rev. 4.1) 

24V 

RAN 

0V 

24V 

0V 

RAN 

LS 

MIC 

SCH B 

}{ 

}{ 

}{ 

}{ 

}{ 

6 ELA1a 

6 ELA1a 

7 ELA1b 

7 ELA1b 

21 ELA2a 

21 ELA2a 

22 ELA2b 

22 ELA2b 

23 ELA3a 

Ie 

23 ELA3a 

24 ELA3b 

ELA vom Zimmer 

24 ELA3b 

25 ELA4a 

25 ELA4a 

26 

27 

28 

ELA4b 

ELA5a 

ELA5b 

}{ 


26 

27 

28 

ELA4b 

ELA5a 

ELA5b }{ 

1 

11 

40 

37 LS 

36 MIC 

35 SCH B 

1 

40 

11 

37 

36 

35 

}{ 

OV 

LT 2 

rt 

ge 

sw 

ws 

ge 

ws 

sw 

rt 

br 

sw 

gr 

ws 

bl 

vom ComTerminal 

vom ComTerminal 

Abgeschirmte Leitungen für LS, MIC dürfen 

maximal 30 mm abgemantelt werden! 

zum Relais Raumlicht 

Ia 

Pulsdauer 150 ms, 

24 V DC, max. 200 mA 

Entertainment 


TV 

Light 

Romm bus (RAN) 


Cable: 

2x IY(ST)Y 2x2x0.8 



Cable: 

CCS32‐Kabel 

Connection of light relay 

24V 

RAN 

0V 

LS 

MIC 

SCH B 

24V 

0V 

RAN 

LS 

MIC 

SCH B 

TV sound to the bed 

TV1a 

TV1b }{ 

TV2a 

TV2b }{ 

TV3a 

TV3b }{ 

vom Fernsehsystem 

TV4a 

TV4b }{ 

Ia 

4 

5 

4 

5 

TV1a 

TV1b }{ 

31 

32 

31 

32 

TV2a 

TV2b }{ 

29 

30 

29 

30 

TV3a 

TV3b }{ 

33 

34 }{ 


33 

34 

TV4a 

TV4b }{ 

39 

9 

Anschlussfeld Versorgungseinheit (Beispiel) 

Connection field supply unit (example) 

Flachkabel zu Steckvorrichtung 

Kombi Kanal 

Flat cable to connection 

socket combi bedhead unit 

40 

1 

Klemmennummern wie Flachkabel 

Terminal numbers as flat cable 

Is 

Is 

Page 126 

1 

11 

40 

37 

36 

35 

1 

40 

11 

37 

36 

35 

39 

9 

OV 

LT 2 

}{ 

}{ 

}{ 

}{ 

}{ 

red 

yellow 

black 

white 

yellow 

white 

black 

red 

brown 

black 

grey 

white 

blue 

shield 

Ie 

Entertainment from room 

}{ 

twisted pair 


Is 


Is 

Shielded wires for LS, MIC: strip to max. 30 mm! 

OV 

OV 

MIC 

TV4b 

TV2b 

TV3b 

ELA5b 

ELA4b 

ELA3b 

ELA2b 

OV 

OV 

OV 

FB3 

FB1 

OV 

OV 

ELA1a 

TV1a 

+24V 

40 

38 

36 

34 

32 

30 

28 

26 

24 

22 

20 

18 

16 

14 

12 

10 

8 

6 

4 

2 

OV 

LS 

SCHB 

TV4a 

TV2a 

TV3a 

ELA5a 

ELA4a 

ELA3a 

ELA2a 

OV 

OV 

FB4 

FB2 

RAN 

LT2 

ELA1b 

TV1b 

+24V 

+24V 

from TV system 

}{ 

twisted pair 

to room light relay 

pulse duration 150 ms, 

24 V DC, max. 200 mA 

39 

37 

35 

33 

31 

29 

27 

25 

23 

21 

19 

17 

15 

13 

11 

9 

7 

5 

3 

1 

40 

39 

38 

20 

18 

3 

2 

1 

24 V Drahtbrücken / wire links − 0 V 

(unbedingt erforderlich) 

(absolutely required) 

Ia 

Ia 




Steckvorrichtung ComStation, Best.‐Nr. 74 0452 30 

Datensteckdose zum Anschluss einer ComStationCT , einer ComStationBUS , eines 

Tischadapters für ComTerminal, einer EccoLine ComStation, einer ComStation L200 einer 

Concento Hauptabfrage, oder einer Abfragestelle 79... . 

Vorzugsweise hergestellt für den Wandeinbau. 

Passend für zweiteilige Einbaudose (Einbaudose nicht im Lieferumfang) 

15-polige Buchse als Datensteckdose. 

Vorbereitet für 15-poligen Stecker mit mechanischer Verriegelung. 

4 Steckklemmen zum Anschluss der 24 V Stromversorgung bis 2,5 mm2 . 

Anschlüsse als Steckklemmen für Massivdraht, ø 0,55 - 1 mm. 

Kontaktbelastung: max. 3 A 


beschrieben. 

Abmessungen / Dimensions: Montage / Mounting: 

00 8802 46, 10/11 (Rev. 6.1) 

152 mm 

81 mm 

ComStationCT Flamenco, Best.‐Nr. 77 0606 00 

ComStationCT Flamenco, order no. 77 0606 00 

ComStationCT , Best.‐Nr. 77 0601 00A (Produkt wurde ersetzt durch 77 0606 00) 

ComStationCT , order no. 77 0601 00A (Product was replaced by 77 0606 00) 

74 0452 30 

* 

Verbindungsdosenklemme, 5-polig (00 0210 21) 

Leitungsquerschnitt 0,5 - 2,5 mm2 push‐wire connector, 5 pole (00 0210 21) 

wire cross section: 0.5 - 2.5 mm2 74 0452 30 



0V 

+24V 

2 

11 

1 

9 

3 

4 

10 

9 

8 

7 

6 

7 

8 

1 

11 

2 

0V 

+24V 

Page 127 

Connection socket ComStation, order no. 74 0452 30 

Data socket for connection of a ComStationCT , a ComStationBUS , a desktop adapter for 

ComTerminal, an EccoLine ComStation, a ComStation L200, a Concento main console or a 

Call handling console 79... . 

Preferably made for wall mounting. 

Suitable for 2-gang back box (back box not included with delivery) 

15 pole socket as data socket 

Prepared for 15 pole plug with mechanical locking mechanism 

4 plug-in terminals up to 2.5 mm2 for connection of the 24 V supply voltage 

Connection as plug-in terminals for solid wire of ø 0.55 - 1 mm. 

Contact current: max. 3 A 

* 


manual. 

0V 

+24V 

NF 1a 

NF 1b 

NF 2a 

NF 2b 

DL 

DH 

DG 

DG 

DG 

DG 

DH 

DL 

NF 2b 

NF 2a 

NF 1b 

NF 1a 

0V 

+24V 

0 V 

24V 

RAN 

Ip (Spannungsversorgung / power supply) 

OSYnet (Gruppenbus / group bus) 



RAN (Zimmerbus / room bus)


ComStation BUS , Best.‐Nr. 77 0605 00 

ComStation BUS , order no. 77 0605 10 

74 0452 30 

* 

Verbindungsdosenklemme, 5-polig (00 0210 21) 

Leitungsquerschnitt 0,5 - 2,5 mm2 push‐wire connector, 5 pole (00 0210 21) 

wire cross section: 0.5 - 2.5 mm2 Verbindungsdosenklemme, 4-polig (00 0222 88) 

Leitungsdurchmesser: 0,6 - 0,8 mm 

** 

push‐wire connector, 4 pole (00 0222 88) 

wire diameter: 0.6 - 0.8 mm 

EccoLine ComStation, Best.‐Nr. 74 3200 00A 

EccoLine ComStation, order no. 74 3200 10A 

74 0452 30 

00 8802 46, 10/11 (Rev. 6.1) 

** 

+24V 

0V 

** 

11 

10 

9 

6 

8 

7 

+24V 

0V 

11 

10 

9 

6 

8 

7 

3 

1 

3 

2 

0V 

+24V 

11 

10 

3 

1 

3 

2 

7 

8 

6 

8 

7 

10 

11 

0V 

+24V 

* 

NF-a 

NF-b 

NF-SCH 

D-0V 

D-H 

D-L 

NF-a 

NF-b 

NF-SCH 

D-0V 

D-H 

D-L 

0V 

Beep 

0V 

AW 

0V 

Beep 

0V 

AW 

0V 

+24V 

NF 1a 

NF 1b 

NF 2a 

NF 2b 

DL 

DH 

DG 

DG 

DG 

DG 

DH 

DL 

Page 128 

NF 2b 

NF 2a 

NF 1b 

NF 1a 

0V 

+24V 

IY(St)Y 2x2x0,8 

IY(St)Y 2x2x0,8 





Summer (Best.-Nr. 00 0420 28), bei Bedarf 

Buzzer (order no. 00 0420 28), if required 

Zimmerleuchte Universal, 

Best.-Nr. 77 0182 10 

Room lamp Universal, 

order no. 77 0182 10 

Summer (Best.‐Nr. 00 0420 28), bei Bedarf 

Buzzer (Best.‐Nr. 00 0420 28), if required 

Zimmer‐Signalleuchte, 

Best.‐Nr. 10 1201 00 

Room signal lamp, 

order no. 10 1201 00 


14.5 Consoles 

77 0602 00 ComStation PC 

77 0606 00 ComStation CT Flamenco 

77 0610 00 ManagementCenter PC 


Page 129 


Page 130


Konfigurationsanleitung - Seite 1 - D Configuration Instructions - Page 1 - GB 

ComStation CT Flamenco, Best.‐Nr. 77 0606 00 

Terminal in Gegensprechtechnik, vorgesehen zur Tischaufstellung am Dienststützpunkt, 

inkl. roter Ruftaste, blauer Alarmtaste, grüner Anwesenheitstaste (AW1), gelber 

Anwesenheitstaste (AW2), 4 Funktionstasten mit situationsabhängiger Belegung, Mikrofon 

und Lautsprecher. 



Vorsicht! Lassen Sie die ComStation CT nicht auf eine harte Oberfläche fallen und 

setzen es auch nicht einem beträchtlichen Druck oder Stoß aus. Die Bedienfront der 

ComStation CT besteht aus Glas und kann brechen. 


















Reinigungszeit Sekunden einstellen, die benötigt werden um die Front der ComStationCT abzuwischen 

Kontrast Kontrast des ComStationCT ‐Displays auf hoch oder niedrig einstellen 

Tastenton Ton bei Drücken der Tasten an der ComStationCT ein‐ oder ausschalten 

Störungston Lautstärke des Tons beim Auftreten von Störungen einstellen 

Info Version der Software in der ComStationCT anzeigen lassen. 

Audio Test Menüpunkt nur zur Verwendung durch Tunstall‐Techniker 

Tastenfunktion Funktion der Alarmtaste und der Anwesenheitstasten an der ComStationCT ein‐ oder ausschalten (Ein = Standardeinstellung) 

Reset Verwendung nur durch Tunstall‐Techniker. (ComStationCT neu starten) 

00 8801 74, 06/10 (Rev. 1.0) 


ComStationCT Flamenco, order no. 77 0606 00 

Terminal with two-way speech communication, designed for desktop installation in the 

nurse station, incl. red call button, blue code blue/cardiac alarm button, green presence 

button (staff 1), yellow presence button (staff 2), 4 function keys as soft keys, microphone 

and loudspeakers. 


manual. 

Caution! The operating front cover of the ComStation CT is made of glass. Handle 

with care! The glass could break if it is dropped on a hard surface or receives a 

substantial impact. 



Function keys 















Cleaning time Setting the time (seconds) how long it takes to clean (wipe) the front 

of the ComStationCT Contrast Setting the display contrast to “high” or “low”. 


Fault tone Setting the fault tone volume to soft, medium, loud or off. 

Info Displaying the ComStation's software version. 

Audio Test Function use only for Tunstall technicians. 

Key Function Switching on or of the function of Alarm Key, Presence Key 1 and 

Presence Key 2 (On = standard setting). 

Reset Function use only for Tunstall technicians. (Restart the ComStationCT ) 










über RAN angeschlossen sind (Kein Birntaster, keine PBK Hand). 











Reinigungszeit einstellen (10 – 30 Sekunden) 

Die Reinigungszeit legt fest, wie lange die Tasten der ComStationCT außer Funktion sind, 

nachdem die Taste Clean gedrückt wurde (Zeit zum Abwischen der Bedienfront). 

Mit den Pfeiltasten “Reinigungszeit” markieren; dann Kreistaste drücken. 

Mit den Pfeiltasten gewünschte Reinigungszeit (in Sekunden) markieren. 

Kreistaste drücken, um markierte Reinigungszeit zu speichern. 

77 0606 00 

ComStation CT Flamenco ® 

Page 131 



Mark the desired language using the arrow keys: D = German; GB = English; E = Span‐ 

ish; F = French; NL = Dutch; I = Italian. “Custom” = another language, if this is stored 





etc.) which are connected via RAN. (No pear push switch, no patient handset). Attention, 

exception! One room lamp with 4 sections (order no. 77 0170 10 or 77 0171 10) is 

equivalent to two room devices. 









Setting of cleaning time (10 – 30 seconds) 

The cleaning time defines how long the ComStationCT keys are not operational after the 

Clean key has been pressed (time for wiping the front). 

Mark “Cleaning time” using the arrow keys. Then press the circle key. 

Mark the desired cleaning time using the arrow keys. 

Press the circle key to store the marked cleaning time. 

74 0452 30 


Connection socket ComStation

Konfigurationsanleitung - Seite 2 - D Configuration Instructions - Page 2 - GB 

2. Optionale Einstellungen bei Bedarf vornehmen 2. Entering of optional settings 

Kontrast des ComStation CT ‐Displays einstellen (hoch, niedrig) 






Auf Wunsch kann der Tastenton der Tasten an der ComStationCT ausgeschaltet werden. 

Die Einstellung “Tastenton Ein” wird jedoch empfohlen. 




Störungston leise, mittel, laut oder aus 

Warnung! Der Ton, der auf Störungen aufmerksam macht, darf nur dann ausgeschaltet 

werden, wenn sichergestellt ist, dass Störungen auf andere Art sicher angezeigt werden. 

Bei der Lautstärke des Störungstons kann gewählt werden zwischen leise, mittel und laut. 

Mit den Pfeiltasten “Störungston” markieren; dann Kreistaste drücken. 

Mit den Pfeiltasten “Leise”, „Mittel“, “Laut” oder „Aus“ markieren. 




Softwareversion der ComStationCT wird angezeigt. 


Tastenfunktion ausschalten / einschalten 

In der Werkseinstellung der ComStation CT sind die Alarmtaste und beide AW‐Tasten (AW = 

Anwesenheit) funktionsbereit. In begründeten Ausnahmefällen ist es möglich die 

Tastenfunktion von diesen Tasten auszuschalten. 

AW‐Taste 2 (gelb) 

00 8801 74, 06/10 (Rev. 1.0) 

Alarmtaste (blaues Symbol) 

AW‐Taste 1 (grün) 

Mit den Pfeiltasten “Tastenfunktion” markieren; dann Kreistaste drücken. 

Mit den Pfeiltasten gewünschte Taste (Alarmtaste oder AW‐Taste) markieren; 

dann Kreistaste drücken. 



Achtung! Ausgeschaltete Tasten sind im Pflegebetrieb nicht verfügbar! 







If required the ComStationCT key sound can be switched off. But the setting “Key sound On” 

is recommended. 




Fault tone volume soft, medium, loud or off 

Warning! The tone that attracts attention for a fault may only be turned off, if it is made sure, 

that the attention is attracted in another way. The volume of the fault tone can be set to soft, 

medium or loud. 

Mark “Fault Tone” using the arrow keys. Then press the circle key. 

Mark “Soft“, “Medium“, “Loud“ or „Off“ using the arrow keys. 




The ComStation's software version is displayed. 

Press the home key to return to the menu. 

Switching on or of the key function 

With the factory settings the alarm key and both presence keys are operational. In 

well‐founded exceptional cases you can switch of the key function for these keys. 

Presence Key 2 (yellow) 


Status 





Anzeige: OK: ComStationCT hat gemeldet, dass eingestellte RAN Anzahl gleich Anzahl 

funktionsbereiter Zimmergeräte ist. 

Anzeige: Fehler: ComStationCT hat gemeldet, dass eingestellte RAN Anzahl nicht gleich 

Anzahl funktionsbereiter Zimmergeräte ist. 


Test RAN 











Alarm Key (blue symbol) 

Presence Key 1 (green) 

Mark “Key Function” using the arrow keys. Then press the circle key. 

Mark the desired key (alarm key or presence key) using the arrow keys. Then 

press the circle key. 



Attention! Switched off keys are not available for nursing staff! 







77 0606 00 

ComStation CT Flamenco ® 

Status 





Display: OK: ComStation CT has reported: Stored RAN number is equal to the number of 


Display: Error: ComStation CT has reported: Stored RAN number is not equal to the 



Test RAN 
















Page 132 

74 0452 30 




Switch 

OSY- 

ControlCenter 

Power Supply 

Power Suply 

Netzgerät 

77340000 

+UPS/USV: 

77340100 

230V~ 

ST26 

NFxxa 

NFxxb 

11 

12 

In 

* 

= Option 

NF-a 11 

NF-b 12 

77 0610 00 

In= IY(St)Y 2x2x0,8 

Netzwerk 

CONNECTION 

COMBINATION 

ANSCHL.KOMBINATION 

04870010 

LCD-Monitor 

PrimusGlobal 

+ 


77070000 

SPRECHSTELLE 

TUNSTALL GmbH CONNECTION PLAN ANSCHLUSSPLAN 

Aend.-I. 

Gez. 

Page Gepr. 133 

Telephone 

for teleservice 

Telefon für 

Fernwartung 

80431900 

00064028 

LIMITER 

SHARK 

2,5m 

2,5m 

Art der Aend. Datum Name 

09.07.08 WENDKER 

ISDN 

IOIOIB/COM2 RJ45 

SYSTEM COMPUTER 

Speech Unit 

50070500A 


Order No.: / Best.-Nr.: 

77061000 

230V~ 

230V~ 

* 

230V~ 

USV 

230V~ 

21900000 

230V~ 

PC 

Drawing No.: / Zeichn.Nr.: 

97 1 1048 4 0 7


Page 134 


14.6 Interfaces in the room 

70 0360 10 IR TV control module universal 

70 0360 11 IR TV control module universal Audio 

70 0840 00 RAN interface normal call 

70 0841 00 RAN interface code blue / cardiac alarm 

70 0842 00 RAN interface telephone call 

70 0860 00 RAN interface TV 

70 0880 00 RAN interface with speech 

11 5350 00 Telephone interface relay 


Page 135 




IR TV-Steuermodul universal, Best.‐Nr. 70 0360 10 

Schnittstelle zur Steuerung eines handelsüblichen TV‐Geräts mit Infrarot‐Signalen. 



Voraussetzungen Requirements 

Steckvorrichtung Kombi (70 0424 00) und Steckvorrichtung Kombi Kanal (70 0434 00) ermögli‐ 

chen die TV‐Ansteuerung in Verbindung mit PBK Hand (74 0747 00), der RAN-Schnittstelle TV 

(70 0860 00) und IR TV-Steuermodul universal. 

IR TV-Steuermodul universal (70 0360 10) ermöglicht die Steuerung von handelsüblichen TV- 

Geräten mit Infrarot-Signalen. Zusätzlich erforderlich: Kabelsatz zum IR TV-Steuermodul 

(70 0360 20), Adressierstecker zum IR TV-Steuermodul (70 0360 30) und einmalig die Dienst‐ 

leistung Programmierung TV-Steuermodul (70 0360 50). 

Hinweis: Eine Tonübertragung zur PBK Hand findet nicht statt. 

Programmierung Programming 

00 8802 84, 03/11 (Rev. 3.0) 

IR TV control module universal, order no. 70 0360 10 

Interface for control of a standard TV set using infrared signals. 

Note! The complete installation of the system is described in the technical manual. 

Connection socket Combi (70 0424 00) and connection socket Combi bedhead unit 

(70 0434 00) allow TV control in combination with patient handset (74 0747 00), RAN 

interface TV (70 0860 00) and IR TV control module universal (70 0360 10). 

IR TV control module universal (70 0360 10) allows the control of standard TV sets using 

infrared signals. Additionally needed: Kit for IR TV control module (70 0360 20), Addressing 

plug for IR TV control module (70 0360 30) and one‐time TV control module programming 

service (70 0360 50). 

Note: No tone transmission to patient handset. 

Das IR TV‐Steuermodul ist erst funktionsfähig, wenn der Steuercode des benutzten TV‐Ge‐ Before the IR TV control module can be used, the control code of the used TV type has to 

rätetyps programmiert ist. Diese Programmierung wird von Tunstall GmbH durchgeführt 

(Bestell‐Nr. 70 0360 50). 

be programmed. This programming is done by Tunstall GmbH (order no. 70 0360 50). 


Befestigung an der Rückwand des TV‐Geräts z.B. mit Klebepads. Fixing on the back part of the TV set e.g. by using sticky pads. 

Betten zuordnen (Adressierung) Assigning beds (Addressing) 

In der Werkseinstellung wird das IR TV‐Steuermodul von allen angeschlossenen Patientenbe‐ 

diengeräten (PBK) angesteuert. So ändern Sie die Einstellung: 

1. Um das IR TV‐Steuermodul in den Adressiermodus zu versetzen, stecken Sie den 

Adressierstecker (Bestell‐Nr. 70 0360 30) in die mittlere Buchse. 

Nach ca. 5 Sekunden wechselt das IR TV‐Steuermodul in den Adressiermodus. 

2. Drücken Sie nacheinander an allen PBKs, die dieses TV‐Gerät steuern sollen, die Taste 

”TV einschalten” bzw. ”TV‐Programm vorwärts”. 

3. Ziehen Sie den Adressierstecker wieder ab. 

Die Betten sind zugeordnet. 

Hinweis! Wenn der Adressierstecker gesteckt und wieder abgezogen wird, ohne dass eine 

PBK ausgelöst wird, werden die Befehle von allen angeschlossenen PBKs akzeptiert 

(Auslieferungszustand). Es gilt immer die zuletzt gelernte Einstellung. 

Entertainment 

ELA 

Ie 

70 0424 00 

70 0860 00 

RAN 

PBK Hand 

Patient handset 

74 0747 00 

Daten 

Data 

74 0747 00 

00 0280 40 

70 0360 10 

00 0280 40 

70 0360 10 

Page 136 

With factory settings the IR TV control module is controlled by all connected patient handsets. 

This is how you change this setting: 

1. Plug the addressing plug (order no. 70 0360 30) into the middle socket. 

After 5 seconds the IR TV control module changes to addressing mode. 

2. Press in succession the button ”TV on” / ”Programme +” at all patient units, which shall 

control the TV set. 

3. Disconnect the addressing plug. 

Thr beds are assigned. 

Note! If you press no button between plugging and disconnecting the addressing plug, the 

IR TV control module is controlled by all connected patient handsets (delivery state). 

Always the last learned setting is valid. 

70 0360 20 

IR 

Adressierstecker 

Addressing plug 

70 0360 30 

IR 

70 0360 10 

IR 

70 0360 10 

IR TV-Steuermodul universal 

IR TV control module universal

OSYnet + Ip 

OSYnet + Ip 

Anschlussplan (Beispiel) D Connection Diagram (example) GB 

Is 

47 

47 

00 8802 84, 03/11 (Rev. 3.0 ) 

1 2 

34 

5 

67 

Bed 2 / Bett 2 



77 0510 00 

70 0360 10 

70 0360 10 

for mounting to 35 mm rail 

Montagefüße für 

Tragschiene 35 mm 

IR 

RJ 45 connection 

IR 

70 0360 20 

70 0360 20 

70 0360 20 

00 0280 39 surface / Aufputz 

00 0280 40 recesssed / Unterputz 

socket 

RJ 45 Dose 

2 

3 

7 

70 0360 20 


socket 



TV control signals / TV−Steuersignale 

3 

2 

3 

7 

RJ 45 Dose 

3 

7 

2 

6 

7 

3 

RJ 45 

Western socket 

Westernbuchse 

3 


0V 

RAN 

+24V 

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 

70 0860 00 

+24V 

3 

1 

Uout+ 

6 

2 

Uout− 

7 

3 

1 x per room RAN interface TV 

1 x pro Zimmer RAN-Schnittstelle TV 

8 

Connection 11 

field 

2 

Anschlussfeld 

The shielded cores for LS and MIC are a twisted pair 

and should be stripped to a maximum of 30 mm! 

Die abgeschirmte Leitungen für LS und MIC sind 

paarig verseilt und dürfen max. 30 mm abgemantelt 

werden. 

Connection field supply unit: 

Anschlussfeld Versorgungseinheit: 

Uout+ 

Uout− 

+24V 

Page 137 

40 

39 

38 


Bed number: 

0V 

LS 

SCHB 

TV4a 

TV2a 

0V 

0V 

MIC 

TV4b 

TV2b 

74 0747 00 

Jumpers 

position 

Set 

jumper 

Bed 

number 

TV3a 

ELA5a 

ELA4a 

TV3b 

ELA5b 

ELA4b 

P3 P2 P1 

Bed 1 = P1 

Bed 2 = P2 

Bed 3 = P1, P2 

Bed 4 = P3 

Bed 5 = P1, P3 

Bed 6 = P2, P3 

20 

18 

39 

37 

35 

33 

31 

29 

27 

25 

23 

21 

19 

17 

15 

13 

11 

9 

7 

5 

3 

1 

ELA3a 

ELA2a 

0V 

0V 

ELA3b 

ELA2b 

0V 

0V 


74 0747 00 

Supply unit / Versorgungseinheit 


24 V wire links / Drahtbrücken − 0 V 

(mandatory / unbedingt erforderlich) 

FB4 

FB2 

RAN 

0V 

FB3 

FB1 

LT2 

ELA1b 

TV1b 

0V 

0V 

ELA1a 

3 

2 

1 

+24V 

+24V 

40 

38 

36 

34 

32 

30 

28 

26 

24 

22 

20 

18 

16 

14 

12 

10 

8 

6 

4 

2 

Bettennummer: 

70 0434 00 70 0434 00 

Jumper Lage der 

steckt Jumper 

Betten 

Nummer 

Bett 1 = P1 

Bett 2 = P2 

Bett 3 = P1,P2 

Bett 4 = P3 



TV1a 

+24V 

P3 P2 P1 



Notes: 

- Setting of bed numbers and other options are effected by placing jumpers in the 

appropriate positions at connection socket (70 0434 00). 

- When using bed number 6 no diagnostic call can be used. 

Hinweise: 

- Die Einstellung der Bettennummer und der anderen Optionen erfolgt durch Jumper 

auf der jeweiligen Steckvorrichtung (70 0434 00). 

- Bei Verwendung von Bettennummer 6 kann kein Diagnostikruf verwendet werden. 

Werkseinstellung 




IR TV-Steuermodul universal Audio, Best.‐Nr. 70 0360 11 

Schnittstelle zur Steuerung eines handelsüblichen TV‐Geräts mit Infrarot‐Signalen. 

Integrierter Audioverstärker zur Ansteuerung eines Bediengeräts. Die Ausgangslautstärke 

kann mit einem Programmiergerät in definierten Grenzen geregelt werden. Beim Einsatz ist 

die Abstimmung der Audiopegel mit den eingesetzten Endgeräten zu beachten. 



Voraussetzungen Requirements 

Steckvorrichtung Kombi, TVL (70 0424 50) und Steckvorrichtung Kombi Kanal, TVL 

(70 0434 50) ermöglichen die TV‐Ansteuerung in Verbindung mit PBK Hand (74 0747 00), 

der RAN-Schnittstelle TV (70 0860 00) und dem IR TV-Steuermodul Audio (70 0360 11). 

Achtung! Bei den Steckvorrichtungen handelt es sich um Modelle, die nur für diese 

Anwendung benutzt werden. 

IR TV-Steuermodul universal Audio ermöglicht die Steuerung und Tonübertragung von 

handelsüblichen TV-Geräten mit Infrarot-Signalen. Zusätzlich erforderlich: Kabelsatz zum 

IR TV-Steuermodul Audio (70 0360 21), Adressierstecker zum IR TV-Steuermodul 

(70 0360 30) und einmalig die Dienstleistung Programmierung TV-Steuermodul 

(70 0360 50). 

Programmierung Programming 

Das IR TV‐Steuermodul ist erst funktionsfähig, wenn der Steuercode des benutzten 

TV‐Gerätetyps programmiert ist. Diese Programmierung wird von Tunstall GmbH 

durchgeführt (Bestell‐Nr. 70 0360 50). 


00 8802 85, 03/11 (Rev. 3.0) 

IR TV control module universal Audio, order no. 70 0360 11 

Interface for control of a standard TV set using infrared signals. Integrated audio amplifier 

for control of a patient handset. The output volume can be adjusted within definite limits 

using a programming tool. The audio levels have to be adapted to the patient handsets. 


Connection socket Combi, TVL (70 0424 50) and connection socket Combi, TVL bedhead 

unit (70 0434 50) allow TV control in combination with patient handset (74 0747 00), RAN 

interface TV (70 0860 00) and IR TV control module universal Audio (70 0360 11). 

Warning! These connections sockets are used only for this application. 

IR TV control module universal Audio allows the control and tone transmission from 

standard TV sets using infrared signals. Additionally needed: Kit for IR TV control module 

Audio (70 0360 21), Addressing plug for IR TV control module (70 0360 30) and one-time 

TV control module programming service (70 0360 50). 

Before the IR TV control module can be used, the control code of the used TV model has to 

be programmed. This programming is done by Tunstall GmbH (order no. 70 0360 50). 

Befestigung an der Rückwand des TV‐Geräts z.B. mit Klebepads. Fixing on the back part of the TV set e.g. by using sticky pads. 

Betten zuordnen (Adressierung) Assigning beds (Addressing) 

Im Auslieferungszustand wird das IR TV‐Steuermodul von allen angeschlossenen Patienten‐ 

bediengeräten (PBK) angesteuert. So ändern Sie die Einstellung: 

1. Um das IR TV‐Steuermodul in den Adressiermodus zu versetzen, stecken Sie den 

Adressierstecker (Bestell‐Nr. 70 0360 30) in die zweite Buchse von links. 

Nach ca. 5 Sekunden wechselt das IR TV‐Steuermodul in den Adressiermodus. 

2. Drücken Sie nacheinander an allen PBKs, die dieses TV‐Gerät steuern sollen, die Taste 

”TV einschalten” bzw. ”TV‐Programm vorwärts”. 

3. Ziehen Sie den Adressierstecker wieder ab. 

Die Betten sind zugeordnet. 

Hinweis! Wenn der Adressierstecker gesteckt und wieder abgezogen wird, ohne dass eine 

PBK ausgelöst wird, werden die Befehle von allen angeschlossenen PBKs akzeptiert 

(Auslieferungszustand). Es gilt immer die zuletzt gelernte Einstellung. 

Entertainment 

ELA 

Ie 

70 0424 50 

RAN 

70 0860 00 

PBK Hand 

Patient handset 

74 0747 00 

Daten 

Data 

Ton 

Tone 

74 0747 00 

00 0280 40 

00 0280 40 

70 0360 11 

70 0360 11 

In delivery state the IR TV control module is controlled by all connected patient handsets. This 

is how you change this setting: 

1. Plug the addressing plug (order no. 70 0360 30) into the second socket from the left. 

After 5 seconds the IR TV control module changes to addressing mode. 

2. Press in succession the button ”TV on” / ”Programme +” at all patient units, which shall 

control the TV set. 

3. Disconnect the addressing plug. 

The beds are assigned. 

Note! If you press no button between plugging and disconnecting the addressing plug, the 

IR TV control module is controlled by all connected patient handsets (delivery state). 

Always the last learned setting is valid. 

70 0360 21 

SCART 

IR 

Adressierstecker 

Addressing plug 

70 0360 30 

Page 138 

Scart 

IR 

SCART 

70 0360 11 

IR 

70 0360 11 

IR TV-Steuermodul universal Audio 

IR TV control module universal Audio

OSYnet + Ip 

OSYnet + Ip 


Is 

47 

47 

00 8802 85, 03/11 (Rev. 3.0) 

12 34 

5 

67 




77 0510 00 

70 0360 11 

70 0360 11 




70 0360 21 70 0360 21 


IR 

IR 

70 0360 21 

70 0360 21 

70 0360 21 



socket 

RJ 45 Dose 

2 

3 

7 1 

70 0360 21 

00 0280 39 surface / Aufputz RJ 45 connection 

00 0280 40 recesssed / Unterputz socket 

RJ 45 Dose 

2 


3 

3 

7 

1 

6 

TV tone 1 / TV −Ton 1 

2 

6 

3 

7 

2 

TV tone 2 / TV−Ton 2 

2 

6 

7 

3 


2 

RJ 45 


Westernbuchse 

3 

70 0860 00 

1 

Uout+ 

2 

3 

7 Uout− 

6 

3 

1 x per room RAN interface TV 

1 x pro Zimmer RAN-Schnittstelle TV 

+24V 

4 

5 

31 

32 

1 

6 

1 

6 


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 

0V 

RAN 

+24V 

8 

11 

2 

Connection 

field 

Anschlussfeld 

TVb 

Uout− 

Uout+ 

TVa 

The shielded cores for LS and MIC are a twisted pair and 

should be stripped to a maximum of 30 mm! 

Die abgeschirmte Leitungen für LS und MIC sind paarig 

verseilt und dürfen max. 30 mm abgemantelt werden. 



+24V 

Page 139 

40 

39 

38 


TV tone channel: 

Bed number: 

0V 

LS 

SCHB 

TV4a 

TV2a 

0V 

0V 

MIC 

TV4b 

TV2b 

74 0747 00 

Jumpers 

position 

Jumpers 

position 

Set 

jumper 

Bed 

number 

70 0434 50 

TV3a 

ELA5a 

ELA4a 

TV3b 

ELA5b 

ELA4b 

− For stellate TV tone 

set as bed number 

− Where TV tone is parallel, 

select tone channel 1 

P3 P2 P1 

Bed 1 = P1 

Bed 2 = P2 

Bed 3 = P1, P2 

Bed 4 = P3 

Bed 5 = P1, P3 

Bed 6 = P2, P3 

20 

18 

39 

37 

35 

33 

31 

29 

27 

25 

23 

21 

19 

17 

15 

13 

11 

9 

7 

5 

3 

1 

ELA3a 

ELA2a 

0V 

0V 

ELA3b 

ELA2b 

0V 

0V 


74 0747 00 




(mandatory / unbedingt erforderlich) 

FB4 

FB2 

RAN 

0V 

FB3 

FB1 

LT2 

ELA1b 

TV1b 

0V 

0V 

ELA1a 

3 

2 

1 

+24V 

+24V 

40 

38 

36 

34 

32 

30 

28 

26 

24 

22 

20 

18 

16 

14 

12 

10 

8 

6 

4 

2 

TV-Tonkanal: 

Bettennummer: 

70 0434 50 

Jumper Lage der Lage der 

steckt Jumper 

Jumper 

Betten 

Nummer 

−Bei sternförmigen 

TV−Ton wie Betten− 

nummer einstellen. 

−Bei parallelem TV−Ton 

auf Tonkanal 1 einstellen. 

Bett 1 = P1 

Bett 2 = P2 


Bett 4 = P3 



TV1a 

+24V 

P3 P2 P1 



Notes: 




Hinweise: 




werkseitige Einstellung 




RAN‐Schnittstelle Normalruf, Best.‐Nr. 70 0840 00 

Schnittstelle zur Verbindung von Rufgeräten mit dem Zimmerbus (RAN). Die Schnittstelle 

stellt einen Schalteingang für Normalruf und einen Ausgang als Finde- und Beruhigungs‐ 

licht zur Verfügung. Über Codierschalter kann der Ruf mit einer Bettenkennung versehen 

werden. 

RAN‐Schnittstelle Normalruf mit automatischer Rufabstellung, Best.‐Nr. 70 0840 01 

wie 70 0840 00, jedoch mit automatischer Rufabstellung. Der Ruf wird automatisch 

abgestellt, wenn der Kontakt des angeschlossenen Rufgeräts wieder geöffnet wird. 

Achtung: Die RAN‐Schnittstelle, Bestell‐Nr. 70 0840 01, funktioniert erst, wenn eine 

Bettennummer eingestellt wurde, siehe B. 

RAN‐Schnittstelle Alarmruf, Best.‐Nr. 70 0841 00 

Schnittstelle zur Verbindung von Rufgeräten mit dem Zimmerbus (RAN). Die Schnittstelle 

stellt einen Schalteingang für Alarmruf und einen Ausgang als Finde- und Beruhigungslicht 

zur Verfügung. 

RAN‐Schnittstelle Alarmruf mit automatischer Rufabstellung, Best.‐Nr. 70 0841 01 

wie 70 0841 00, jedoch mit automatischer Rufabstellung. Der Ruf wird automatisch 

abgestellt, wenn der Kontakt des angeschlossenen Rufgeräts wieder geöffnet wird. 





Vorsicht! Führen Sie die Installation nur im spannungsfreien Zustand aus. Sonst 

könnte die RAN‐Schnittstelle beschädigt werden. 


Montage der RAN‐Schnittstellen mit den mitgelieferten Halterungen auf eine 

35 mm‐Z-Schiene oder in eine Einbaudose. 


Schaltausgang 

Uout = 24 V; Iout max. = 10 mA 

Findelichtfunktion 

IFL max. = 0,5 mA 

Externer Taster S1 

min. Schaltstrom: 0,1 mA, 5 V DC 

max. Leitungslänge an Punkt 4, 5, 6, 7 = 5 m 

00 8800 45, 09/11 (Rev. 7.0) 

RAN interface normal call, order no. 70 0840 00 

Interface for connection of call devices to the room bus (RAN). The interface has a 

switching input for normal calls and an output for location and reassurance light. The bed 

identification can be set by coding switches. 

RAN interface normal call with automatic call cancelling, order no. 70 0840 01 

as 70 0840 00, but with automatic call cancelling. The call is cancelled, when the contact of 

the connected call device is opened again. 

Attention: The RAN interface, order no. 70 0840 01, only works, after a bed number has 

been set, see B. 

RAN interface code blue / cardiac alarm, order no. 70 0841 00 

Interface for connection of call devices to the room bus (RAN). The interface has a 

switching input for codes blue / cardiac alarm and an output for location and reassurance 

light. 

RAN interface code blue/cardiac alarm with automatic call cancelling, order no. 70 0841 01 

as 70 0841 00, but with automatic call cancelling. The call is cancelled, when the contact of 

the connected call device is opened again. 


manual. 



Caution! During installation the power supply should be switched off to ensure 

zero-potential status. Otherwise, the RAN interface could be damaged. 

Mounting the RAN interface with the delivered mounts on a 35 mm Z-rail or in a back box. 

Switch output 

Uout = 24 V; Iout max. = 10 mA 

Location light function 

ILL max. = 0.5 mA 

External switch S1 

min. switching current: 0.1 mA, 5 V DC 

max. wiring length at point 4, 5, 6, 7 = 5 m 

Bettennummer einstellen (nur bei 70 0840 00, 70 0840 01) Setting bed number (only for 70 0841 00, 70 0841 01) 

An der RAN-Schnittstelle Normalruf mit automatischer Rufabstellung (70 0840 01) muss die 

entsprechende Bettennummer eingestellt werden. An der RAN-Schnittstelle Normalruf (70 

0840 00) kann die entsprechende Bettennummer eingestellt werden. 

Hierzu werden Codierschalter 1, 2 und 3 verwendet. 

*1 Achtung! Bei Bettennummer 6 im Zimmer kann kein Diagnostikruf verwendet werden. 

Hinweis: Wenn die Einstellung der Bettennummer geändert wurde, muss ein Reset für 

diese RAN‐Schnittstelle durchgeführt werden, d.h. 24 Volt ausschalten und anschließend 

wieder einschalten. 

RAN 

S 1 

70 0840 0X 

RAN-Schnittstelle Normalruf 

RAN interface normal call 

70 0840 00 

70 0840 01 

70 0841 00 

70 0841 01 

ON 

1 2 3 4 5 

Codierschalter 5: 

Funktion des Tasters 

ON = Öffner 

OFF = Schließer 

Coding switch 5: 

switch function 

ON = normally closed contact 

OFF = normally open contact 

Page 140 

At the RAN interface normal call with automatic call cancelling (70 0840 01) the corresponding 

bed number has to be set. At the RAN interface normal call (70 0840 00) the corresponding bed 

number can be set. 

For this, use the code switches 1, 2 and 3. 

*1 Attention: If there is bed number 6 in the room, a diagnostic call cannot be used. 

Note: After the bed number setting was changed, this RAN interface must be reset by switching 

off and on the 24 V power supply. 

Codierschalter 

Coding switches 

70 0840 00 

70 0840 01 

ON 

1 2 3 4 5 

70 0841 0X 

RAN-Schnittstelle Alarmruf 

RAN interface code blue / cardiac alarm 

Werkseinstellung: 

4 = OFF, nicht verändern! 

Factory setting: 

4 = OFF, do not change! 

Bett 

Bed 

= 0 

= 1 

= 2 

= 3 

= 4 

= 5 

= 6*1


RAN-Schnittstelle Telefonruf, Best.‐Nr. 70 0842 00 

Schnittstelle zur Verbindung eines Telefonanschaltrelais (Bestell‐Nr. 11 5350 00) oder eines 

Telefonkontaktes an den Zimmerbus (RAN). 








Montage der RAN‐Schnittstellen mit den mitgelieferten Halterungen auf eine 

35 mm‐Z-Schiene oder in eine Einbaudose. 


Anschlussfeld vom ComTerminal 

ComTerminal's connection field 

0V 

RAN 

+24V 

00 8800 45, 09/11 (Rev. 7.0) 

Zur Leitungsführung des Zimmerbus RAN 

lesen Sie das Technische Handbuch. 

For the arrangement of the room bus RAN 

please refer to the technical manual. 

0V 

1 

RAN 

2 

+24V 

3 

5 

4 

RAN interface telephone call, order no. 70 0842 00 

Interface for connection of a telephone interface relay (order no. 11 5350 00) to the room bus 

(RAN). 


manual. 





Mounting the RAN interface with the delivered mounts on a 35 mm Z-rail or in a back box. 

11 5350 00 


Telephone interface relais 

70 0842 00 

RAN‐Schnittstelle Telefonruf 

RAN interface telephone call 

70 0842 00 

RAN-Schnittstelle Telefonruf 


Page 141 

Telefonnetz 

Telephone network 

77 0182 10 

Zimmerleuchte Universal 

Room lamp Universal 

weißes Leuchtfeld 

white light section 




RAN-Schnittstelle TV, Best.‐Nr. 70 0860 00 

Schnittstelle zur Verbindung des Zimmerbus (RAN) und der Fernsehsteuerung. 

In Verbindung mit PBK Hand und Steckvorrichtung Kombi (70 0424 00) / Steckvorrichtung 

Kombi Kanal (70 0434 00) steht die Möglichkeit der Bedienung des Patientenfernsehens 

zur Verfügung. 

Die Schnittstelle überträgt alle erforderlichen Signale zur Bedienung für die Fernsehsteue‐ 

rung. 

Hinweis! Dieser RAN-Teilnehmer muss nicht am Raumterminal (z.B. ComTerminal) 

angemeldet werden. Wenn eine RAN-Schnittstelle TV installiert wird, ändern Sie die 

Anzahl der RAN-Teilnehmer am Raumterminal nicht. 








00 8800 68, 03/11 (Rev. 5.0) 

RAN interface TV, order no. 70 0860 00 

Interface for connection of TV control to the room bus (RAN). 

With the patient handset plugged into the connection socket combi (70 0424 00) or connection 

socket comb bedhead unit (70 0434 00), the patient is able to control the TV. 

The interface transmits all of required signals to operate the TV control. 

Note! This RAN user has not to be registered at the room terminal (e.g. ComTerminal). If a 

RAN interface TV is installed, do not change the RAN number at the room terminal. 


manual. 





Einbau in medizinische Versorgungseinheit oder in eine Einbaudose. Installation in the medical supply unit or a back box. 

Bettennummer einstellen Setting bed number 

Die Einstellung der Bettennummer und der anderen Optionen erfolgt durch Jumper auf der 

jeweiligen Steckvorrichtung (70 0434 00). 

Achtung! Bei Bettennummer 6 im Zimmer kann kein Diagnostikruf verwendet werden. 

47 

12 34 

5 

67 

47 

Montagefüße für Tragschiene 35 mm 

Mounts for mounting on 35 mm supporting rail 

70 0860 00 

RAN-Schnittstelle TV 

RAN interface TV 

Page 142 

Setting of bed numbers and other options are effected by placing jumpers in the appropriate 

positions at connection socket (70 0434 00). 

Attention: If there is bed number 6 in the room, a diagnostic call cannot be used. 

RAN 

zur TV-Steuereinheit 

to TV control unit 

Schaltausgang 

Output 

Uout = 24 V 

Iout max. = 10 mA 

Anschlusspunkte 6 und 7: 

max. Leitungslänge 12 m 

Connection points 6 and 7: 

max. cable length 12 m


OSYnet + Ip 

OSYnet + Ip 

Is 

47 

47 

00 8800 68, 03/11 (Rev. 5.0) 

12 34 

5 

67 


77 0510 00 



TV control module 

TV-Steuermodul 

70 0360 01 

74 7002 26 

74 7002 32 

74 7002 42 

or / oder 

or / oder 

TV control module 

TV-Steuermodul 

70 0360 01 

74 7002 26 

or / oder 74 7002 32 

or / oder 74 7002 42 





socket 

RJ 45 Dose 


socket 

RJ 45 Dose 





3 

7 1 


2 

3 

7 

1 

6 

TV tone 1 / TV −Ton 1 

2 

6 

3 

7 


2 

6 

7 


2 

RJ 45 


Westernbuchse 

2 

Uout+ 

Uout− 

70 0860 00 

1 

6 

2 

7 

3 

1 x per room 

1 x pro Zimmer 

4 

5 

31 

32 

1 

6 

1 

6 


0V 

RAN 

+24V 

8 

11 

2 

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 

The shielded cores for LS and MIC are a twisted pair and 

should be stripped to a maximum of 30 mm! 

Die abgeschirmte Leitungen für LS und MIC sind paarig 

verseilt und dürfen max. 30 mm abgemantelt werden. 

Connection 

field 

Anschlussfeld 

RAN interface TV 

RAN-Schnittstelle TV 



Page 143 

40 

39 

38 


TV tone channel: 

Bed number: 

OV 

LS 

SCHB 

TV4a 

TV2a 

OV 

OV 

MIC 

TV4b 

TV2b 

74 0747 00 

Jumpers 

position 

Jumpers 

position 

Set 

jumper 

Bed 

number 

70 0434 00 

TV3a 

ELA5a 

ELA4a 

TV3b 

ELA5b 

ELA4b 

− For stellate TV tone 

set as bed number 

− Where TV tone is parallel, 

select tone channel 1 

P3 P2 P1 

Bed 1 = P1 

Bed 2 = P2 

Bed 3 = P1, P2 

Bed 4 = P3 

Bed 5 = P1, P3 

Bed 6 = P2, P3 

20 

18 

39 

37 

35 

33 

31 

29 

27 

25 

23 

21 

19 

17 

15 

13 

11 

9 

7 

5 

3 

1 

ELA3a 

ELA2a 

OV 

OV 

ELA3b 

ELA2b 

OV 

OV 


74 0747 00 




(manatory / unbedingt erforderlich) 

FB4 

FB2 

RAN 

OV 

FB3 

FB1 

70 0434 00 

LT2 

ELA1b 

TV1b 

OV 

OV 

ELA1a 

3 

2 

1 

+24V 

+24V 

40 

38 

36 

34 

32 

30 

28 

26 

24 

22 

20 

18 

16 

14 

12 

10 

8 

6 

4 

2 

TV-Tonkanal: 

Bettennummer: 

Jumper Lage der Lage der 

steckt Jumper 

Jumper 

Betten 

Nummer 

−Bei sternförmigen 

TV−Ton wie Betten− 

nummer einstellen. 

−Bei parallelem TV−Ton 

auf Tonkanal 1 einstellen. 

Bett 1 = P1 

Bett 2 = P2 


Bett 4 = P3 



TV1a 

+24V 

P3 P2 P1 



Notes: 




Hinweise: 




werkseitige Einstellung 




RAN‐Schnittstelle mit Sprechen, Best.‐Nr. 70 0880 00 

Schnittstelle zum Anschluss eines Patiententerminals an den Zimmerbus (RAN). 








Die RAN-Schnittstelle wird in eine zweiteilige Einbaudose eingebaut oder mittels der zwei 

Halterungen auf einer 35 mm-Z-Schiene befestigt. 

MIC 

LS 

SCH 

0V 

+24V 

RAN 

Halterungen mounts 


Zimmerbus RAN 

0V 

00 8801 00, 01/09 (Rev. 5.0) 

MIC−IN 

LS−OUT 

MIC−GND 

0V 

+24V 

BL 

RT 

Interne Verbindung zur Steckvorrichtung 

z.B. MediSET GS 

Leitungslänge max. 5 m 

(Details siehe Installationsunterlagen des Herstellers) 

RAN interface with speech, order no. 70 0880 00 

Interface for connecting a patient terminal to the room bus (RAN). 


manual. 





The RAN interface is mounted into a 2-gang back box or is fixed on a 35 mm Z rail by the two 

mounts. 

MIC 

LS 

SCH 

0V 

+24V 

RAN 

Room bus RAN 

0V 

. . 

MIC−IN 

LS−OUT 

MIC−GND 

0V 

+24V 

BL 

RT 

Internal connection to connection socket 

e.g. MediSET GS 

Cable length max. 5 m 

(For details refer to manufacturer's instructions) 

Bettennummer einstellen Setting the bed number 

Über die Jumper auf der Leiterplatte kann die entsprechende Bettennummer eingestellt 

werden. Hierzu werden Codierschalter 1, 2 und 3 verwendet. 

Use the jumpers on the board to set the appropriate bed number. Use code switches 1, 2, 3. 

= Bett 1 

= Bed 1 

= Bett 2 

= Bett 3 

= Bett 4 

= Bed 2 

= Bed 3 

= Bed 4 

= Bett 5 

= Bed 5 

= Bett 6 *1 

= Bed 6 *1 

*1 Achtung: Bei Bettennummer 6 kann kein Diagnostikruf verwendet werden. *1 Attention: Diagnostic call not possible with bed number 6. 

70 0880 00 

RAN-Schnittstelle mit Sprechen 

RAN interface with speech 

Page 144



Telefonanschaltrelais, Best.‐Nr. 11 5350 00 

zur Anschaltung von analogen Telefonen an eine Rufanlage, zur Weiterleitung von Anrufen 

als Telefonruf. 

Rufspannung: 32 - 80 V AC 

Stromversorgung: 5 - 40 V 

EIN-/AUS-Schalter 

Schaltausgang: Wechselkontakt 

Rufpausenüberbrückung einstellbar 

Schaltdauer des Ausgangskontakts einstellbar 

Abmessungen (HxBxT): 70 x 35 x 70 mm 

Montage auf 35 mm-Hutschiene 

Hinweis! Die vollständige Installation des Systems ist im Technischen Handbuch 

beschrieben. 


1. Schalten Sie die Anlage spannungsfrei. 

2. Setzen Sie das Telefonanschaltrelais auf die Hutschiene und lassen es einrasten. 

3. Anschlüsse wie in der folgenden Abbildung gezeigt vornehmen. 

4. Anlage wieder in Betrieb nehmen. 

5. Schalten Sie das Telefonanschaltrelais ein, indem Sie den EIN/AUS-Schalter 

eindrücken. 


Anschlussfeld vom ComTerminal 

ComTerminal's connection field 

0V 

RAN 

+24V 

00 8801 70, 10/11 (Rev. 2.0) 

Zur Leitungsführung des Zimmerbus RAN 

lesen Sie das Technische Handbuch. 

For the arrangement of the room bus RAN 

please refer to the technical manual. 

0V 

1 

RAN 

2 

+24V 

3 

Telephone interface relay, order no. 11 5350 00 

for connecting analogues telephones to a nurse call system. A telephone call will be 

displayed as a call in the nurse call system. 

Call voltage: 32 - 80 V AC 

Power supply: 5 - 40 V 

ON/OFF switch (ON = EIN, OFF = AUS) 

Output: N/C, N/O contact 

Bridging of call intervalls can be set 

Power-on time can be set. 

Dimensions (HxWxD): 70 x 35 x 70 mm 

Mounting on a 35 mm top hat rail. 

5 

4 


manual. 

1. Power down the equipment. 

2. Place the telephone interface relay on the top hat rail and click it into place. 

3. Connect as shown in the diagram below. 

4. Restart the equipment. 

5. Switch on the telephone interface relay by pressing down the ON/OFF switch. 

11 5350 00 


Telephone interface relais 

70 0842 00 

RAN‐Schnittstelle Telefonruf 


Telefonnetz 

Telephone network 

Potentiometer einstellen Potentiometer Setting 

Wenn das Telefonanschaltrealis eingeschaltet ist, wird der Schaltkontakt geschlossen, 

sobald die Telefonrufspannung anliegt. Wie lange der Schaltkontakt geschlossen bleibt, 

hängt davon ab, wie die beiden Potentiometer “Rufpausenüberbrückung“ und 

“Einschaltdauer“ eingestellt sind. 

Rufpausenunterdrückung einstellen 

Mit dem Potentiometer zur Rufpausenüberbrückung wird die Zeit festgelegt, die der 

Schaltkontakt länger geschlossen ist, als das Telefonanschaltrelais angesteuert wird. Der 

Einstellbereich ist linear geteilt und liegt zwischen 0 und 12 Sekunden. Ist die eingestellte 

Zeit größer als die Pause bei der Ansteuerung durch die Telefonrufspannung, so bedeutet 

dies, dass der Schaltkontakt ohne Unterbrechung geschlossen bleibt, bis die gesamte 

Ansteuerung abgebrochen wird (Ende des Rufes). Ist die eingestellte Zeit kleiner als die 

Ansteuerungspause, so ergibt sich die Schalt zeit des Kontaktes aus der 

Signalisierungszeit, verlängert um die eingestellte Überbrückungszeit. 

Einschaltdauer einstellen 

Mit dem Potentiometer für die Einschaltdauer kann die Zeit, in der der Schaltkontakt 

geschlossen ist, begrenzt werden. Der Einstellbereich ist nicht linear geteilt und liegt 

zwischen 0,25 und ca. 12 Sekunden. Wird das Potentiometer auf “Dauer“ gestellt, so 

bedeutet dies keine Begrenzung, d. h. der Schaltkontakt bleibt bis zum Ende der 

Ansteuerung geschlossen. 

11 5350 00 


Telephone interface relay 

Page 145 

77 0182 10 

Zimmerleuchte Universal 

Room lamp Universal 

weißes Leuchtfeld 

white light section 

When the telephone interface relay is operational, the switching contact is closed as soon 

as the telephone signal voltage is applied. It depends on the setting of the two 

potentiometers “bridging of call intervals“ and “power-on time” how long the switching 

contact remains closed. 

Setting bridging of call intervals (“Rufpausenunterdrückung”) 

The potentiometer for the bridging of call intervals sets the period the switching contact 

remains closed longer than the telephone interface relay is actuated. The setting range is 

linear and lies between 0 and 12 seconds. If the selected time is longer than the actuation 

intervals by the telephone call voltage the switching contact remains closed without 

interruption until the actuation stops (end of call). If the selected time is shorter than the 

actuation interval the switching time of the contact results from the signal period plus the 

selected bridging time. 

Setting power-on time (“Einschaltdauer”) 

The potentiometer for power-on time setting allows to limit the time the switching contact 

remains closed. The setting range is not linear and lies between 0.25 and about 12 

seconds. If the potentiometer is set for permanent (“Dauer”) the switching contact is not 

limited and remains closed up to the end of actuation.


Page 146 


14.7 Interfaces in the group 

77 0801 00 OSYlink‐Door entry speaker 

77 0802 00 OSYlink‐Group lamp 

77 0803 00 OSYlink‐Universal 

77 0804 00 OSYlink‐Announcement 


Page 147 




OSYlink‐Türsprechstelle, Best.‐Nr. 77 0801 00 

Schnittstelle zum Anschluss einer Türsprechstelle, Bestell‐Nr. 77 0350 00, an den 

Gruppenbus (OSYnet). 

2‐Draht‐Anschluss zur Türsprechstelle (inkl. Daten und Sprache) 

Anschluss für Türöffner‐Transformator 12 V AC 

Eingang zur lokalen Ruflöschung in Verbindung mit einem separaten Taster (Schließer 

nach 24 V) 

Max. Stromaufnahme: 380 mA 





00 8802 34, 06/06 (Rev. 1.0) 

OSYlink-Door Entry Speaker, order no. 77 0801 00 

Interface for connecting a door entry speaker, order no. 77 0350 00, to the group bus 

(OSYnet). 

2‐wire‐connection to the door entry speaker (including data and speech) 

Connection for door opener transformer 12 V AC 

Input for local call cancelling in combination with a separate switch (N/O contact to 24 V) 

Max. current consumption: 380 mA 


manual. 




Wahlweise Montage auf Hutschiene oder Wandmontage 

Optionally mounting on supporting rail or wall mounting. 

A1: Montage auf Hutschiene (35 mm) 

A1: Mounting on supporting rail (35 mm) 

OSYlink 1 auf die Hutschiene 3 aufklipsen, bis es einrastet. 

Click the OSYlink 1 onto the supporting rail 3. 

A2: Wandmontage 

1. Die drei Befestigungsclips 2 soweit herausschieben, bis die Öffnungen für die 

Schrauben 4 frei liegen. 

2. OSYlink 1 an der Wand festschrauben. 

A2: Wall mounting 

1. Push out the three fixing clips 2 until the holes for the screws 4 appear. 

2. Screw the OSYlink 1 to the wall. 


Zum Einstellen der Adresse auf der Leiterplatte dienen die Codierschalter 1 bis 7 mit den 





Codierschalter 8 und 9 nicht verändern! Werkseitige Einstellung: OFF. 

Reset 

Um einen Hardware-Reset durchzuführen, den Codierschalter 10 für eine Sekunde auf ON 

und anschließend wieder auf OFF stellen. Ein Hardware-Reset muss durchgeführt werden, 

wenn eine Codierschalterstellung verändert wurde. Sonst werden die geänderten 

Einstellungen nicht übernommen. 

For setting the address on the printed circuit board please use the code switches 1 to 7 with 

the values 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64. Set the appropriate switch to ON. 

Examples: Address 1 is set by using the code switch 1. Address 4 is set by code switch 3. 

Address 24 is selected through addition, coding switch 4 and 5 (8 + 16 = 24). 

Do not change code switches 8 and 9! Factory set: OFF. 

Reset 

To reset the OSYlink you have to set code switch 10 to ON for one second, then back to OFF. 

A reset has to be made, if a code switch setting has been changed. Otherwise the new setting 

will not be activated. 

ESD‐Schutzabdeckung (Best.‐Nr. 00 0276 53) ESD protection cover (order no. 00 0276 53) 

Nach dem Anschließen der Leitungen (siehe Rückseite) die ESD‐Schutzabdeckung 

aufsetzen. (ESD = Electro Static Discharge = Elektrostatische Entladung) 

After you have connected the cables (see reverse side), you have to put the ESD protection 

cover on the OSYlink. (ESD = Electro Static Discharge) 

Demontage von der Hutschiene Dismantling from supporting rail 

Einen Schraubendreher in die sichtbare Öffnung des schwarzen Befestigungsclips stecken 

und dann den Clip nach oben herausziehen, bis sich das OSYlink 1 von der Hutschiene 3 

löst. 

 

58 mm 

Montage auf Hutschiene 

Mounting on supporting rail 

2 

77 0801 00 

OSYlink‐Türsprechstelle 

OSYlink‐Door entry speaker 

3 

2 2 

1 

Rote Kontroll‐LED blinkt langsam 

(1 Sek. EIN / 1 Sek. AUS), wenn OSYlink 

ok ist. Sonst liegt eine Störung vor. 

Red control LED flashes slowly 

(1 sec ON, 1 sec OFF), if OSYlink is ok. 

Otherwise there is a fault. 1 

106 mm 

90 mm 

Page 148 

Put a screw driver into the visible hole of the black fixing clip. Then pull the clip upwards, 

until the OSYlink 1 comes loose from the supporting rail 3. 

 

ON 

Wandmontage 

Wall mounting 

4 

1 2 3 4 5 6 

2 

4 

8 

16 

Adresse 

Address 

7 

32 

64 

8 9 10 

Reset 

2 

2 2 

1 

ESD‐Schutzabdeckung 

ESD protection cover 

4 

4

Page 149



OSYlink‐Gruppenleuchte, Best.‐Nr. 77 0802 00 

Schnittstelle zum Anschluss von Gruppenleuchten an den Gruppenbus (OSYnet). 

Einsetzbar als Sammel- oder Richtungsanzeige. Raumzuordnung und Bildung von Gruppen 

möglich. 

4 x 2 potentialfreie Ausgänge zur Anschaltung von 4 Gruppenleuchten mit je 2 Leucht‐ 

feldern 

Stromversorgung wählbar (Jumper) intern aus der Rufanlage oder extern 

Anzeige nach DIN VDE 0834, zentral konfigurierbar 

Zentrale, flexible Konfiguration der Blinkfolgen und Zuordnung der Teilnehmeradressen 

Max. Stromaufnahme: 26 mA + 60 mA je Ausgang 





00 8802 35, 10/11 (Rev. 1.1) 

OSYlink-Group lamp, order no. 77 0802 00 

Interface for connecting group lamps to the group bus (OSYnet). Usable as collective or 

direction display. Room allocation and group forming possible. 

4 x 2 potential‐free outputs for connecting 4 group lamps, with two light sections each 

Power supply selectable (jumper) internal from the call system or external 

Display compliant with DIN VDE 0834, centrally configurable 

Central, flexible configuration of flash‐signal sequences and allocation of user addres‐ 

ses 

Max. current consumption: 26 mA + 60 mA per output 






















Adresse 4 durch Einschalten des Codierschalters 3. 



Reset 







Examples: Address 1 is set by using the code switch 1. Address 4 by the code switch 3. 

Address 24 is selected through addition, coding switch 4 and 5 (8 + 16 = 24). 


Reset 




ESD‐Schutzabdeckung (Bestell‐Nr. 00 0276 53) ESD protection cover (order no. 00 276 53) 








löst. 

 



2 

58 mm 

77 0802 00 

OSYlink‐Gruppenleuchte 

OSYlink‐Group lamp 

3 

2 2 

1 






Otherwise there is a fault. 

106 mm 

90 mm 

Page 150 



 

ON 

Wandmontage 

Wall mounting 

4 

1 2 3 4 5 6 

1 

2 

4 

8 

16 

32 

64 

Adresse 

Address 

7 

8 9 10 

2 

2 2 

Reset 

1 



4 

4

Page 151



OSYlink‐Universal, Best.‐Nr. 77 0803 00 

Schnittstelle zur Anschaltung von Fremdanlagen und/oder technischen Einrichtungen an 

den Gruppenbus (OSYnet). Max. Stromaufnahme: 900 mA. 





00 8802 36, 10/10 (Rev. 2.0) 

OSYlink-Universal, order no. 77 0803 00 

Interface for connecting external systems and/or technical installations to the group bus 

(OSYnet). Max. current consumption: 900 mA 

























Reset 








Address 24 is selected through addition: coding switch 4 and 5 (8 + 16 = 24). 


Reset 











und dann den Clip nach oben herausziehen, bis sich OSYlink 1 von der Hutschiene 3 löst. 

58 mm 

77 0803 00 

OSYlink‐Universal 

 



3 

2 

2 2 

160 mm 

1 







90 mm 

Page 152 



4 

ON 

Wandmontage 

Wall mounting 

2 

1 2 3 4 5 6 

1 

2 

4 

8 

16 

32 

64 

Adresse 

Address 

7 

8 9 10 

Reset 

2 

1 

2 



4 

4


Ip Ip 

0 V 

OSYlink-Universal 

Order No. / Best.-Nr. 77 0803 00 

Rev.: 

Ser. No.: 

0 V 

IN 1 

4K7 

0 V 

00 8802 36, 10/11 (Rev. 3.0) 

+24 V 

+24 V 

NF 1a 

NF 1b 

OSYnet 

NF 2a 

NF 2b 

0 V 

IN 2 

0 V 

IN 3 

0 V 

IN 4 

0 V 

IN 5 

0 V 

IN 6 

4K7 

4K7 

4K7 

IN 1 - 4 

Monitored inputs 

Überwachte Schalteingänge 

0 V 

OSYnet 

DG 

IN 7 

IN 5 - 8 

Inputs 

Schalteingänge 

DL 

DH 

DG 

Jumper 

R_IN1: Jumper setzen, wenn IN 1 nicht benutzt. 




24V_OUT7: Jumper setzen, wenn Spannungsversorgung an OUT 7 intern. 

24V_OUT8: Jumper setzen, wenn Spannungsversorgung an OUT 8 intern. 

IN 7 Schalteingang - Ruf auslösen Schließerkontakt 

IN 8 Schalteingang - Ruf abstellen Schließerkontakt 

Funktion von IN 7: Kontakt geschlossen = Ruf auslösen 

Kontakt geöffnet = ohne Funktion 

Funktion von IN 8: Kontakt geschlossen = Ruf von IN7 abstellen 

Kontakt geöffnet = ohne Funktion 

0 V 

IN 8 

1 

2 

4 

8 

16 

32 

64 

NC 

Test 

Reset 

Address 

R_IN 1 

R_IN 2 

R_IN 3 

R_IN 4 

24V_OUT 7 

24V_OUT 8 

Jumpers, see below 

Jumper, siehe unten 

O C 8 

OUT 8 

C C 8 

C 8 

0 V 

O C 7 

OUT 7 

C C 7 

C 7 

OUT 7, 8 

Relay outputs with internal or 

external power supply 

(external power supply: 

24V AC or DC, max. 1A) 

Relais‐Ausgänge mit interner 

oder ext. Spannungsversorgung 

(extener Spannungsversorgung: 

24V AC oder DC, max. 1A) 

0 V 

OUT 1 

OUT 2 

0 V 

Jumpers 

R_IN1: Set jumper, if IN 1 is not used. 




24V_OUT7: Set jumper if internal 24 V is used for OUT 7. 

24V_OUT8: Set jumper if internal 24 V is used for OUT 8. 

OUT 3 

OUT 4 

0 V 

OUT 5 

OUT 1 - 5 

Solid state outputs 24V 

Elektronische 

Ausgänge 24V 

OUT 6 

OUT 6 

Solid state output 24V 

with location light feature 

Elektronischer Ausgang 

24V mit Findelicht‐Funktion 

IN 1 Überwachter Schalteingang - Ruf Schließerkontakt mit parallelem 4K7-Widerstand IN 1 Monitored input - Call 

Normally open contact with parallel 4K7 resistor 

IN 2 Überwachter Schalteingang - Notruf Schließerkontakt mit parallelem 4K7-Widerstand IN 2 Monitored input - Emergency call Normally open contact with parallel 4K7 resistor 

IN 3 Überwachter Schalteingang - AlarmrufSchließerkontakt 

mit parallelem 4K7-Widerstand IN 3 Monitored input- Alarm call 


IN 4 Überwachter Schalteingang - Ruf Schließerkontakt mit parallelem 4K7-Widerstand IN 4 Monitored input - Call 


Funktion von IN 1 - IN 4: Kontakt geschlossen = Rufmeldung frischer Ruf 

Function for IN 1 - IN 4: Contact closed = Call message Fresh call 

Kontakt geöffnet = Ausmeldung Ruf abgestellt 

Contact opened = Off message Call cancelled 

Quittierung möglich, frisch / abgefragt 

Acknowledgement possible, fresh / answered 

IN 5 Schalteingang - Sammeldurchsage (alle Stationen) Schließerkontakt IN 5 Input - Collective announcement (to all wards) Normally open contact 

IN 6 Schalteingang - Sammeldurchsage (alle Anwesenheiten) Schließerkontakt IN 6 Input - Collective announcement (to all staff) Normally open contact 

Funktion von IN 5 - IN 6: Kontakt geschlossen = Durchsage ausgelöst 

Function for IN 5 - IN 6: Contact closed = Announcement started 

Kontakt geöffnet = Durchsage beendet 

Contact opened = Announcement closed 

IN 7 Input - Raise call Normally open contact 

IN 8 Input - Cancel call Normally open contact 

Function for IN 7: Contact closed = Raise call 

Contact opened = no function 

Function for IN 8: Contact closed = Cancel call from IN7 

Contact opened = no function 

OUT 1 Sammelausgang Rufe Elektronischer Ausgang 24V 

OUT 1 Collective output Calls Solid state output 24V 

OUT 2 Sammelausgang Notrufe Elektronischer Ausgang 24V 

OUT 2 Collective output Emergency calls Solid state output 24V 

OUT 3 Sammelausgang Alarmrufe Elektronischer Ausgang 24V 

OUT 3 Collective output Alarm calls Solid state output 24V 

OUT 4 Schaltausgang frei konfigurierbar Elektronischer Ausgang 24V 

OUT 4 Output can be configured Solid state output 24V 

OUT 5 Schaltausgang frei konfigurierbar Elektronischer Ausgang 24V 

OUT 5 Output can be configured Solid state output 24V 

OUT 6 Schaltausgang frei konfigurierbar Elektron. Ausgang 24V mit Findelicht-Funktion OUT 6 Output can be configured Solid state output 24V with location light feature 

für Eingänge IN 1 bis IN 4. 

for inputs IN 1 up to IN 4. 

OUT 7 Schaltausgang frei konfigurierbar Wechselkontakt potentialfrei, interne 24V nutzbar OUT 7 Out. can be configured Change-over contact potential-free, internal 24V can be used 

OUT 8 Schaltausgang frei konfigurierbar Wechselkontakt potentialfrei, interne 24V nutzbar OUT 8 Out. can be configured Change-over contact potential-free, internal 24V can be used 

Konfiguration der Ausgänge in der Software SystemOrganizer. 

The outputs are configured using the SystemOrganizer software. 

Bei Stationszusammenschaltung zeigen die Ausgänge stationsübergreifend an. 

In case of ward coupling the outputs signal across wards. 

Page 153 




OSYlink‐Durchsage, Best.‐Nr. 77 0804 00 

Schnittstelle zum Anschluss von Durchsagelautsprechern, Bestell‐Nr. 05 0024 00, an den 

Gruppenbus (OSYnet). Anschaltung als Einzelgerät oder in Gruppen. 

1 Audio‐Ausgang zur Ansteuerung von aktiven Lautsprechern (max. 5 Lautsprecher) 

1 potentialfreier Schaltausgang zur Steuerung der Zuschaltkennung 






00 8802 37, 06/06 (Rev. 1.0) 

OSYlink-Announcement, order no. 77 0804 00 

Interface for connecting announcement loudspeakers, order no. 05 0024 00, to the group 

bus (OSYnet). Connection of single devices or groups. 

1 audio output for driving active loudspeakers (max. 5 loudspeakers) 

1 potential‐free digital output for control of signalling the activity of the announcement 

system 



manual. 
























Reset 








Address 24 is selected through addition: coding switch 4 and 5 (8 + 16 = 24). 


Reset 












löst. 

 



2 

58 mm 

77 0804 00 

OSYlink‐Durchsage 

OSYlink‐Announcement 

3 

2 2 

1 







106 mm 

90 mm 

Page 154 



 

ON 

Wandmontage 

Wall mounting 

4 

1 2 3 4 5 6 

1 

2 

4 

8 

16 

32 

64 

Adresse 

Address 

7 

8 9 10 

2 

2 2 

Reset 

1 



4 

4

Page 155


Page 156 


14.8 Accessories 

70 0790 00 Sound detector 

70 0812 00 Diagnostic connection cable 

77 0901 00 Smoke detector 


Page 157 




Schallwächter, Best.‐Nr. 70 0790 00 

Der Schallwächter dient zur akustischen Kontrolle von Räumen. Automatische Auslösung 

von Rufen durch laute Geräusche. 

Lautstärke und Zeitdauer der Geräusche, die einen Ruf auslösen sollen, können mit den 

Reglern ”Empfindlichkeit” 1 und ”Verzögerung” 2 eingestellt werden. 

Hinweis: Normale Gesprächslautstärke führt nicht zur Rufauslösung. 



Anschlussmöglichkeiten Connection possibilities 

Der Schallwächter kann an unterschiedliche Steckvorrichtungen und 

Patienten‐Bedienkombinationen der Firma Tunstall GmbH angeschlossen werden und dient 

zur akustischen Kontrolle von Räumen. 

Bedienungsanleitung User instructions 

Einschalten 

Durch einfaches Stecken des Mini-DIN-Steckers in die Steckbuchse für Rufgeräte wird das 

Gerät eingeschaltet und ist sofort betriebsbereit. 

Einstellungen 

1 Empfindlichkeit (Ansprechempfindlichkeit): 

Dieser Regler dient zur Einstellung der Lautstärke, ab der das Gerät einen Ruf auslöst. 

Schwellwertskala von 0 bis 9. 

Einstellung 9 = höchste Empfindlichkeit: geringe Geräusche lösen einen Ruf aus. 

2 Verzögerung: 

Dieser Regler dient zur Einstellung der zeitlichen Mindestdauer eines Geräusches, die zur 

Auslösung eines Rufes führt. 

Zeitskala: 0 bis 9 (Verzögerungszeit 0,5 - 6 s) 

Technische Daten Technical data 

Farbe 

hellgrau 

Material 

Kunststoff ABS 

Stromversorgung 

24 VDC / 16 mA Ruhestrom 

00 8800 23, 06/06 (Rev. 2.0) 

70 0790 00 

Schallwächter 

Sound detector 

Page 158 

Sound detector, order no. 70 0790 00 

Sound detector for acoustic monitoring of rooms. Automatic call activation in case of any 

noises. 

Sensitivity and time delay can be adjusted. So it can be adjusted which volume and noise 

duration shall activate a call. 

Note: Normal conversation will not activate a call. 


manual. 

The sound detector can be connected to different connection sockets and patient bedside 

combinations from the company Tunstall GmbH. 

To switch on 

The device will be automatically switched on by plugging into the corresponding socket for 

call devices. It is immediately operational. 

Adjustments: 

1 Sensitivity (sensitivity of speaking): 

This regulator is used for adjusting the sensitivity of sound loudness level. A call will be 

activated above this level. Scale of threshold value 0 to 9. 

Adjustment 9 = highest sensitivity: a slight noise activates a call. 

2 Delay: 

This regulator is used for adjusting the minimum duration of sound, beyond which leads to 

call activation. 

Time scale: 0 to 9 (time of delay 0,5 to 6 s). 

Colour 

light grey 

Material 

Plastic ABS 

Power supply 

24 VDC / 16 mA standby current 

1 

2 

125 mm 

150 mm 

30 mm



Verbindungsleitung für Diagnostikgeräte, Best.‐Nr. 70 0812 00 

Verbindungsleitung zum Anschluss von elektromedizinischen Geräten an 

Steckvorrichtungen, Best.‐Nr. 70 xxxx xx. 


beschrieben. 

Anschluss an Steckvorrichtung 70 xxxx xx 

Connection to connection socket 70 xxxx xx 

5 

RL 

+24V 

2 

DIA 

7 

enspricht Zeichnungs-Nr./equivalent to drawing no. 70 1 0013 403, 28.04.1997 

8 

Rückmeldung bei Bedarf 

max. zul. Strom 10 mA 

Feedback on demand 

maximum allowable 

current 10 mA 

Adernfarben: 

1 = blau 

2 = rot 

3 = 

4 = weiß 

5 = orange 

6 = gelb 

7 = schwarz 

8 = grün 

4 

6 

3 

ABM 

Elektromedizinisches Gerät 

Electromedical Device 

Wire colours: 

1 = blue 

2 = red 

3 = 

4 = white 

5 = orange 

6 = yellow 

7 = black 

8 = green 

Drahtbrücke/wire link 

1 

0V 

potentialfreier Kontakt nach VDE 

potential-free contact 

according to VDE 

muss im Alarmfall öffnen 

must open in case of emergency 

70 0812 00 

Verbindungsleitung für Diagnostikgeräte 

Diagnostic connection cable 

Page 159 

Diagnostik connection cable, order no. 70 0812 00 

Cable for connection of electromedical devices to connection sockets, order no. 70 xxxx xx. 


manual. 

Länge = 2m / length = 2 m 

Freie Drahtenden (30 mm), verzinnt 

Free wire ends (30 mm), tin-plated 

Achtung! Nicht benutzte Drahtenden müssen isoliert werden. 

Attention! Non used wire ends have to be insulated.

Anschlussplan für Rauchmelder, Best.−Nr.: 77 0901 00 

Connection plan for smoke detector, order no.: 77 0901 00 

Klemme im Relaismodul 

Clamp within the relay module 

Bornier dans le module relais 

Morsetto del modulo di relè 

Potenzialfreier Kontakt 

Potential-free contact 

Contact libre de potentiel 

Contatto libero da potenziale 

Anschluss an die Rufanlage 

Connection to the nurse call system 

Connexion au système d’appel 

Collegamento a sistema di chiamata 

77 0901 00, 07/2006 

Page 160

14.9 System devices 

77 2x0x 00 OSY‐ControlCenter 

77 2100 00 OSYnet‐SafetyController 


Page 161 




OSY‐ControlCenter, Best.‐Nr. 77 2000 00 

Das OSY-ControlCenter stellt alle Systemfunktionen der Flamenco-Rufanlage zur 

Verfügung. Es organisiert die Datenverteilung und den gesamten Sprechverkehr zwischen 

den einzelnen Teilnehmern. Das OSY-ControlCenter ist die zentrale Systemschnittstelle zur 

Ein- und Ausgabe von Daten, Sprechverbindungen und Systemmeldungen, jedoch auch die 

Schaltstelle für Fernzugriffe und Softwareupdates. Das OSY-ControlCenter ist modular 

aufgebaut und wird individuell entsprechend dem benötigten Leistungsumfang 

zusammengestellt. Die Anzahl der jeweils erforderlichen internen Komponenten ergibt sich 

aus der Gesamtanzahl der anzuschließenden Teilnehmer und der Anzahl der internen und 

externen Sprechverbindungen. Zusätzliche Schnittstellen zum Datenaustausch, z.B. KIS, 

Facility Management und Anbindungen an Telefonanlagen können integriert werden. Die 

Konfiguration des OSY‐ControlCenters erfolgt werkseitig. 

Versorgungsspannung OSY‐ControlCenter: 24 V DC 

Versorgungsspannung Netzwerk‐Switch: 230 V AC 

Max. Stromaufnahme OSY‐ControlCenter: 2,3 A 



00 8802 52, 01/09 (Rev. 2.0) 


Anschlussfeld 

connection field 

OSY‐ControlCenter, order no. 77 2000 00 

The OSY-ControlCenter provides all system functions for the Flamenco nurse call system. It 

organises the data distribution and the whole speech traffic between the single users. 

Furthermore the OSY-ControlCenter represents the central system interface for incoming 

and outgoing data, speech connections and system messages as well as the switching 

point for remote accesses and software updates. The OSY-ControlCenter is modular 

constructed and is individually assembled according to the required performance. The 

number of required internal components results from the total number of users to be 

connected and the number of internal and external speech connections. Additional 

interfaces for data exchange, e.g. for HIS, facility management and connections to 

telephone systems can be integrated. The OSY‐ControlCenter is factory configured. 

Supply voltage for OSY‐ControlCenter: 24 V DC 

Supply voltage for network switch: 230 V AC 

Max. current consumption OSY‐ControlCenter: 2.3 A 

Kabeleinführung 

cable entrances 


Netzwerk‐Switch 


Anschlussbuchsen für Netzwerk-Switch 

connection sockets for network switch 

Kontrollanzeigen (LED) 

control LEDs 

Netzwerk‐Switch anschließen Connection of network switch 

Je nach Ausstattung des OSY‐ControlCenters, weist dieses bis zu 6 RJ45‐Buchsen auf. 

Jede dieser Buchsen muss mit einer beliebigen RJ45‐Buchse im Netzwerk‐Switch 

verbunden werden. Es empfiehlt sich allerdings die folgende übersichtliche Anordnung: 

Netzwerk‐Switch 



RJ45‐Buchsen 

RJ45 sockets 

77 2000 00 


Page 162 

Depending on its components the OSY‐ControlCenter may include a maximum of 6 RJ45 

sockets. Each socket has to be connected to an arbitrary RJ45 socket in the network 

switch. But the following clear arrangement is recommended:

Montage D Mounting GB 

Anforderungen an den Installationsort Installation location requirements 

Bedingt zugänglicher technischer Betriebsraum 

Trockener Raum (Max. Luftfeuchtigkeit 75% bei ca. 18 o C) 

Umgebungstemperatur 0 o bis 40 o C 

Das OSY‐ControlCenter muss jederzeit gut zugänglich sein (Revisionsgang 60 cm 

breit). 

Freiraum für die Kabeleinführung muss berücksichtigt werden. 

Belüftung Ventilation 

Die Wärmeabfuhr darf nicht behindert sein. Für eine ausreichende Luftzirkulation über und 

unter dem OSY‐ControlCenter muss deshalb gesorgt werden. Der Abstand über und unter 

dem OSY‐ControlCenter zu anderen Geräten oder zu Wänden muss mindestens 50 mm (im 

Montageschrank 3 HE) betragen. Die Lüftungsdurchlässe dürfen unter keinen Umständen 

abgedeckt sein. Beim Einbau in Schaltschränke muss gegebenenfalls durch Zwangslüftung 

die Verlustwärme abgeführt werden. 

77 2000 00 


Gewicht ohne Kabel ca. 17 kg 

weight without cables approx. 17 kg 

00 8802 52, 01/09 (Rev. 2.0) 

Wandmontage / Wall mounting 

50 

Ø 12 

Ø 7 

Limited access location for technical equipment 

Dry location (max. relative humidity 75% at approx. 18 o C) 

Ambient temperatures between 0 o and 40 o C 

The OSY‐ControlCenter shall be readily accessible (access aisle 60 cm wide). 

Consider sufficient free space for cable entries. 

The heat transfer must not be blocked. The selected location must ensure sufficient air 

circulation above and below the OSY‐ControlCenter. Therefore, check for minimum 

distance of 50 mm (3 U in a rack) to walls, ceiling and other equipment. The venting ports 

must not be covered up. Where the OSY‐ControlCenter is installed in a 19‐inch rack, 

forced-air ventilation may be required. 

Einbau in 19 Zoll Montageschrank / Mounting in 19-inch rack 

77 2000 00 


Page 163 

465,6 

482.6 

444 

25 

7 mm 

12 mm 

278.9 354.4 

291.5 

291.5 

Montagewinkel nach vorne umsetzen. 

Move mounting brackets to the front. 




Netzgerät USV 24 V DC (Bestell‐Nr. 77 3400 00) 

Power supply unit UPS 24 V DC (Order no. 77 3400 00) 

Gruppe 1 / Group 1 








00 8802 52, 01/09 (Rev. 2.0) 

Anschluss werkseitig / pre-connected 

2 x 2.5 mm 2 

Störmeldeausgang, potentialfrei, Sammelausgang, Kontakt geschlossen bei Störung 

Fault message output, potential-free, collective output, contact closed in case of a fault 

Kontaktbelastbarkeit: 100 mA / 24 V 

contact load: max. 100 mA / 24 V 

Anschluss für Potentialausgleich auf Gewindebolzen im Gehäuse: 

Connection for potential equalisation on the threaded bolt in the housing: 

Gefahr! Bauseitiger Potentialausgleich erforderlich. 

Danger! Potential equalisation required. 

Interne Potentialausgleichsverbindung 

Internal potential equalisation connection 

Benutzung nur für Tunstall‐Techniker. 

Use only for Tunstall engineers. 

Daten Gruppe 1 / Data Group 1 








Sprechen Gruppe 1 / Speech Group 1 








Nichts anschließen, wenn Telefonleitung 5, 6, 7 oder 8 benutzt wird. 

Sonst Verwendung für: Sprechen Gruppe 17 - 20. 

Don't connect, if telephone line 5, 6, 7 or 8 is used. 

Otherwise use for: Speech Group 17 - 20. 

Nichts anschließen, wenn Telefonleitung 1, 2, 3 oder 4 benutzt wird. 

Sonst Verwendung für: Sprechen Gruppe 21 - 24. 

Don't connect, if telephone line 1, 2, 3 or 4 is used. 

Otherwise use for: Speech Group 21 - 24. 

Telefonleitung 1 / Telephone Line 1 








1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

Page 164 

DC/DC- 

Converter 

Power Supply 

DH3 

CTS2.A 

ST49 

ST50 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

C2 COM A 

ST37 

ST38 

ST32 C1 

ST33 C2 C1 COM A 

ST35 ST36 

C5 

ST39 ST40 

ST41 

ST42 

ST43 

ST44 

ST34 

C3 

C4 

C6 

OSYnet1 OSYnet2 OSYnet3 OSYnet4 

OSYnet5 OSYnet6 OSYnet7 OSYnet8 

OSYnet9 OSYnet 

10 

OSYnet 

11 

OSYnet 

12 

1 

0V +24V 0V +5V 0V 0V +24V +24V 

NF2b 

NF21b 

GND 

RESET 

DG1 

DH1 

DL1 

DG2 

DH2 

DL2 

DG3 

DL3 

DG4 

DH4 

DL4 

GND 

RxD1.A 

TxD1.A 

RTS1.A 

CTS1.A 

GND 

RxD2.A 

TxD2.A 

RTS2.A 

DG5 

DH5 

DL5 

DG6 

DH6 

DL6 

DG7 

DH7 

DL7 

DG8 

DH8 

DL8 

DG9 

DH9 

DL9 

DG10 

DH10 

DL10 

DG11 

DH11 

DL11 

DG12 

DH12 

DL12 

NF1a 

NF1b 

NF2a 

NF5a 

NF5b 

NF6a 

NF6b 

NF9a 

NF9b 

NF10a 

NF10b 

NF13a 

NF13b 

NF14a 

NF14b 

NF17a 

NF17b 

NF18a 

NF18b 

NF21a 

NF22a 

NF22b 

a1 

b1 

a2 

b2 

a5 

b5 

a6 

b6 

ST45 

ST46 

1 

1 

GND 

TxD1.1 

TxD1.2 

ST20 

CTS1.1 

GND 

CTS1.2 

GND 

TxD1.3 

ST21 

RxD1.3 

RTS1.3 

CTS1.3 

GND 

ST22 

GND 

RxD3.A 

TxD3.A 

RTS3.A 

CTS3.A 

GND 

RxD4.A 

TxD4.A 

RTS4.A 

CTS4.A 

ST23 

GND 

RxD5.A 

RTS5.A 

CTS5.A 

GND 

RxD6.A 

TxD6.A 

RTS6.A 

CTS6.A 

NF3a 

NF3b 

NF4a 

NF4b 

NF7a 

NF7b 

NF8a 

NF8b 

a3 

b3 

a4 

b4 

ST30 

ST31 

COM 1 

COM 2 

ST24 

ST25 

NF19a 

NF19b 

NF20a 

NF20b 

NF23a 

NF23b 

NF24a 

NF24b 

C3 

C4 COM A 

C5 COM A C6 

ST26 

NF11a 

NF11b 

NF12a 

NF12b 

NF15a 

NF15b 

NF16a 

NF16b 

a7 

b7 

a8 

b8 

RESET 

RxD1.1 

RTS1.1 

RxD1.2 

RTS1.2 

TxD5.A 

C1 

C1 

C1 

1 

COM 3 

COM A 

COM A 

ST27 

ST28 

ST29 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 1 

GND 

RxD1.4 

TxD1.4 

RTS1.4 

DSR1.4 

DTR1.4 

RI1.4 

GND 

NC 

+5V 

NC 

+5V 

ST13 

CTS1. CTS1.4 

DCD1.4 

ST14 

USB+1 

USB-1 

NC 

+5V 

NC 

ST15 

USB+2 

USB-2 

ST16 

USB+3 

USB-3 

+5V 

ST17 

USB+4 

USB-4 

+5V 

NC 

ST18 

USB+5 

USB-5 

NC 

ST19 

USB+6 

USB-6 

+5V 

C1 

COM 4 

C1 

USB 

C2 

USB 

C3 

USB 

C4 

USB 

C5 

USB 

C6 

USB 

Prüfen Sie alle Leitungen auf Durchgang, Kurzschluss‐ und Erdschlussfreiheit. 

Wenn die Datenleitungen korrekt angeschlossen sind, beträgt die Spannung zwi‐ 

schen DH und DG sowie die Spannung zwischen DL und DG ca. 2,5 V. 

Achtung! Bei dem folgende Plan handelt es sich um einen Standardanschlussplan. 

Beachten Sie die Abweichungen in Ihrem projektspezifischen Anschlussplan. 

Check all cables for continuity, short circuits and ground faults. 

When the data cables are correctly connected, the values are: voltage between 

DH and DG and voltage between DL and DG approx. 2.5 V. 

Attention! The following plan is a standard connection plan. Please follow the 

deviations in your project specific connection plan. 

77 2000 00 

OSY‐ControlCenter

Kontrollanzeigen (LED) D Control LEDs GB 

Die Kontrollanzeigen dienen Tunstall‐Technikern zur differenzierten Analyse von Störungen. The control LEDs help Tunstall engineers to analyze faults. 

00 8802 52, 01/09 (Rev. 2.0) 

Eine detailliertere Auswertung der Leuchtanzeigen ist nur durch Tunstall‐Techniker möglich. 

A more detailed interpretation of the control LEDs is possible for Tunstall engineers only. 

Reset‐Taster hinterer PC / Reset button for rear PC 

Kontroll‐LED*) hinterer PC / Control LED*) for rear PC 

Kontroll‐LED*) vorderer PC / Control LED*) for front PC 

Reset‐Taster vorderer PC / Reset button for front PC 

F: LED flackert (10 Hz) oder LED aus: Störung, LED flickering (10 Hz) or LED OFF: fault 

D: LED ein: Durchsageverstärker eingeschaltet 

D: LED ON: Announcement amplifier ON 

K/S: LED ein: Sprechverbindung eingeschaltet 

K/S: LED ON: Speech connection ON 

PC 5 

PC 5 

PC 6 

PC 6 

Bedeutung der LEDs für Telefonleitungen 1 - 8: 

Meaning of LEDs for telephone lines 1 - 8: 

1 Linie / Line 

2 

3 

4 

Durchsageverstärker / Announcement amplifier 

Klingelsignal / Ringing signal 

Schleifenspannung / Loop current 

Telefonleitung 1 

Telephone Line 1 















LED 1 leuchtet: Sprechverbindung zwischen Telefonleitung und Rufanlage besteht. 

LED 2: leuchtet nie. 

LED 3 flackert: Es klingelt auf der Telefonleitung. 

LED 4 leuchtet: “Hörer ist abgehoben” auf der Telefonleitung. 

LED 1 is ON: Speech connection between the telephone line and nurse call system. 

LED 2: is always OFF. 

LED 3 flickering: Ringing signal on the telephone line. 

LED 4 is ON: Telephone off-hook 

PC 1 

PC 1 

PC 2 

PC 2 

PC 3 

PC 3 

PC 4 

PC 4 

*) Kontroll‐LED: 1sec Rot EIN / 1 sec Rot AUS = PC ok, sonst = PC Störung 

*) Control LED: 1sec Red ON / 1 sec Red OFF = PC ok, otherwise = PC fault 

Page 165 




OSYnet‐SafetyController, Best.‐Nr. 77 2100 00 

Sicherheitscontroller zum direkten Anschluss an den Gruppenbus (OSYnet). Parallel 

einsetzbar zum OSY-ControlCenter, pro physikalische Gruppe. Vorgesehen als Redundanz 

zur Aufrechterhaltung der Systemfunktionen bei Ausfall des OSY-ControlCenters. 

Steuerung der Lichtruf-Grundfunktionen für eine physikalische Gruppe (DIN VDE 0834) 

Steuerung von Anzeigen an Zimmerleuchten und Displays 

Selbständige und automatische Umschaltung zwischen Normal- und Sicherheitsbetrieb 

1 potentialfreier Schaltausgang (Wechselkontakt) zur Anzeige der Betriebsart. 

1 potentialfreier Schaltausgang (Wechselkontakt) zur Anzeige von Störungen 

Schaltausgang: intern: 24 VDC/60 mA, extern: 24 VAC/1 A 






00 8802 39, 10/09 (Rev. 3.0) 

OSYnet‐SafetyController, order no. 77 2100 00 

Safety controller for direct connection to the group bus (OSYnet). Usable in parallel with 

OSY-ControlCenter, per physical group. Intended use as redundancy for maintaining the 

system operation in case of OSY-ControlCenter fail. 

Controlling the base light call functions of one physical group (DIN VDE 0834) 

Control of room lamps and displays 

Autonomous and automatic switching between normal and safety operation 

1 potential free digital output (change‐over contact) for signalling the operation mode 

1 potential free digital output (change‐over contact) for fault signalling 

Digital output: internal: 24 VDC/60 mA, external: 24 VAC/1 A 






Montage auf Hutschiene oder Wandmontage im Technikraum der Station. 

Mounting on supporting rail or wall mounting in the electrical room of the ward. 



OSYnet‐SafetyController 1 auf die Hutschiene 3 aufklipsen, bis er einrastet. 

Click the OSYnet‐SafetyController 1 onto the supporting rail 3. 




2. OSYnet‐SafetyController 1 an der Wand festschrauben. 



2. Screw the OSYnet‐SafetyController 1 to the wall. 

Adresse einstellen (126, 125) Setting of address (126, 125) 



Am OSYnet‐SafetyController müssen Sie die Adresse 126 einstellen. Wenn Sie in der 

physikalischen Gruppe einen zweiten OSYnet‐SafetyController installieren, müssen Sie an 

diesem die Adresse 125 einstellen. 


Reset 





Kontroll‐LED (rot) Control LED (red) 

Leuchtet nicht: 

Langsames Blinken: 

( 1s EIN - 1 s AUS) 

Schnelles Blinken: 

(200 ms EIN - 200 ms AUS) 

OSYnet‐SafetyController 

ohne Spannungsversorgung oder defekt 

OSY‐ControlCenter steuert die Gruppe. 

OSYnet‐SafetyController betriebsbereit (standby) 

OSYnet-SafetyController steuert die Gruppe. 

Länger als 10 s Dauerlicht: OSYnet‐SafetyController nicht betriebsbereit. 



At the OSYnet‐SafetyController you have to set address 126. If you install a second 

OSYnet‐SafetyController in the same physical group, you have to set address 125 at the 

second OSYnet‐SafetyController. 


Reset 

To reset the OSYnet‐SafetyController you have to set code switch 10 to ON for one second, 

then back to OFF. A reset has to be made, if a code switch setting has been changed. Otherwise 

the new setting will not be activated. 

Light OFF: 

Flashing slowly: 

( 1s ON - 1 s OFF) 

Flashing quickly: 

(200 ms ON - 200 ms OFF) 


without power supply or defect 

OSY‐ControlCenter controls the group. 

OSYnet‐SafetyController ready-to-operate (standby) 

OSYnet-SafetyController controls the group. 

Light ON for more than 10 s: OSYnet‐SafetyController not ready to operate. 





cover on the OSYnet‐SafetyController. (ESD = Electro Static Discharge) 



und dann den Clip nach oben herausziehen, bis sich der OSYnet‐SafetyController 1 von der 

Hutschiene 3 löst. 

 



Kontroll‐LED (rot) 

Control LED (red) 

77 2100 00 


3 

58 mm 

2 

2 2 

1 

106 mm 

Page 166 


until the OSYnet‐SafetyController 1 comes loose from the supporting rail 3. 

 

90 mm 

Wandmontage 

Wall mounting 

4 

ON 

1 2 3 4 5 6 

1 

2 

4 

8 

16 

Adresse 

Address 

7 

32 

64 

2 

2 2 

8 9 10 

Reset 

125 

126 

1 

4 



4


00 8802 39, 10/09 (Rev. 3.0) 

Ip Ip OSYnet OSYnet 

0 V 

0 V 

+24 V 

Made in Germany 

Rev.: 

Ser. No.: 

24V_OUT 1/2 

OUT 1 

C 1 / 2 

OUT 2 

+24 V 

0 V 

Ausgang zur Anzeige 

der Betriebsart 

(Wechselkontakt) 

Output for signalling the 

operation mode 

(change‐over contact) 

24V_OUT 3/4 

NF 1a 

OUT 3 

NF 1b 

C 3 / 4 

NF 2a 

NF 2b 

OUT 4 

0 V 

DG 

DL 

DH 

DG 

1 

2 

4 

8 

16 

32 

64 

NC 

Test 

Reset 

Address 

OSYnet-SafetyController 

Order No. / Best.-Nr. 77 2100 00 

Ausgang zur Anzeige von 

Störungen 

(Wechselkontakt) 

Output for fault signalling 

(change‐over contact) 

No Function - Keine Funktion 

Ausgang zur Anzeige der Betriebsart 

OUT 1 geschlossen & OUT 2 offen = Normalbetrieb 

OUT 1 offen & OUT 2 geschlossen = Sicherheitsbetrieb (SafetyController steuert die Gruppe) 

Jumper OUT 1/2 gesteckt 

= Interne Spannungsversorgung (24V DC, max. 60 mA zur Ansteuerung eines Relais) 

Jumper OUT 1/2 nicht gesteckt = Externe Spannungsversorgung (24V AC oder DC, max. 1 A) 

Ausgang zur Anzeige von Störungen 

Störmeldungen von Gruppenbus-Teilnehmern 

OUT 3 geschlossen & OUT 4 offen = keine Störung 

OUT 3 offen & OUT 4 geschlossen = Störung! 

Jumper OUT 3/4 gesteckt 

= Interne Spannungsversorgung (24V DC, max. 60 mA zur Ansteuerung eines Relais) 

Jumper OUT 3/4 nicht gesteckt = Externe Spannungsversorgung (24V AC oder DC, max. 1 A) 

Output for signalling the operation mode 

OUT 1 closed & OUT 2 open = Normal operation 

OUT 1 open & OUT 2 closed = Safety operation (SafetyController controls the group) 

Jumper OUT 1/2 set = Internal power supply (24V DC, maximum 60 mA for triggering a relay) 

Jumper OUT 1/2 not set = External power supply (24V AC or DC, maximum 1 A) 

Output for fault signalling 

Faults of group bus users 

OUT 3 closed & OUT 4 open = no fault 

OUT 3 open & OUT 4 closed = Fault! 

Jumper OUT 3/4 set = Internal power supply (24V DC, maximum 60 mA for triggering a relay) 

Jumper OUT 3/4 not set = External power supply (24V AC or DC, maximum 1 A) 

Page 167


Page 168 


14.10 Power supply 


77 3400 10 Power supply unit UPS 60 


77 3450 00 Battery set for UPS 60 


Page 169 


Power supply unit UPS, Order No. 77 3400 00 

The power supply unit UPS serves as a conventional power supply unit with integrated uninterrupted 

power supply module (UPS) in a common housing. Input voltage of 115 - 230 V AC is transformed into 

24 V DC, and the UPS feature ensures the supply of a connected DC user also in case of a mains 

power failure. 

When in the normal operating mode, i.e. mains power supply, the electronic module monitors the 

output voltage. Starting at a load current level of approx. 12.5 A DC, the output voltage is reduced 

while keeping a constant current load. 

This is a self-correcting output voltage feature, as the output voltage will be reactivated. Further to this, 

the output voltage is protected by a 15 A flat fuse "F2". 

If the mains input voltage fails or when it drops to less than 90 VAC, the two lead batteries in the unit 

will continue to supply the connected user without any interruption. 

To protect the batteries from going flat, circuit breakers will open when during the UPS mode the 

output voltage drops below to 19.5 V. When the mains supply voltage is active again, the system 

reverts to its normal operating mode. 

Roughly every 15 minutes, an integrated test circuitry performs a voltage check at the battery 

terminals, the connections and at the circuit breakers. Upon the return of the mains supply current, the 

battery is isolated from the outputs, and the internal charging module recharges the battery. 

Safety instructions 

1. Mounting 

• Non-compliance with the safety instruction or improper handling of the unit (e.g. skin 

contact with live components when the unit is open) can be extremely dangerous. 

• The power supply unit UPS should only be installed and operated by qualified 

specialists. 

• Before effecting any work at or with the unit, it must be isolated from any voltage 

(mains or battery). 

• Connection to the mains supply must be executed acc. to the valid national 

regulations (for Germany: VDE 0100 and VDE 0160). 

• Fuse or circuit breaker must be provided for safe isolation from the input (mains) 

current. 

• Overheating of the unit may occur when the values as shown in the technical data 

are exceeded. This may lead to permanent damage to the unit, and system safety is 

jeopardised. 

• Always watch for the safe isolation of AC and DC circuits! 

• Observe the general safety instructions for the handling of batteries! Sufficient 

ventilation must be provided to preclude the development of an explosive hydrogenair 

mixture! 

• If the power supply unit UPS will not be used for a longer time, first the batteries 

have to be fully charged. After that the power supply unit UPS has to be 

disconnected from mains supply and the battery fuse (under the left cover) has to be 

removed. 

The power supply unit UPS is designed for wall mounting. Bore holes are prepared at the housing for 

fixing the unit at the wall using the enclosed mounting material. A dimensional drawing is shown on 

the next page. 

Before mounting, check the condition of the wall itself. 

The power supply unit UPS weighs approx. 9 kg. 

The unit must be mounted such that the venting ports are at the top and bottom. 

© Tunstall GmbH, Orkotten 66, 48291 Telgte, Germany, www.tunstall.de, 00 8802 41, Rev. 3.1 (05/2008) English - 1 

Page 170


The selected location must ensure sufficient air circulation above and below the unit. Therefore, check 

for minimum distance of 50 mm to walls, ceiling and other equipment. The venting ports must not be 

covered up. Insufficient air circulation may lead to damage to the power supply unit. 

Dimensional drawing: 

2. Connection 

The internal connection terminals are provided as screw/plug-in clamps. 

2.1 Mains connection 

You have to ensure, that the mains cable is disconnected from the AC supply voltage during the 

following procedure: 

1. Release 4 screws for the left cover and remove the cover to the front. 

Now, the terminal connection clamps are accessible. 

2. Direct the mains cable through the cable duct into the housing and connect to the appropriate 

terminal posts as designated in the unit. 

NOTE: To simplify this process, you may pull the input connector, connect the wires as shown and 

replace the plug in its socket. 

CAUTION ! Check for the correct and positive connection of the protective conductor. 

3. Secure the connecting cable against being pulled from the housing for example by fixing the 

installation cable with cable clamps. 

2.2 Output terminal clamps 24 V DC / 12.5 A 

The output voltage is generated via a primary pulse controller. This controller provides the output 

voltage of 24 V DC with 12.5 A current (for continuous operation considering all tolerance criteria). 


output voltage. When the load current exceeds approx. 12.5 A, the output current is shut off (hicc-up 

mode) until the overload at the output terminal connections has been reduced. 

This is a self-correcting output voltage feature, as the output voltage will be reactivated. Further to this, 

the output voltage is protected by a 15 A flat fuse "F2". 

• The load shall be connected to the terminal clamps "+24V" and "0V" (provided 2 x). 

2.3 Control terminal clamps x + y 

The control terminal clamps "x" and "y" are used to prepare the unit for the uninterrupted power supply 

(UPS mode). 

English - 2 © Tunstall GmbH, Orkotten 66, 48291 Telgte, Germany, www.tunstall.de, 00 8802 41, Rev. 3.1 (05/2008) 

Page 171


2.3.1 Preparing the UPS function by placing a bridge contact between "x" and "y" 

• Connect the control terminal clamps "x" and "y" using the enclosed bridging contact or via a 

potential-free 'make contact'. The current for the bridging contact is approx. 1 mA.. 

2.3.2 LED and indicator outputs 1 - 5 

The five indicator outputs 1 – 5 at the 7-pole terminal block indicate the status of the unit via potentialfree 

solenoid contacts. The current load for these contacts is up to 125 V / 1.5 A / 60 VA. 

2.3.2.1 Green LED "Power" (mains supply mode and bridging contact between "x" and "y" 

closed) 

Only green LED "Power“ is on. 

Contacts 3 – 1 & 3 - 5 are closed. 

2.3.2.2 Amber LED "Battery active" 

Only amber LED "Battery active“ is on. 

Contacts 3 – 1 & 3 – 4 are closed. 

2.3.2.3 Red LED "Battery low" 

During mains failure 



Amber LED "Battery active“ and red LED "Battery 

low“ are on. 


All LEDs are off. 


24 V voltage is available at the terminal clamp. 

Battery mode 

(when bridging contact between "x" and "y" is 

closed) 

The 24 V voltage at the terminal clamp is from the 

battery. 

The voltage at the terminal clamps depends on 

the relevant battery charge state. 

When the output voltage has dropped to 

approx. 19.5 V, the power supply unit will shut off 

(protection against totally flat battery) 

After the input voltage (115 - 230 Volt) has been reactivated again, the output clamps will be supplied 

with 24 V DC, and the batteries will be recharged automatically. 

2.3.2.4 Red LED "Output Failure Fuse F2" defective 

Green LED "Power“ and red LED "Output Failure 

Fuse F2" are on 

2.3.4 Battery test 

Green LED "Power“ is on and red LED "Battery 

low“ illuminates for 30 seconds every 15 minutes. 

Contact 3 – 2 is closed for 30 seconds every 15 

minutes. 

Output fuse F2 was removed or it is defective. No 

output voltage at the power supply terminal 

clamps. 

Battery capacity not sufficient for safe UPS 

operation. 

Batteries are automatically checked every 15 

minutes. If a battery fault is detected during this 

test, the indicating contact and the LED "Battery 

low" are activated for the approx. 30 sec. test 

period. 

The unit features an automatic battery load test. For this, the internal batteries' status is checked at 

regular intervals (approx. 15 minutes). 

This takes place by voltage measuring while simultaneously demanding a defined load current for a 

period of approx. 30 sec. 


Page 172


If during this test the battery voltage should drop below approx. 21.5 V, the indicating contact (3 – 2 – 

1) "Battery low" is reversed and this shows that the battery capacity will not sustain a UPS operating 

mode. 

This warning will be indicated for the said test period of approx. 30 sec. or until the battery voltage has 

been increased to approx. 23 V . This may also take place when the battery voltage rises during a 

recharging process after previous discharging, e.g. in the course of UPS operation. 

This warning message is reset after the test phase and will be reactivated again during the next 

battery load test. This is the reason for the cyclic indication of the battery fault as described above. 

The battery load test is an effective instrument for checking the true battery state. A negative result, 

i.e. a warning message is issued, may be caused by one or more of the following : 

• Charge status too low. 

• Battery fuse has failed. 

• Battery not correctly connected. 

• Battery is defective. 

• Battery is too old, and must be replaced. 

3. Commissioning 

1. Insert the battery fuse between the batteries in the fuse holder (protection against total discharge 

during storage). 

2. Connect input and output terminal connections (refer to items 2.1 and 2.2). 

3. Switch on the input voltage (115 – 230 Volt). 

From now on, the connected nurse call system devices are supplied with 24 V DC. 

4. The green LED "Power" is on due to the voltage at the terminal clamps. 

If the red LED "Battery low“ is on, the UPS function is not yet active 

(Place the bridging contact x – y). 

5. Now the power supply unit UPS is fully operational. 

4. Shutting the power supply UPS off 

1. Shut off the input voltage (115 – 230 Volt). 

2. Remove the UPS function acc. to item 2.3.1 (Remove the bridging contact), otherwise the load for 

the user circuits will be supplied through the battery until the total discharge circuit disconnects the 

battery. 

5. Service 

To ensure the safe function of the system, batteries should be replaced every 3 years - depending on 

the ambient temperature (Refer to diagram 1, Item 6). After 3 – 5 years, the battery capacity has 

dropped to approx. 60%. 

6. Battery service life 

The power supply unit UPS comes with sealed, service-free and rechargeable led-gel batteries VRLA. 

According to the EUROBAT classification, these batteries have a useful service life of 5 – 7 years. 

This time, however, strongly depends on the relevant ambient temperature. (Up to 20 °C: 7 – 8 years 

as shown in diagram 1) 


Page 173


If the system will not be used for an extended period of time, the batteries should be fully charged to 

prevent a total discharge. (Refer to item 7 "Storage") After the charging process has been completed 

the power supply unit has to be disconnected from the mains supply and the battery fuse (under the 

left cover) has to be removed. 

Battery service life (years) 

Temperature 

Diagram 1: Battery service life in relation to ambient temperature 

6.1 Battery change 

Pb 

Lead batteries contain harmful toxic substances. Observe general and local safety 

directives when during handling and transport. For disposal, comply with local directives. 

Batteries bear the risk of excessive short-circuit currents. Never create any direct contact 

between the battery posts and or other conductive component parts. Therefore remove any 

wristband, watch, finger rings or other metal objects when working at the open power supply 

unit. Always use tools with standard isolating handles. 

Batteries may be replaced only by the same type of battery (2 x 12 V; 7 Ah). We recommend the use 

of the battery type BAT 24-7, Tunstall Order No. 00 0648 85. The use of other makes may create 

problems due to different connecting terminals or differing dimensions. 

1. Shut off mains supply to the power supply unit UPS !!! 

2. Release the 4 fastening screws for the left cover and remove the cover to the front. 

3. Confirm the position of the old battery and after its removal, install the new battery in the 

same manner. 

4. Make sure, the new battery is in the same position and check for the correct battery 

contacts. False connections may damage the power supply UPS ! 

5. Check for the correct seating of the plastic cover for the batteries. 

6. Fix the battery position by securing it with the Velcro tape. 

7. Replace and close the housing. 

8. Perform a functional check of the power supply UPS! 


Page 174


7. Storage 

If the power supply unit UPS will not be used for an extended period of time, the batteries must first 

be fully recharged to preclude battery damage due to total discharging. (Refer to item 6 Battery 

service life). 

For the charging process, the power supply unit UPS shall be connected to the mains supply for at 

least 4 hours, and the UPS function shall be activated by placing the bridging contact between "x“ and 

"y“. After the charging process has been completed the power supply unit has to be disconnected from 

the mains supply and the battery fuse (under the left cover) has to be removed. 

• 


Spare part Order No. 

Rechargeable lead-gel battery, Type BAT 24-7 (2 ea. required) incl. 

plastic cover 

00 0648 85 

Battery fuse, internal 20 A FKS 00 0132 03 

Mains fuse, front plate (5 x 20) T 5.0 A 00 0130 41 

Output fuse, bottom 15 A FKS 00 0132 02 

Clamp for mains connection, 3-pole 00 0211 40 

Clamp for 24 V connection, 4-pole 00 0211 41 

Clamp for control and indicator outputs, 7-pole 00 0211 39 

Bridging contact EB 2 – 5 for control clamps "x“ and "y“ 00 0223 56 


Page 175

9. Technical data 


Power supply unit UPS 

Input 

Order No. 77 3400 00 

Nominal input voltage 115 – 230 V AC 

Input voltage range 90 – 264 V AC 

Input frequency 47 – 63 Hz 

Input current 4 A at 115 V AC / 2 A at 230 V AC 

Start-up current surge 22 A at 115 V AC / 44 A at 230 V AC, typical 

Power factor 0.95 at 230 V AC / 0.98 at 115 V AC for full load 

Efficiency 

Output 

88%, typical 

Nominal output current 12.5 A DC 

Output voltage 24 V DC +/- 2% 

Output voltage in battery mode 26,5 – 19,5 V DC, typical 

Calculated output power 288 W 

Rippling of nominal output current < 100 mVeff 

Battery capacity 7 Ah 

Charge current 700 mA, typical 

Bridging time at nominal current approx. 17 min. 

Overload protection < 14 A 

Overvoltage protection, power supply unit 26.7 – 32.4 V DC 

Overtemperature protection 

Battery voltage thresholds 

75 °C +/- 5°C (power diode) 

output voltage switched off, automatic re-engaging 

Switching threshold for UPS mode Ua < 22.5 V, typical 

Switching threshold for warning before battery 

shut-down 

21.5 V, typical 

Switching threshold for total discharge 

protection 


EMC CE-certified EN 55022 Class B; ENV 50204 

EN 61000-3-2, -3; EN 61000-4-2, -3, -4, -5, -6, -8, -11 

Safety EN 60950 

Output Safety low voltage, SELV 

Test voltage PRI – SEC 3 kV 

Protection class I 

Protection (safety) 

Safety devices 

IP 20 


Charging fuse, internal (5 x 20) T 4.0 A 

Mains fusing, front plate (5 x 20) T 5.0 A 

Output fusing, bottom of unit 

General 

15 A FKS 

Cooling convection, free air flow 

Permissible ambient temperature 0 ... +50 °C 

Storage temperature -25 ... + 60 °C 

MTBF 100,000 hours (no for batteries) 

Weight approx. 9 kg 

Dimensions (HxWxD) 244 x 325 x 178 mm 

Mounting Wall mounting 

Connecting clamps Screw / plug-in connections 


Page 176

Power supply unit UPS 60, Order No. 77 3400 10 

The power supply unit UPS 60 is a power supply unit and includes the electronics that builds up an 

uninterrupted power supply (UPS) in combination with battery set for UPS 60 (order no. 77 3450 00). 

Input voltage of 115 - 230 V AC is transformed into 24 V DC output voltage. The UPS feature ensures 

the supply of the connected DC users also in case of a mains power failure. 

If the mains input voltage fails or when it drops to less than 90 VAC, the two connected lead batteries 

will continue to supply the users without any interruption. 

To protect the batteries from going flat, circuit breakers will open when during the UPS mode the 

output voltage drops below to 19.5 V. When the mains supply voltage is active again, the system 

reverts to its normal operating mode. 

Roughly every 15 minutes, an integrated test circuitry performs a voltage check at the battery 

terminals, the connections and at the circuit breakers. Upon the return of the mains supply current, the 

battery is isolated from the outputs, and the internal charging module recharges the battery. 


1. Mounting 



• The power supply unit UPS 60 should only be installed and commissioned by 

qualified specialists. 






current. 



jeopardised. 




mixture! 

• If the power supply unit UPS 60 will not be used for a longer time, first the batteries 

have to be fully charged. After that the power supply unit UPS 60 has to be 

disconnected from the mains supply. Furthermore the battery connection cable must 

be disconnected from the battery set for UPS 60 (see chapter 2.1). Alternatively the 

battery fuse in the battery set for UPS 60 can be removed. 

The power supply unit UPS 60 is designed for wall mounting. Bore holes are prepared at the housing 

for fixing the unit at the wall using the enclosed mounting material. A dimensional drawing is shown on 

the next page. 


The power supply unit UPS 60 weighs approx. 4 kg. 






Page 177



2. Connection 

The internal connection terminals are provided as screw/plug-in clamps and cage clamp/plug-in 

clamps. 

2.1 Mains and battery connection 



1. Release 4 screws for the left cover and remove the cover to the front. 

Now, the terminal connection clamps for the mains connection are accessible. 

2. Direct the mains connecting cable through the right cable duct into the housing and connect to the 

mains terminal posts (3 pole) as designated in the housing. 

CAUTION ! Check for the correct and positive 

connection of the protective conductor. 

3. Secure the mains connecting cable against being pulled from the housing for example by fixing 

the installation cable with the screwed cable gland. 

4. Direct the battery connecting cable through the left smaller cable duct into the housing and 

connect to the battery terminal posts (2 pole) as designated in the housing 

CAUTION ! Check for the correct connection, 

orientation and locking with srews. 

5. Secure the battery connecting cable against being pulled from the housing for example by fixing 

the installation cable with the screwed cable gland. 




When in mains operation, the electronic module monitors the output voltage. When the load current 

exceeds approx. 12.5 A, the output voltage is reduced with keeping a constant current depending on 

the value of resistance of the connected overload. 

Further to this, the output current is limited by a 15 A flat fuse "F2". After the cause for the overload 

has been eliminated the output voltage reverts to the must value 24 V. It is a self reverting output 

voltage. 


Page 178



2.3 Control terminal clamps x + y 

The control terminal clamps "x" and "y" are used to prepare the unit for the uninterrupted power supply 

(UPS mode). 

2.3.1 Preparing the UPS function by placing a bridge contact between "x" and "y" 

• Connect the control terminal clamps "x" and "y" using the enclosed bridging contact or via a 

potential-free 'make contact'. The current for the bridging contact is approx. 1 mA.. 

2.3.2 LED and indicator outputs 1 - 5 

The five indicator outputs 1 – 5 at the 7-pole terminal block indicate the status of the unit via potentialfree 

relay contacts. The current load for these contacts is up to 125 V / 1.5 A / 60 VA. 

2.3.2.1 Green LED "Power" (mains supply mode and bridging contact between "x" and "y" 

closed) 

Only green LED "Power“ is on. 

Contacts 3 – 1 & 3 - 5 are closed. 

2.3.2.2 Amber LED "Battery active" 



2.3.2.3 Red LED "Battery low" 

During mains failure 



Amber LED "Battery active“ and red LED "Battery 

low“ are on. 


All LEDs are off. 


24 V voltage is available at the terminal clamp. 

Battery mode 

(when bridging contact between "x" and "y" is 

closed) 

The 24 V voltage at the terminal clamp is from the 

battery. 

The voltage at the terminal clamps depends on 

the relevant battery charge state. 

When the output voltage has dropped to 

approx. 19.5 V, the power supply unit will shut off 

(protection against totally flat battery) 

After the input voltage (115 - 230 Volt) has been reactivated again, the output clamps will be supplied 

with 24 V DC, and the batteries will be recharged automatically. 

2.3.2.4 Red LED "Output Failure Fuse F2" 

Green LED "Power“ and red LED "Output Failure 

Fuse F2" are on 

2.3.4 Battery test 

Green LED "Power“ is on and red LED "Battery 

low“ illuminates for 30 seconds every 15 minutes. 

Contact 3 – 2 is closed for 30 seconds every 15 

minutes. 

Output fuse F2 was removed or it is defective. No 

output voltage at the power supply terminal 

clamps. 

Battery capacity not sufficient for safe UPS 

operation. 

Batteries are automatically checked every 15 

minutes. If a battery fault is detected during this 

test, the indicating contact and the LED "Battery 

low" are activated for the approx. 30 sec. test 

period. 


Page 179


The unit features an automatic battery load test. For this, the connected batteries' status is checked at 

regular intervals (approx. 15 minutes). 

This takes place by voltage measuring while simultaneously demanding a defined load current for a 

period of approx. 30 sec. 

If during this test the battery voltage should drop below approx. 21.5 V, the indicating contact (3 – 2 – 

1) "Battery low" is reversed and this shows that the battery capacity will not sustain a UPS operating 

mode. 

This warning will be indicated for the said test period of approx. 30 sec. or until the battery voltage has 

been increased to approx. 23 V. This may also take place when the battery voltage rises during a 

recharging process after previous discharging, e.g. in the course of UPS operation. 

This warning message is reset after the test phase and will be reactivated again during the next 

battery load test. This is the reason for the cyclic indication of the battery fault as described above. 

The battery load test is an effective instrument for checking the true battery state. A negative result, 

i.e. a warning message is issued, may be caused by one or more of the following : 







1. Connect input, output and battery terminal connections (refer to items 2.1 and 2.2). 

2. Switch on the input voltage (115 – 230 Volt). 


3. The green LED "Power" is on due to the voltage at the terminal clamps. 

If the red LED "Battery low“ is on, the UPS function is not yet active 

(Place the bridging contact x – y). 

4. Now the power supply unit UPS is fully operational. 

4. Shutting the power supply UPS 60 off 

1. Shut off the input voltage (115 – 230 Volt). 

2. Remove the UPS function acc. to item 2.3.1 (Remove the bridging contact), otherwise the load for 

the user circuits will be supplied through the battery until the total discharge circuit disconnects the 

battery. 

5. Service 





The batteries connected to the power supply unit UPS 60 are sealed, service-free and rechargeable 

lead-gel batteries VRLA. According to the EUROBAT classification, these batteries have a useful 


Page 180


service life of 5 – 7 years. This time, however, strongly depends on the relevant ambient temperature. 

(Up to 20 °C: 7 – 8 years as shown in diagram 1) 


prevent a total discharge. (Refer to item 7 "Storage") While the system is not used, the battery fuse 

has to be removed to prevent total discharge. 


Temperature 



Pb 

Lead-gel batteries contain harmful toxic substances. Observe valid safety directives when 

during handling and transport. For disposal, comply with local directives. 



wristband, watch, finger rings or other metal objects when working at the open unit. Always 

use tools with standard isolating handles. 


of two batteries type BAT 12-24, Tunstall Order No. 00 0648 87. The use of other makes may create 


1. Shut off mains supply to the power supply unit UPS 60 !!! 

2. Refer to the information for the battery set for UPS 60, order no. 77 3450 00. 

3. Perform a functional check of the power supply UPS 60! 

7. Storage 

If the power supply unit UPS 60 will not be used for an extended period of time, the connected 

batteries must first be fully recharged to preclude battery damage due to total discharging. (Refer to 

item 6 Battery service life). 

• For the charging process, the power supply unit UPS 60 shall be connected to the mains supply 

for at least 4 hours, and the UPS function shall be activated by placing the bridging contact 

between "x“ and "y“. 

• While the power supply unit UPS 60 is not used, the power supply unit UPS 60 must be 

disconnected from the batteries of battery set for UPS 60 to prevent total discharge. 


Page 181




Mains fuse, front plate (5 x 20) T 5.0 A 00 0130 41 

Output fuse, bottom 15 A FKS 00 0132 02 

Clamp for mains connection, 3-pole 00 0211 40 

Clamp for 24 V connection, 4-pole 00 0211 41 

Clamp for control and indicator outputs, 7-pole 00 0211 39 

Clamp for battery connection, 2 pole 00 0211 20 

Bridging contact EB 2 – 5 for control clamps "x“ and "y“ 00 0223 56 


Power supply unit UPS 60 Order No. 77 3400 10 

Input 




Input current 5.5 A at 115 V AC / 3 A at 230 V AC 


Power factor 0.95 at 230 V AC / 0.98 at 115 V AC for full load 

Efficiency 88%, typical 

Output 



Output voltage in battery mode 26.5 – 19.5 V DC, typical 



Battery capacity to be connected 24 Ah 

Charge current 3.0 A, typical 

Bridging time at nominal current approx. 1 hour 

Overload protection < 14 A 

Overvoltage protection, power supply unit 26.7 – 32.4 V DC 

Overtemperature protection 75 °C +/- 5°C (power diode) 


Battery voltage thresholds 

Switching threshold for UPS mode Ua < 22.5 V, typical 

Switching threshold for warning before battery 

shut-down 


Switching threshold for total discharge 

protection 



EN 61000-3-2, -3; EN 61000-4-2, -3, -4, -5, -6, -8, -11 




Protection class I 

Ingress Protection 

Fuses 

IP 20 

Charging fuse, internal (5 x 20) T 4.0 A 

Mains fusing, front plate (5 x 20) T 5.0 A 

Output fusing, bottom of unit 

General 

15 A FKS 




MTBF 100,000 hours 




Connecting clamps Screw / cage clamp plug-in connections 


Page 182

Power supply unit, Order No. 77 3401 00 

The power supply unit generates a 24 V DC output voltage using 115 - 230 V AC mains supply 

voltage. An integrated monitoring circuitry limits the output current to 12.5 A DC nearly. Two LEDs on 

the front face indicate the status at the output clamps. 


1. Mounting 



• The power supply unit should only be installed and operated by qualified specialists. 




current. 





jeopardised. 


The power supply unit is designed for wall mounting. Bore holes are prepared at the housing for fixing 

the unit at the wall using the enclosed mounting material. 

Before mounting, check the condition of the wall itself. (Weight: approx. 2 kg) 

The unit must be mounted such that the venting ports are at the top and bottom. The selected location 

must ensure sufficient air circulation above and below the unit. Therefore, check for minimum distance 

of 50 mm to walls, ceiling and other equipment. The venting ports must not be covered up. Insufficient 

air circulation may lead to damage to the power supply unit. 


Page 183


2. Connection 

The internal connection terminals are provided as screw/plug-in clamps. 

2.1 Mains connection 



1. Release 4 screws of the left cover and remove the cover to the front. 


2. Direct the mains cable through the cable duct into the housing and connect to the appropriate 

terminal posts as designated in the unit. 

NOTE: To simplify this process, you may pull the input connector, connect the wires as shown and 

replace the plug in its socket. 

CAUTION ! Check for the correct and positive connection of the protective conductor. 

3. Secure the connecting cable against being pulled from the housing for example by fixing the 

installation cable with cable clamps. 





output voltage. Starting at a load current level of more than approx. 12.5 A DC, the output voltage is 

reduced while keeping a constant current load. 

This is a self-correcting output voltage feature, as the output voltage will be reactivated, if the overload 

current drops below its trigger value of approx. 12.5 A. Further to this, the output voltage is protected 

by a 15 A flat fuse "F2". 


2.3 LEDs at the front face 

2.3.1 Green LED "Power" 

Green LED "Power“ is on. 24 V voltage is available at the terminal clamps. 

2.3.2 Red LED "Output Failure Fuse F2" 

Red LED "Output Failure Fuse F2" and green 

LED “+24 V Power” are on. 

2.4 Indicator clamps (3, 4, 5) 

Output fuse failed or was removed. No voltage is 

available at the output clamps. 

The clamps 3, 4 and 5 are potential-free switching contacts for indicating the current operating state: 

Contact 3 – 4 closed. 

Green LED "Power“ is off. 

Contact 3 – 5 closed. 

Green LED "Power“ is on. 

No mains supply. No voltage available at the 

output clamps. 

24 V voltage is available at the terminal clamps. 

The indication "No mains power" may have several causes, e.g.: 

• No input voltage at the power supply unit. 

• When the load current exceeds approx. 12.5 A, the output current is reduced until the overload 

situation at the output clamps has been corrected. 

• Output fuse was removed or damaged. (Red LED "Output Failure Fuse F2“ is on) 

• "Mains Fuse F1“ missing or defective. 


Page 184



1. Connect input and output terminal connections. (Refer to items 2.1 and 2.2) 

2. Switch on the input voltage. 


The green LED "Power" is on due to the voltage at the terminal clamps. 



Mains Fuse F1 (5 x 20) T 5,0 A 00 0130 41 

Output fuse F2 FKS 15 A 00 0132 02 

Clamp for input voltage, 3-pole 00 0211 40 

Clamp for 0 V and +24 V, 4-pole 00 0211 41 

Indicator clamp, 7-pole 00 0211 39 


Power supply unit 

Input 

Order No. 77 3401 00 




Input current 4 A at 115 V AC / 2 A at 230 V AC 


Power factor 0.95 at 230 V AC / 0.98 at 115 V AC under full load 

Efficiency 

Output 

88%, typical 

Nominal output current 12,5 A DC 




Overload protection, power supply unit, 

internal 

< 14 A 

Overvoltage protection, power supply 

unit 

26.7 – 32.4 V DC, typical 

Overtemperature protection 75 °C +/- 5°C (power diode) 



EN 61000-3-2, -3; EN 61000-4-2, -3, -4, -5, -6, -8, -11 


Output Safety low voltage SELV 


Protection class Class I 

Protection 

Safety devices 

IP 20 

Mains Fuse F1 (5 x 20) T 5.0 A 

Output fuse F2 FKS 

General 

15 A FKS 

Cooling Convection, free airflow 



MTBF 100,000 hours 




Connecting clamps Screw / plug-in clamps 


Page 185

Battery Set for UPS 60, Order No. 77 3450 00 

The battery set for UPS 60 are rechargeable batteries (= accumulators) that build an uninterrupted 

power supply (UPS) in combination with the power supply unit UPS 60, order no. 77 3400 10. 

If the mains input voltage fails or when it drops to less than 90 VAC, the two lead-gel batteries will 

continue to supply the users connected to the power supply unit UPS 60 without any interruption. 


1. Mounting 

• The battery set may only be used together with the power supply unit UPS 60, order 

no. 77 3400 10. The safety instructions delivered with this power supply unit have to 

be observed as well. 

• The power supply unit UPS should only be installed and commissioned by qualified 

specialists. 

• Before effecting any work at or with the power supply unit UPS, it must be isolated 

from any input voltage and the battery fuse (located between the batteries) has to be 

removed. 




mixture! 

• If the battery set for UPS 60 will not be used for a longer time, first the batteries have 

to be fully charged. After that the batteries must be disconnected from the mains 

supply. This can be done by disconnecting the battery connection cable from the 

power supply unit UPS 60 (see chapter 2.). Alternatively the battery fuse can be 

removed. 

The battery set for UPS 60 is designed for wall mounting. Bore holes are prepared at the housing for 

fixing the unit at the wall – preferably under the power supply unit - using the enclosed mounting 

material. A dimensional drawing is shown on the next page. 


The battery set for UPS 60 weighs approx. 25.2 kg. 






Page 186



2. Connection 

The connection terminals are provided as cage srew/plug-in clamps. 

1. Release 6 fastening screws for the cover and remove the cover to the front. 


2. Direct the connection cable through the cable duct into the power supply unit and connect to the 

appropriate terminal posts as designated in the power supply unit. 

CAUTION! Check for the correct connection, orientation and screwing. 

3. Secure the connection cable against being pulled from the housing for example by fixing the 

installation cable with the screwed cable gland. 

2.1 Battery test 

The power supply unit features an automatic battery load test. The battery load test is an effective 

instrument for checking the true battery state. A negative result, i.e. a warning message is issued, may 

be caused by one or more of the following: 







Page 187

3. Service 






The battery set UPS 60 comes with sealed, service-free and rechargeable lead-gel batteries VRLA. 

According to the EUROBAT classification, these batteries have a useful service life of 5 – 7 years. 

This time, however, strongly depends on the relevant ambient temperature. (Up to 20 °C: 7 – 8 years 

as shown in diagram 1) 


prevent a total discharge. (Refer to item 5 "Storage") While the system is not used, the battery fuse 

(located between the two batteries) has to be removed to prevent total discharge. After the charging 

process has been completed, the battery set for UPS 60 has to be disconnected from the power 

supply unit UPS 60 by disconnecting the battery connection cable (see chapter 2.) or by removing the 

battery fuse. 


Temperature 



Pb 

Lead-gel batteries contain harmful toxic substances. Observe valid safety directives when 

during handling and transport. For disposal, comply with local directives. 



wristband, watch, finger rings or other metal objects when working at the open unit. Always 

use tools with standard isolating handles. 


of the battery type BAT 12-24, Tunstall Order No. 00 0648 87. The use of other makes may create 


1. Shut off mains supply to the power supply unit UPS !!! 

2. Release the 6 fastening screws for the cover and remove the cover to the front. 

3. Confirm the position of the old batteries and after their removal, install the new batteries 

in the same manner. 

4. Make sure, the new batteries are in the same position and check for the correct battery 

contacts. False connections may damage the power supply unit UPS ! 

5. Put the rubber grommets back on the connection screws. 

6. Fix the battery position by securing it with the Velcro tape. 


Page 188


5. Storage 

7. Replace and close the housing. 

8. Perform a functional check of the power supply UPS! 

If the battery set for UPS 60 will not be used for an extended period of time, the batteries must first be 

fully recharged by the power supply unit UPS to preclude battery damage due to total discharging. 

(Refer to item 4 Battery service life). 

• For the charging process, the power supply unit UPS shall be connected to the mains supply for at 

least 4 hours, and the UPS function shall be activated by placing the bridging contact between "x“ 

and "y“. 

• While the system is not used, the battery fuse (located between the two batteries) has to be 

removed to prevent total discharge. 



Rechargeable lead-gel battery, Type BAT 12-24 (2 batteries required) 00 0648 87 

Battery fuse, internal 20 A FKS 00 0132 03 

Clamp for battery connection, 2 pole 00 0211 20 


Battery Set for UPS 60 Order No. 77 3450 00 

Input 

Nominal input voltage 24 V DC 

Output 


Battery capacity 24 Ah 



Protection class III 

Ingress Protection IP 20 

Fuses 


General 




Weight approx. 25.2 kg 



Connecting clamps Screw / plug-in connections 


Page 189


Page 190 


14.11 Installation 

77 4000 00 OSYnet‐Y‐RepeaterOpto 

77 4001 00 OSYnet‐Gateway 


Page 191 




OSYnet-Y-RepeaterOpto, Best.‐Nr. 77 4000 00 

Datenrepeater zur galvanischen Trennung des Gruppenbus (OSYnet). Vorgesehen zur 

Aufteilung und/oder Trennung des Gruppenbus OSYnet in 2 unabhängige Teilstrecken, 

Y-Verteilung. Einsetzbar einmal pro physikalischer Gruppe. 

Direkter Anschluss an den Gruppenbus (OSYnet) und dessen Teilstrecken. 

Hutschienenmontage 35 mm, anreihbar. 


Stromversorgung: 24 V DC (8 ... 30 V DC) 

Stromaufnahme (bei 20 °C): ca. 60 mA 


Busteilnehmer 

z.B. OSYlink 

OSYnet Teil 2 


00 8802 50, 10/11 (Rev. 3.0) 

2 

3 

1 

OSYnet Teil 3 

OSYnet Teil 1 

Gruppenbus OSYnet = Teil 2 + Teil 3 + Teil 1 = max. 700 m 



120 

120 

OSYnet-Y-RepeaterOpto, order no. 77 4000 00 

Data repeater for electrical isolation of the group bus (OSYnet). Intended for branching 

and/or isolation of the group bus OSYnet into 2 autonomous sections, Y-branching. One 

repeater can be used per physical group. 

Direct connection to the group bus (OSYnet) and its branch sections. 

Mounting on top‐hat rail (35 mm), several units can be mounted side‐by‐side. 


Power supply: 24 V DC (8 ... 30 V DC) 

Current consumption (at 20 °C): approx. 60 mA 


bus user 

eg. OSYlink 

OSYnet section 2 


2 

3 

1 



Group bus OSYnet = section 2 + section 3 + section 1 = max. 700 m 


manual. 

OSYnet‐Teilstrecken anschließen Connection of OSYnet sections 

Zum Schraubanschluss der OSYnet‐Teilstrecken benötigen Sie drei 

OSYnet‐Anschlussstecker , Best.‐Nr. 77 0950 00. 

Der Anschlusspunkt CAN Net 1 ist galvanisch von den anderen Teilen getrennt. Deshalb 

muss die Teilstrecke des OSYnet, die von den anderen galvanisch getrennt werden soll, an 

den Anschlusspunkt CAN Net 1 angeschlossen werden. 

Die PIN‐Belegungen entnehmen Sie der Abbildung A. 

Spannungsversorgung anschließen Connection of power supply 

Die Spannungsversorgung oben oder unten am OSYnet‐Y‐RepeaterOpto anschließen 

(Schraubanschluss). 

Achtung! Die Spannungsversorgung darf nicht “durchgeschliffen” werden. D.h. es ist nicht 

erlaubt die eine Seite als 24V‐Eingang und die andere Seite als 24V‐Ausgang zu 

verwenden, um z.B. weitere Geräte zu versorgen. 

Kontroll‐LEDs Control LEDs 

OSYnet Teil 1 



power supply 

Kontroll‐LEDs 

control LEDs 

OSYnet Teil 2 



power supply 

OSYnet Teil 3 


LED leuchtet, wenn alle Baugruppen im OSYnet‐Y‐Repeater 

außer für OSYnet Teil 1 mit Spannung versorgt sind 

LED leuchtet, wenn Baugruppe im OSYnet‐Y‐Repeater 

für OSYnet Teil 1 mit Spannung versorgt ist 

keine Funktion 

LED leuchtet bei Datenverkehr OSYnet Teil 3 



77 4000 00 


Page 192 

For screw connection of the OSYnet sections you need three OSYnet connecting plugs, 

order no. 77 0950 00. 

Connection point CAN Net 1 is electrically isolated from the other parts. That's why the 

OSYnet section, that should be electrically isolated from the others, has to be connected to 

connection point CAN Net 1. 

For the pin assignment refer to the figure A. 

Connect the power supply cable to the connection clamp on the top or the bottom of the 

OSYnet‐Y‐RepeaterOpto (screw connection). 

Attention! The power supply may not be connected through. I.e. it is not allowed to use one 

connection clamp as 24 V input and the other connection clamp as 24 V output e.g. for 

supply of further devices. 

Pin 2: DL 

Pin 3: DG 

1 2 3 4 5 

6 7 8 9 

Pin 7: DH 

Pin 6: DG 

optional 

LED on, if all subassemblies in the OSYnet‐Y‐Repeater 

except for OSYnet section 1 are supplied with power. 

LED on, if subassembly in the OSYnet‐Y‐Repeater 

for OSYnet section 1 is supplied with power. 

no function 

LED on for data traffic OSYnet section 3 



Anschluss an Spannungsversorgung 

Connection to power supply 

Connect on the top or the bottom. 

Oben oder unten anschließen. 

+24 V 

0 V 

Externe Klemme 

External connector 

77 4000 00 

0 V 

+24 V 

120 

120 

0 V 

0 V 

+24 V 

77 4000 00 

0 V 

zu weiteren Verbrauchern 

to further current consumers 

Sicherungshalter (00 0130 18) mit 

Sicherungseinsatz (00 0130 17) und 

Feinsicherung 5 x 20 mm, T100mA 

Fuse holder (00 0130 18) with fuse insert 

(00 0130 17) and micro-fuse 5 x 20 mm, 

100 mA/slow-acting (00 0130 45)



OSYnet-Gateway, Best.‐Nr. 77 4001 00 

Aktives Gateway zur galvanischen Trennung des Gruppenbus OSYnet. Vorgesehen zur 

Verlängerung der max. Leitungslänge des Gruppenbus OSYnet um 700 m. Einsetzbar 

einmal pro physikalischer Gruppe. 

Direkter Anschluss an den Gruppenbus (OSYnet) und dessen Teilstrecken 

Hutschienenmontage 35 mm, anreihbar 


Stromversorgung: 24 V DC 

Max. Stromaufnahme (bei 20 °C): 50 mA 


00 8802 51, 10/11 (Rev. 3.1) 


OSYnet Teil 1 = max. 700 m OSYnet Teil 2 = max. 700 m 

Gruppenbus OSYnet = Teil 1 + Teil 2 



120 Ω 

OSYnet-Gateway, order no. 77 4001 00 

Active gateway for electrical isolation of the group bus (OSYnet). Intended for extension of 

the maximum cable length to additional 700 m. One gateway can be used per physical 

group. 

Direct connection to the group bus (OSYnet) and its branch sections 

Mounting on top‐hat rail (35 mm), several units can be mounted side‐by‐side 


Power supply: 24 V DC 

Max. current consumption (at 20 °C): 50 mA 



1 ) Si 200 mA/T 

+24V 

+24 V 

0V 

0 V 

DG 

OSYnet 1 OSYnet 2 

DH 

DL 

DG 

DH 

DL 

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 

+24V 

Ip Ip 

0V 

OSYnet Teil 1 

120 Ω 2 ) 

Ip = Spannungsversorgung = NYM 2x2,5mm 2 

OSYnet Teil 2 

120 Ω 2 ) 

1 ) Steck-Schraubklemme mit Si-Halter (00 0224 81), Sicherung 0,2 A Träge (00 0130 42) 

2 ) Hinweis! Zwischen den Anschlusspunkten DH und DL von OSYnet 1 sowie zwischen den 

Anschlusspunkten DH und DL von OSYnet 2 muss jeweils ein Abschlusswiderstand 

gesetzt werden (120 Ohm, Bestell‐Nr. 00 0040 76). 


OSYnet section 1 = max. 700 m OSYnet section 2 = max. 700 m 

group bus OSYnet = section 1 + section 2 


manual. 

1 ) Fuse 200 mA/T 

Kontroll‐LEDs Control LEDs 

Power 

OSYnet 1 Active 


LED leuchtet, wenn OSYnet‐Gateway mit Spannung 

versorgt wird. 




Konfigurationsschnittstelle 

nur für Tunstall GmbH 

Do not use! 

Configuration inferface for 

Tunstall GmbH only 

Kontroll‐LEDs 

control LEDs 

Anschlussklemmen 

Connecting clamps 

Page 193 

+24V 

+24 V 

0V 

0 V 

DG 

OSYnet 1 OSYnet 2 

DH 

DL 

DG 

DH 

DL 

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 

+24V 

Ip Ip 

0V 

OSYnet section1 

120 Ω 2 ) 


120 Ω 2 ) 

Ip = power supply = NYM 2x2,5mm2 1 ) Plug-in screw terminal with fuseholder (00 0224 81), fuse 0,2 A slow-acting (00 0130 42) 

2 ) Note! The connection points DH and DL of OSYnet 1 as well as DH and DL of OSYnet 2 

have to be connected by a terminating resistor (120 Ohm, order no. 00 0040 76) . 

Power 



77 4001 00 


LED on, if OSYnet‐Gateway is supplied with power. 



120 Ω


Page 194 


Find all you want to know about the Flamenco ® nurse call system: 

Tunstall GmbH Orkotten 66 48291 Telgte Germany 

Telephone +49 25 04 7 01-0 Fax +49 25 04 7 01-4 99 

Or visit us on the Web at: www.tunstall.de info@tunstall.de 

Flamenco Technical Manual 00 8812 60 

Flamenco ® Data Sheet Catalogue 

Flamenco ® System Description 

Order No.: 00 8812 64 

Flamenco ® Technical Manual 

Order No.: 00 8812 60 

Flamenco ® Instructions for Use 

The documents are ready for downloading from the Tunstall homepage: 

All the reassurance you need 

www.tunstall.de 

QUALITY 

MANAGEMENT 

SYSTEM 

DQS certified to 

DIN EN ISO 9001 

Reg. no. 56386 

Reg. no. 56386

Flamenco - Technical Manual - Tunstall GmbH

Create successful ePaper yourself

Delete template?

Save as template?